Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren. Operator`s Manual.

Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren. Operator`s Manual.
Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren Operator’s Manual
Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren.
Operator’s Manual.
M e r c e d e s - B e n z S L R M c L a r e n . O p era t or’s Ma nua l.
SLR. UNLIMITED.
Thank you for choosing Mercedes-Benz
Our company and staff congratulate you on the purchase of your new Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren.
Your selection of our product is a demonstration of your trust in our company name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your desire to own
an automobile that will be as easy as possible to operate and provide years of service.
Should you have any questions, please contact your dealer contact for your Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren or call us at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-888-881-6611 (in Canada). Your dealer contact will co-ordinate appointments for servicing of
your vehicle and clarify any issues arising from the use of your Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts of many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To help assure your driving pleasure, and also
the safety of you and your passengers, we ask you to make a small investment of time:
앫
Please read this manual carefully, then return it to your vehicle where it will be handy for your reference.
앫
Please follow the recommendations contained in this manual. They are designed to acquaint you with the operation of your
Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren.
앫
Please pay attention to the warnings and cautions contained in this manual. They are designed to help improve the safety of the
vehicle operator and occupants.
We extend our best wishes for many miles of safe, pleasurable driving.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A DaimlerChrysler Company
Contents
Contents
Introduction .......................................
Product information.............................
Operator’s Manual ...............................
Service and warranty information ..
Important notice for California
retail buyers and lessees of
Mercedes-Benz automobiles ..........
Maintenance ..................................
Roadside Assistance ......................
Change of address or ownership....
Operating your vehicle outside
the USA or Canada.........................
Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren
compliance ....................................
Where to find it....................................
Symbols...............................................
Operating safety ..................................
Proper use of the vehicle ...............
Problems with your vehicle..................
Reporting safety defects......................
Reporting safety defects ................
Vehicle data recording.........................
Information regarding electronic
recording devices...........................
12
13
14
14
15
16
16
16
17
17
18
19
20
20
21
22
22
23
23
At a glance .......................................... 24
Cockpit................................................. 26
Instrument cluster ................................ 28
Multifunction steering wheel ................ 30
Center console ..................................... 31
Upper part ...................................... 31
Lower part ...................................... 32
Overhead control panel ........................ 33
Control panel on the door sill ............... 34
Getting started...................................
Unlocking .............................................
Starter switch positions..................
Adjusting ..............................................
Seats ..............................................
Steering wheel................................
Mirrors............................................
Driving..................................................
Fastening the seat belts .................
Starting the engine .........................
Switching on the headlamps...........
Turn signals ....................................
Windshield wipers...........................
Problems while driving....................
Parking and locking..............................
Parking brake .................................
Switching off headlamps.................
Turning off the engine.....................
36
38
40
42
42
43
44
46
46
49
52
53
53
55
57
57
58
59
Contents
Safety and Security ...........................
Occupant safety...................................
Airbags ...........................................
Seat belts .......................................
Children in the vehicle....................
Panic alarm ..........................................
Activating .......................................
Deactivating ...................................
Driving safety systems.........................
ABS ................................................
BAS ................................................
ESP.................................................
SBC brake system ..........................
Performance enhancement system .....
Airbrake..........................................
Anti-theft systems................................
Immobilizer.....................................
Anti-theft alarm system..................
Tow-away alarm .............................
60
62
63
69
72
78
78
78
79
79
81
81
84
87
87
90
90
90
92
Controls in detail ............................... 94
Locking and unlocking ......................... 96
SmartKey ....................................... 96
Opening the doors ....................... 100
Opening the trunk ........................ 101
Closing the trunk lid..................... 102
Trunk lid emergency release ........ 102
Automatic locking ........................ 103
Locking and unlocking from
the inside ..................................... 103
Lighting.............................................. 105
Exterior lamp switch..................... 105
Combination switch ..................... 109
Hazard warning flasher ................ 110
Interior lighting............................. 111
Trunk lamp ................................... 112
Courtesy lighting .......................... 112
Instrument cluster ............................. 113
Instrument cluster illumination .... 113
Coolant temperature gauge ......... 114
Resetting the trip odometer ......... 115
Tachometer.................................. 115
Outside temperature indicator ..... 115
Control system ..................................
Multifunction display....................
Multifunction steering wheel........
Menus..........................................
Standard display menu ................
AUDIO menu ................................
Vehicle status message memory .
Settings menu..............................
Trip computer menu.....................
TEL menu .....................................
Audio system.....................................
Audio and telephone, operation ...
Operating safety ..........................
Location of the audio system.......
Operating and display elements...
Button and soft key operation......
Operation.....................................
Radio operation ...........................
Cassette operation ......................
CD changer operation..................
Telephone operation ....................
Automatic transmission.....................
One-touch gearshifting ................
Gear ranges .................................
117
117
118
120
122
122
124
125
136
138
141
141
141
141
142
144
144
147
150
154
158
165
166
168
Contents
Gear selector lever positions .......
Shift program mode selector
switch ..........................................
Driving tips...................................
Steering wheel gearshift control ..
Manual gearshift program ............
Emergency operation
(Limp Home Mode) ......................
Good visibility ....................................
Headlamp cleaning system ..........
Rear view mirrors .........................
Sun visors ....................................
Rear window defroster .................
Automatic climate control .................
Adjusting the temperature ...........
Adjusting air volume ....................
Adjusting air distribution..............
Maximum cooling MAXCOOL .......
Defrosting the windshield ............
Air recirculation mode..................
Residual heat and ventilation .......
Deactivating the automatic
climate control system.................
Air conditioning............................
169
171
171
172
174
176
177
177
177
178
179
180
183
184
185
185
186
186
188
189
190
Power windows .................................. 191
Opening and closing the
windows........................................ 191
Synchronizing power windows ...... 194
Driving systems .................................. 195
Cruise control ............................... 195
Useful features ................................... 198
Map pocket in passenger
footwell......................................... 198
Storage compartments ................. 198
Parcel net in trunk ........................ 199
Ashtray and cigarette lighter......... 200
12-V socket .................................. 201
Telephone ..................................... 201
Tele Aid......................................... 205
Garage door opener ...................... 213
Floormats...................................... 219
Dust cover .................................... 220
Roof and trunk lid racks................ 223
Operation.......................................... 224
The first 1000 miles (1500 km).......... 226
Driving instructions ............................ 227
Drive sensibly – save fuel ............. 227
Drinking and driving...................... 227
Pedals........................................... 227
Power assistance.......................... 228
Brakes .......................................... 228
Driving off ..................................... 230
Parking ......................................... 230
Tires.............................................. 231
Hydroplaning ................................ 232
Tire traction .................................. 232
Tire speed rating........................... 232
Winter driving instructions............ 233
Standing water ............................. 234
Passenger compartment............... 234
Driving abroad .............................. 234
Control and operation of radio
transmitters .................................. 235
Catalytic converter ....................... 235
Emission control ........................... 236
Coolant temperature .................... 237
Contents
At the gas station...............................
Refueling ......................................
Check regularly and before
a long trip .....................................
Engine compartment..........................
Hood ............................................
Engine oil......................................
Transmission fluid level ................
Coolant.........................................
Trunk .................................................
Batteries.......................................
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system ...........
Tires and wheels ................................
Important guidelines ....................
Tire care and maintenance ...........
Direction of rotation .....................
Loading the vehicle ......................
Recommended tire inflation
pressure .......................................
Checking tire inflation pressure ...
Tire labeling..................................
Load identification........................
238
238
239
241
241
244
246
247
248
248
249
251
251
252
254
254
261
263
269
273
DOT, Tire Identification Number
(TIN) .............................................
Maximum tire load .......................
Maximum tire inflation pressure ..
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards (U.S. vehicles) .............
Tire ply material ...........................
Tire and loading terminology........
Rotating tires ...............................
Anti-theft wheel nuts....................
Winter driving ....................................
Winter tires* ................................
Snow chains.................................
Maintenance......................................
Clearing the maintenance
service indicator...........................
Maintenance service term
exceeded .....................................
Calling up the service due date ....
Resetting the maintenance
service indicator...........................
Vehicle care.......................................
Cleaning and care of the vehicle ..
Vehicle washing ...........................
274
275
276
277
279
279
282
283
285
285
286
287
287
288
288
289
290
290
291
Practical hints .................................
What to do if .....................................
Lamps in instrument cluster ........
Lamp in center console................
Vehicle status messages in the
multifunction display....................
Symbol messages ........................
Where will I find ...? ...........................
First aid kit...................................
TIREFIT kit, electric air pump,
towing eye bolt and vehicle
literature portfolio........................
Compact guide (Canada only) ......
Locking/unlocking in an emergency .
Unlocking the vehicle...................
Replacing SmartKey batteries ...........
SmartKey .....................................
Replacing bulbs .................................
Front lamps..................................
Rear lamps...................................
Replacing the wiper blades................
Removing wiper blades ................
Installing wiper blades .................
294
296
296
304
305
312
349
349
349
350
351
351
353
354
355
356
356
357
357
357
Contents
Flat tire ..............................................
Preparing the vehicle ...................
Sealing tires with TIREFIT kit........
Batteries ............................................
Charging the batteries .................
Towing the vehicle .............................
Installing/reinstalling towing
eye bolt ........................................
Points to bear in mind ..................
Transporting the vehicle...............
Fuses .................................................
358
358
358
363
365
367
369
370
370
371
Technical data .................................. 372
Spare parts service............................. 374
Warranty coverage ............................. 375
Loss of Service and Warranty
Information Booklet ...................... 375
Identification labels ............................ 376
Engine number.............................. 376
Layout of poly-V-belt drive.................. 377
Engine ................................................ 378
Rims and tires .................................... 379
Mixed size tires............................. 380
Winter tires* ................................. 381
Electrical system ................................ 382
Main dimensions ................................ 383
Weights .............................................. 384
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc........... 385
Capacities..................................... 385
Engine oils .................................... 386
Engine oil additives....................... 386
Air conditioner refrigerant ............ 386
Brake fluid .................................... 387
Premium unleaded gasoline.......... 387
Fuel requirements......................... 387
Gasoline additives......................... 388
Coolants ....................................... 389
Windshield and headlamp
washer system.............................. 391
Technical terms ............................... 392
Index ................................................. 398
Introduction
Introduction
Product information
왔 Product information
Please observe the following in your own
best interest:
We recommend using genuine
Mercedes-Benz parts as well as conversion
parts and accessories explicitly approved
by us for your vehicle model.
We have tested these parts to determine
their reliability, safety and special suitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
We are unable to make an assessment for
other products and therefore cannot be
held responsible for them, even if in individual cases an official approval or authorization by governmental or other agencies
should exist. Use of such parts and accessories could adversely affect the safety,
performance or reliability of your vehicle.
Please do not use them.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts as well as
conversion parts and accessories approved by us are available at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center where you will receive comprehensive information, also on
permissible technical modifications, and
where proper installation will be performed.
13
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
This Operator’s Manual contains a great
deal of useful information. We urge you to
read it carefully and familiarize yourself
with the vehicle before driving.
For your own safety and longer service life
of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the instructions and warnings contained in this
manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you
or others. Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Your vehicle may have some or all of the
equipment described in this manual.
Therefore, you may find explanations for
optional equipment not installed in your
vehicle. If you have any questions about
the operation of any equipment, your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
glad to demonstrate the proper procedures.
We continuously strive to improve our
product, and ask for your understanding
that we reserve the right to make changes
in design and equipment. Therefore, information, illustrations, and descriptions in
this Operator’s Manual might differ from
your vehicle.
Service and warranty information
앫
New Car Limited Warranty,
Optional equipment is also described in
this manual, including operating instructions wherever necessary. Since they are
special-order items, the descriptions and
illustrations herein may vary slightly from
the actual equipment of your vehicle.
앫
Emission System Warranty,
앫
Emission Performance Warranty,
앫
California, Maine, Massachusetts and
Vermont1 Emission Control System
Warranty (California, Maine, Massachusetts and Vermont1 only),
앫
State Warranty Enforcement Laws
(Lemon Laws).
If there are any equipment details that are
not shown or described in this Operator’s
Manual, an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center will be glad to inform you of correct
care and operating procedures.
The Service and Warranty Information
Booklet contains detailed information
about the warranties covering your
Mercedes-Benz, including:
The Operator’s Manual and Maintenance
Booklet are important documents and
should be kept with the vehicle.
1
14
At time of printing, the decision regarding compliance with Vermont certification regulations was
still pending. The vehicle may not be permitted to
be registered in Vermont. Check with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details.
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Important notice for California
retail buyers and lessees of
Mercedes-Benz automobiles
Under California law you may be entitled to
a replacement of your vehicle or a refund
of the purchase price or lease price, if
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix
one or more substantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by
its express warranty after a reasonable
number of repair attempts. During the period of 18 months from original delivery of
the vehicle or the accumulation of
18000 miles (approx. 29000 km) on the
odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs
first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or
lessee if one or more of the following occurs:
(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that is
likely to cause death or serious bodily
injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject to
repair two or more times, and you have
directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA,
LLC in writing of the need for its repair,
(2) the same substantial defect or malfunction of a less serious nature than
category (1) has been subject to repair
four or more times and you have directly notified us in writing of the need for
its repair, or
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason
of repair of the same or different substantial defects or malfunctions for a
cumulative total of more than
30 calendar days.
Written notification should be sent to us,
not a dealer, at Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC,
Customer Assistance Center,
Attn: SLR Liaison, Three Paragon Drive,
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350.
15
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Maintenance
Roadside Assistance
Change of address or ownership
The Maintenance Booklet describes all the
necessary maintenance work which should
be performed at regular intervals.
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Program provides factory trained technical
help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to
the toll-free Roadside Assistance number:
If you change your address, be sure to
send in the “Change of Address Notice”
found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or simply call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (in the USA) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer
Service (in Canada) at 1-888-881-6611. It
is in your own interest that we can contact
you should the need arise.
Always have the Maintenance Booklet with
you when you take the vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for service. The service advisor will record each
service in the booklet for you.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)
1-888-881-6611 (in Canada)
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Representatives
24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
For additional information refer to the
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Program brochure in your vehicle literature
portfolio.
16
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all
literature with the vehicle to make it available to the next operator.
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to
send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used
Car” found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes,
or Customer Service (in Canada) at
1-888-881-6611.
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Operating your vehicle outside the USA
or Canada
Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren
compliance
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that:
The Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren vehicle
does not comply with the state certification regulations of select states. It is not
permitted to register the vehicle in such
states. Check with an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for details.
앫
service facilities or replacement parts
may not be readily available,
앫
unleaded gasoline for vehicles with catalytic converters may not be available;
the use of leaded fuels will damage the
catalysts,
앫
gasoline may have a considerably lower octane rating, and improper fuel can
cause engine damage.
17
Introduction
Where to find it
This Operator’s Manual is designed to provide comprehensive support information
for you, the vehicle operator. Each section
has its own reference color.
At a glance
Here you will find an overview of all the
controls that can be operated from the
driver’s seat.
Controls in detail
Technical data
Here you will find detailed information
about the equipment installed on your vehicle. This section expands on the “Getting
started” section and also describes technical innovations. If you are already familiar
with the basic functions of your vehicle,
this section will be of particular interest to
you.
All important technical data for your vehicle can be found in this section.
Getting started
Operation
Here you will find all the information you
need for your first drive. You should read
this section first if this is your first
Mercedes-Benz vehicle or if you are renting or borrowing this vehicle.
Here you will find all the information you
need for the proper operation of your vehicle.
Practical hints
Safety and Security
Here you will find descriptions of the safety
and security features in your vehicle.
18
This section provides fast assistance for
dealing with problems you may encounter.
Indexes
The glossary provides explanations of the
most important technical terms.
The table of contents and the index are designed to help you find information quickly
and easily.
The following publications are part of your
vehicle documentation:
앫
this Operator’s Manual
앫
the Maintenance Booklet
Separate operating instructions will be
provided as required depending on the
equipment options installed in your vehicle.
Introduction
Symbols
왔 Symbols
The following symbols are found in this
Operator’s Manual:
*
Optional equipment is identified
with an asterisk.
Warning!
G
Warning notices draw your attention to hazards that may endanger your health or life,
or the health or life of others.
왘
This symbol points to instructions for
you to follow.
왘
A number of these symbols appearing
in succession indicates a multiple-step
procedure.
컄 Page
This symbol tells you where to
look for further information on a
topic.
컄컄
This continuation symbol marks
an interrupted procedure which
will be continued on the next
page.
->
In the glossary of technical
terms, this symbol is used to indicate cross-references to term
definitions.
Display
Words appearing in the multifunction display are printed in
the type shown here.
!
Highlights hazards that may result in
damage to your vehicle.
i
Helpful hints or further information you
may find useful.
19
Introduction
Operating safety
Warning!
G
Work improperly carried out on electronic
components and associated software could
cause them to cease functioning. Because
the vehicle’s electronic components are interconnected, any modifications made may
produce an undesired effect on other systems. Electronic malfunctions could seriously impair the operating safety of your
vehicle.
See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for repairs or modifications to electronic
components.
Other improper work or modifications on the
vehicle could also have a negative impact on
the operating safety of the vehicle.
Some safety systems only function while the
engine is running. You should therefore never turn off the engine while driving.
20
Warning!
G
Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody
or tires/wheels, for example when running
over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole,
may cause serious damage and impair the
operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel a
sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect that damage to your
vehicle has occurred, you should turn on
your hazard warning flashers, carefully slow
down, and drive with caution to an area
which is a safe distance from the road.
Inspect the vehicle underbody and
tires/wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or other qualified maintenance or repair facility for further inspection or repairs.
Proper use of the vehicle
Proper use of the vehicle requires that you
are familiar with the following information
and rules:
앫
the safety precautions in this manual
앫
the “Technical data” section in this
manual
앫
traffic rules and regulations
앫
motor vehicle laws and safety standards
Warning
G
Various warning labels are attached to your
vehicle. These warning labels are intended
to make you and others aware of various
risks. You should not remove any of these
warning labels unless explicitly instructed to
do so by information on the label itself. Removal of any of these labels may cause you
and others to be unaware of certain risks
which may result in an accident and/or personal injury.
Introduction
Problems with your vehicle
왔 Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to
immediately contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is
not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center management, or if necessary contact us
at one of the following addresses:
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
Attn: SLR Liaison
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Three Paragon Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
21
Introduction
Reporting safety defects
For the USA only:
The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
“National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
Reporting safety defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or
write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.
22
Introduction
Vehicle data recording
왔 Vehicle data recording
Information regarding electronic
recording devices
(Including notice pursuant to California Code § 9951)
Please note that your vehicle is equipped with devices that can record vehicle systems data and, if equipped with the Tele Aid system,
may transmit some data in certain accidents.
This information helps, for example, to diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and to continuously improve vehicle safety.
DaimlerChrysler may access the information and share it with others
앫
for safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes
앫
with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee
앫
in response to an official request by law enforcement or other government agency
앫
for use in dispute resolution involving DaimlerChrysler, its affiliates or sales/service organization and/or
앫
as otherwise required or permitted by law.
Please check the Tele Aid subscription service agreement for details regarding the information that may be recorded or transmitted
via that system.
23
At a glance
Cockpit
Instrument cluster
Multifunction steering wheel
Center console
Overhead control panel
Control panel on the door sill
At a glance
Cockpit
26
At a glance
Cockpit
Item
Page
1 Hood lock release
241
2 Cruise control lever
195
3 Instrument cluster
28,
113
4 Multifunction steering wheel
5 Overhead control panel
6 Center console
7 Starter switch
30,
118
Item
9 Steering wheel adjustment
stalk
Page
43
a Headlamp washer button
177
b Exterior lamp switch
52,
105
c Combination switch
33
앫
Turn signals
53
31, 32
앫
Windshield wipers
54
40
앫
High beam
109
8 Horn
27
At a glance
Instrument cluster
28
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Item
Page
1 Coolant temperature gauge
with
D Coolant temperature
warning lamp
Item
Page
3 Left multifunction display
with
300
2 Speedometer with
앫
Trip odometer
117
앫
Main odometer
117
Page
1 Supplemental restraint
system indicator lamp
302
< Seat belt telltale
302
6 Right multifunction display
앫
Current gear selector lever
position/gear range
117,
168,
169
앫
Outside temperature
115
299
앫
Automatic transmission
shift program mode
117,
171
± Engine malfunction indicator lamp, Canada
only
299
앫
Clock
130
- ABS indicator lamp
297
X Tire pressure warning
lamp1
303
4 Reset button
113
5 Tachometer with
115
; Brake warning lamp,
USA only
298
3 Brake warning lamp,
Canada only
298
A High beam headlamp
indicator
109
v ABS/ESP warning
lamp
296
? Engine malfunction indicator lamp, USA only
> Gearshift indicator
lamp
301
< Airbrake warning lamp
301
L Left turn signal
indicator lamp
Item
= Engine oil temperature
symbol
301
7 Fuel gauge with
A Fuel reserve warning
lamp
301
K Right turn signal
indicator lamp
1
Only vehicles produced as of approximately
October 2004.
29
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel
Item
Page
1 Left multifunction display in
the speedometer
117
2 Right multifunction display in
the tachometer
117
118
ì to end a call
30
6 Moving within a menu:
Press button
k for previous display
ç down/to decrease
í to take a call
118
è for next menu
j for next display
æ up/to increase
4 Telephone:
Press button
5 Menu systems:
Press button
Page
ÿ for previous menu
Operating control system
3 Selecting the submenu or setting the volume:
Press button
Item
118
118
At a glance
Center console
왔 Center console
Upper part
Item
Page
Item
Page
1 Central locking switch
103
6 Selects the Airbrake mode
2 Hazard warning flasher
on/off switch
110
7 Selects the manual shift
program mode
174
3 Central unlocking switch
104
8 Audio system
4 Center and side air vent
adjustment
180
120
141
9 Automatic climate control
180
5 Selects the shift program
mode
171
a Engine start button
87
49
31
At a glance
Center console
Lower part
Item
1 Exterior rear view mirror
adjustment
44
2 Remote trunk lid switch
99
3 Tow-away alarm switch
92
4 ESP control switch
83
5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
indicator lamp
75
6 Gear selector lever for
automatic transmission
7 Parking brake
32
Page
169
50
57
At a glance
Overhead control panel
왔 Overhead control panel
Item
Page
1 Left reading lamp on/off
111
2 Temperature sensor for
automatic climate control
180
3 Right reading lamp on/off
111
4 Interior lighting control
111
5 Hands-free microphone for
Tele Aid (emergency call
system) and telephone
(see separate operating
instructions)
201
6 Interior rear view mirror
44,
177
7 Garage door opener
213
8 Tele Aid (emergency call
system) button
205
33
At a glance
Control panel on the door sill
Item
1 Door handle
100
2 Switches for opening/closing
windows
191
3 Switch for seat adjustment
34
Page
42
35
Getting started
Unlocking
Adjusting
Driving
Parking and locking
Getting started
Unlocking
The “Getting started” section provides an
overview of the vehicle’s most basic functions. First-time Mercedes-Benz owners
should pay special attention to the information given here.
If you are already familiar with the basic
functions described here, the “Controls in
detail” section will provide you with further
information. The corresponding page
references are located at the end of each
segment.
SmartKey with remote control
5 Door handle
1 ‹ Lock button
2 Š Unlock button for trunk lid
3 ΠUnlock button
4 Â Panic button (컄 page 78)
왘
Press unlock button Œ.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
i
The SBC brake system is activated.
38
Getting started
Unlocking
Warning!
G
Always stand to the rear of the door before
opening it, otherwise the opening action
may cause injury. Outside temperature may
affect door opening speed.
!
Ensure sufficient side- and overhead
clearance prior to opening the doors,
see “Main dimensions” (컄 page 383).
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause
an accident and/or serious personal injury.
왘
Press the front part of the door
handle 5 and open the door.
The door swings outwards and upwards automatically.
왘
Get in the vehicle and insert the
SmartKey in the starter switch.
You will find further information in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄 page 96).
39
Getting started
Unlocking
Starter switch positions
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause
an accident and/or serious personal injury.
40
Starter switch
0 For removing SmartKey
1 Power supply for some consumers
2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) and drive position. All lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator
lamp and turn signal indicator lamps
unless activated) in the instrument
cluster come on. If a lamp in the instrument cluster fails to come on when the
ignition is switched on, have it checked
and replaced if necessary. If a lamp in
the instrument cluster remains on after
starting the engine or comes on while
driving, see “Lamps in instrument cluster” (컄 page 296).
Getting started
Unlocking
i
!
When you switch on the ignition, the
indicator and warning lamps (except
high beam headlamp indicator lamp
and turn signal indicator lamps unless
activated) in the instrument cluster
come on. This indicates that the respective systems are operational. The
indicator and warning lamps (except
high beam headlamp indicator lamp
and turn signal indicator lamps if
activated) will go out when the engine
is running.
If the SmartKey is left in the starter
switch position 0 for an extended period of time, it can no longer be turned in
the starter switch.
앫
Remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch and reinsert.
If the SmartKey can still not be turned
in the starter switch, the starter battery
may not be sufficiently charged.
앫
Have the starter battery checked
and charged if necessary
(컄 page 365). Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
To prevent accelerated battery
discharge and a possible dead battery,
always remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch when the engine is not in
operation.
41
Getting started
Adjusting
Warning!
G
All seat, steering wheel, and rear view mirror
adjustments, as well as fastening of seat
belts, must be done before the vehicle is put
into motion.
That could cause serious or fatal injuries.
The seat back and seat belts provide the
best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly
upright position and belts are properly positioned on the body. Your seat must be adjusted so that you can correctly fasten your
seat belt (컄 page 46).
The seat adjustment switch is located on
the door sill.
Seats
Warning!
Warning!
G
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving.
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Never place hands under the seat or near
any moving parts while a seat is being adjusted.
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
back in an excessively reclined position as
this can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck.
42
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you, and lock the vehicle.
Even with the SmartKey removed from the
starter switch or the vehicle, the seats can
be operated. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised
use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.
1 Seat fore and aft adjustment
2 Seat height
3 Seat angle
Getting started
Adjusting
Seat fore and aft adjustment
왘
Slide the switch forwards or backwards
in the direction of arrow 1.
Adjust seat to a comfortable seating
position that still allows you to reach
the accelerator/brake pedal safely.
The position should be as far rearward
as possible, consistent with ability to
properly operate controls.
!
When moving the seat, make sure that
there are no items in the footwell or
behind the seat. Otherwise you could
damage the seat.
Seat height
왘
Slide the switch up or down in the direction of arrow 2.
Steering wheel
Warning!
G
The stalk for steering wheel adjustment is
located on the lower left of the steering
column.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while
driving could cause the driver to lose control
of the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you, and lock the vehicle.
Even with the SmartKey removed from the
starter switch or the vehicle, the steering
wheel can be adjusted. Therefore, do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
1 Adjusting steering column, in or out
2 Adjusting steering column, up or down
Seat angle
왘
Slide the switch up or down in the direction of arrow 3.
43
Getting started
Adjusting
Adjusting steering column in or out
왘
Move stalk forward or back in the
direction of arrow 1 until a comfortable steering wheel position is reached
with your arms slightly bent at the
elbow.
Adjusting steering column up or down
왘
Press the lever up or down in the direction of arrow 2. Make sure that you
can move your legs freely and that you
can see all the displays in the instrument cluster clearly.
Interior rear view mirror
Mirrors
Adjust the interior and exterior rear view
mirrors before driving so that you have a
good view of the road and traffic conditions.
Manually adjust the rear-view mirror.
For more information, see “Rear view mirrors” (컄 page 177).
Exterior rear view mirrors
Warning!
G
In the case of an accident, liquid electrolyte
may escape the mirror housing if the mirror
glass breaks.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.
!
Electrolyte drops coming into contact
with the vehicle paint finish can be
completely removed only while in the
liquid state and by applying plenty of
water.
44
왘
Warning!
G
Exercise care when using the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your interior rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.
Getting started
Adjusting
The buttons are located on the lower part
of the center console.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
왘
Press button 1 for the driver’s side
exterior rear view mirror or button 2
for passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror.
왘
Push adjustment button 3 up, down,
left, or right according to the desired
setting.
i
1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror
button
2 Passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror button
3 Adjustment button
At low ambient temperatures, the
exterior rear view mirrors will be
heated automatically.
For more information, see “Rear view mirrors” (컄 page 177).
45
Getting started
Driving
Warning!
G
Do not lay any objects in the driver’s footwell. Be careful that floor mats or carpets in
the driver’s footwell have sufficient clearance for the pedals.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
the objects could get caught between the
pedals. You could then no longer brake or
accelerate.
Fastening the seat belts
Warning!
Warning!
Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
accident. You and your passenger should always wear seat belts.
G
Children 12 years old and under must never
ride in this vehicle, except in a
Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM1
compatible child seat, which operates with
the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise
they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or
fatal injury will result.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are wearing your
seat belt. The airbags can only provide the
protection they were designed to afford if
the occupants are using their seat belts
(컄 page 69).
Infants and small children must be seated in
an appropriate BabySmartTM compatible infant or child restraint system, which is properly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt and
top tether strap, fully in accordance with the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
G
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure your passenger is
properly restrained, even pregnant women.
46
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
1
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens
Automotive Corp.
Getting started
Driving
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
Warning!
G
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined position
as this can be dangerous. You could slide
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or
even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
seat belt provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in a nearly upright position and the
belt is properly positioned on the body.
Warning!
G
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Be sure
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly
restrained with a separate seat belt. Never
use a seat belt for more than one person at
a time.
Warning!
G
Read and observe the additional warning notices printed in the “Safety and Security”
(컄 page 67) and (컄 page 69).
1 Seat belt holder
2 Latch plate
3 Buckle
4 Release button
47
Getting started
Driving
왘
Pull the belt smoothly from seat belt
holder 1.
앫
왘
Place the shoulder portion of the belt
across the top of your shoulder and the
lap portion across your hips.
왘
Push latch plate 2 into buckle 3 until
it clicks.
왘
If necessary, tighten the lap portion to
a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion
up.
Place the seat backrest in a nearly upright position.
Warning!
앫
Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time.
Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They
could tear.
앫
Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another object at the same
time. When using a seat belt to secure
infant or toddler restraints or children
in booster seats, always follow the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
앫
Check your seat belt during travel to
make sure that it is properly
positioned.
앫
Make sure that the seat belt is always
fitted snugly. Take special care of this
when wearing loose clothing.
Proper use of seat belts
앫
Do not twist the belt when fastening.
앫
Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder
portion is located as close as possible
to the middle of the shoulder (it should
not touch the neck). Never pass the
shoulder portion of the belt under your
arm.
앫
Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips (over hip joint) and not
across the abdomen.
48
G
Do not allow the belt to get caught in the
door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
This could damage the belt.
Never attempt to make modifications to
seat belts. This could impair the effectiveness of the belts.
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash, they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
stressed in an accident must be replaced.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Getting started
Driving
Starting the engine
Warning!
G
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide, and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and lead to death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as garage) which are not properly ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas fumes
are entering the vehicle while driving, have
the cause determined and corrected immediately. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with at least one window
fully open.
Gearshift pattern
P Park position with gear selector lever
lock
R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive position
For more information, see “Automatic
transmission” (컄 page 165).
1 Cover
2 Start button
왘
Make sure the gear selector lever is set
to P.
왘
Do not depress the accelerator.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
왘
Lift up cover 1.
왘
Press start button 2 once.
컄컄
The engine starts automatically.
49
Getting started
Driving
컄컄 왘
Close cover 1.
Warning!
Starting difficulties
G
Make sure the cover of the start button is
closed after starting the engine. Otherwise
you could be injured on the open cover in an
accident or during driving maneuvers.
왘
Depress the brake pedal.
The gear selector lever lock is released.
For information on turning off the engine,
see “Turning off the engine” (컄 page 59).
Parking brake
If the engine does not start as described,
carry out the following steps:
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 0 and repeat starting
procedure (컄 page 49).
왘
Remember that extended starting attempts can drain the battery.
If the engine does not start after several
starting attempts, there could be a malfunction in the engine electronics or in the
fuel supply system.
왘
Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
1 Button
2 Parking brake lever
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Children
could release the parking brake, which
could result in an accident and/or serious
injury.
50
Getting started
Driving
왘
Pull lever 2 upwards slightly, press release knob 1 and move the lever
down to the stop.
The warning lamp ; (USA only)
or 3 (Canada only) in the
instrument cluster goes out.
Driving
Warning!
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.
왘
Depress the brake pedal.
!
왘
Place the gear selector lever in
position D or R.
In order to avoid damage to the transmission:
Warning!
G
It is dangerous to shift the gear selector lever out of P or N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
앫
Wait for the gear selection process
to complete before setting the vehicle in motion.
앫
Place the gear selector lever in
position R or P only when the vehicle is stopped.
왘
Release the brake pedal.
왘
Carefully depress the accelerator
pedal.
Once the vehicle is in motion, the automatic central locking system engages.
!
If you hear a warning signal when driving off, you have forgotten to release
the parking brake.
Release the parking brake.
After a cold start, the transmission engages at a higher revolution. This allows the
catalytic converter to reach its operating
temperature earlier.
!
Do not run cold engine at high engine
speed. Running a cold engine at high
engine speed may shorten the service
life of the engine.
51
Getting started
Driving
!
Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brake reduces engine performance and causes
premature brake and drivetrain wear.
Switching on the headlamps
High beam
Low beam headlamps
The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.
The exterior lamp switch is located on the
dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.
i
You can open a locked door from the
inside. Open door only when conditions
are safe to do so.
You can deactivate the automatic locking using the control system
(컄 page 135).
Combination switch
Exterior lamp switch
1 Lights off
2 Low beam headlamps on
왘
Turn switch to B.
For more information on headlamps, see
“Lighting” (컄 page 105).
52
1 High beam
2 High beam flasher
왘
Push combination switch in direction of
arrow 1.
The high beam indicator A in the
instrument cluster comes on.
For more information on high beam, see
“Combination switch” (컄 page 109).
Getting started
Driving
Turn signals
The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.
왘
Press the combination switch up 1 or
down 2.
The corresponding turn signal indicator
lamp L or K in the instrument
cluster flashes.
Windshield wipers
The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.
The combination switch automatically
returns to its original position once the
steering wheel has been turned far
enough.
i
Combination switch
1 Turn signals, right
2 Turn signals, left
To signal minor directional changes,
such as a lane change, move combination switch to point of resistance only
and release. The turn signal flashes
three times.
Combination switch
1 Single wipe
2 Switching on windshield wipers
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
53
Getting started
Driving
Switching on windshield wipers
!
Intermittent wiping
왘
Do not leave windshield wipers in
intermittent setting when the vehicle is
taken to an automatic car wash or
during windshield cleaning. Wipers will
operate in the presence of water
sprayed on the windshield, and wipers
may be damaged as a result.
왘
Turn the combination switch to the
desired position depending on the
intensity of the rain.
0 Windshield wipers off
I
Intermittent wiping
II Normal wiper speed (goes to
setting I when the car is standing
still)
III Fast wiper speed (goes to setting I
when the car is standing still)
i
Intermittent wiping interval is
dependent on wetness of windshield.
After the initial wipe, pauses between
wipes are automatically controlled by
the rain sensor.
54
The switch should not be left in
intermittent setting as the wipers will
wipe the windshield once every time
the engine is started. Dust that
accumulates on the windshield might
scratch the glass and/or damage the
wiper blades when wiping occurs on a
dry windshield.
Set the wiper switch to position I.
Single wipe
왘
Press combination switch briefly in
direction of arrow 1.
The windshield wipers wipe one time
without washer fluid.
Wiping with windshield washer fluid
왘
Push combination switch in direction of
arrow 1 past the resistance point.
The windshield wipers operate with
washer fluid.
For information on filling up the washer
reservoir, see “Windshield washer system
and headlamp cleaning system”
(컄 page 249).
Getting started
Driving
!
If anything blocks the windshield
wipers (leaves, snow, etc.), switch
them off immediately.
앫
앫
For safety reasons, withdraw
SmartKey from starter switch
before attempting to remove any
blockage.
The hood must be opened
(컄 page 241) before folding the
wiper arms away from the windshield. You could otherwise damage the hood and/or the wiper arm.
앫
Remove blockage.
앫
Turn the windshield wipers on
again.
If windshield wipers fail to function at
all in switch position I,
Problems while driving
앫
set the combination switch to the
next highest wiper speed
The engine runs erratically and misfires
앫
An ignition cable may be damaged.
앫
have the windshield wipers
checked at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center
앫
The engine electronics may not be operating properly.
앫
Unburned gasoline may have entered
the catalytic converter and damaged it.
왘
Give very little gas.
왘
Have the problem repaired by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
55
Getting started
Driving
The coolant temperature is
above 248°F (120°C)
The coolant is too hot and is no longer
cooling the engine.
왘
Stop the vehicle as soon as possible
and turn off the engine. Allow engine
and coolant to cool.
왘
Check the coolant level and add coolant if necessary (컄 page 247).
In case of accident
If the vehicle is leaking gasoline:
왘
Do not start the engine under any circumstances.
왘
Notify local fire and/or police authorities.
If the extent of the damage cannot be determined:
왘
Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
If no damage can be determined on the
56
앫
major assemblies
앫
fuel system
앫
engine mount:
왘
Start the engine in the usual manner.
Getting started
Parking and locking
왔 Parking and locking
You have now completed your first drive.
You have properly stopped and parked
your vehicle. End your drive as follows.
Warning!
G
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering
system. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the
vehicle.
Warning!
G
Parking brake
Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
To reduce the risk of personal injury as a result of vehicle movement, before turning off
the engine and leaving the vehicle always:
앫
Keep right foot on brake pedal.
1 Parking brake lever
앫
Pull the parking brake lever up as many
notches as possible.
왘
앫
Move the gear selector lever to
position P.
앫
Slowly release brake pedal.
앫
When parked on an incline, turn front
wheels towards the road curb.
앫
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 0 and remove the SmartKey
from the starter switch.
앫
Take the SmartKey and lock the vehicle
when leaving.
Pull parking brake lever 1 up as many
notches as possible.
When the engine is running, the
warning lamp ; (USA only)
or 3 (Canada only) in the
instrument cluster will be illuminated. 컄컄
57
Getting started
Parking and locking
컄컄
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Children
could release the parking brake and/or
move the gear selector lever from
position P, either of which could result in an
accident and/or serious injury.
Warning!
G
Getting out of your vehicle with the gear selector lever not fully engaged in position P is
dangerous. Also, when parked on an incline,
position P alone may not prevent your vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people or
objects.
Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to position P (컄 page 49).
When parked on an incline, turn front wheels
towards the road curb.
58
Switching off headlamps
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch
to M (컄 page 52).
For more information on headlamps, see
“Lighting” (컄 page 105).
Getting started
Parking and locking
Turning off the engine
왘
Place the gear selector lever in
position P.
i
Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P.
On slopes, turn the front wheels towards the road curb.
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 0 and remove the SmartKey
from the starter switch.
The immobilizer is activated.
i
The SmartKey can only be removed
from the starter switch with the gear
selector lever in position P.
왘
Press the seat belt release button
(컄 page 47).
Allow the retractor to completely
rewind the seat belt by guiding the
latch plate.
i
With the SmartKey removed and the
driver’s door open, a warning sounds if
the vehicle’s exterior lamps are not
switched off.
Warning!
G
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the door
openings when closing the doors. Be especially careful when small children are
around.
Before closing doors, make sure there is no
possibility of someone getting caught in a
door during closing.
왘
After exiting the vehicle, press the lock
button ‹ on the SmartKey
(컄 page 38).
With the hood, trunk and all doors
closed, all turn signal lamps flash three
times. The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause
an accident and/or serious personal injury.
For more information, see “Locking and
unlocking” (컄 page 96).
59
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Panic alarm
Driving safety systems
Performance enhancement system
Anti-theft systems
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
In this section you will learn the most important facts about the restraint systems
of the vehicle.
The 1 indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster comes on
A malfunction in the system has been
detected if the 1 indicator lamp
앫
for about four seconds when you turn
the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 1. It then goes out briefly,
comes on again and remains lit until
you start the engine or turn the
SmartKey to position 2.
앫
fails to go out after approximately four
seconds
앫
does not come on at all
앫
comes on after the engine was started
or while driving
앫
for about four seconds when you turn
the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 2.
For more information, see the “Practical
hints” section (컄 page 302).
앫
for about four seconds when you start
the engine using the start button
(컄 page 49).
The restraint systems are
앫
Seat belts
앫
Emergency tensioning device
앫
Airbags
앫
Child seats
앫
Child seat recognition
As independent systems, their protective
effects work in conjunction with each
other.
i
For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children, see “Children in the vehicle”
(컄 page 72).
62
The 1 indicator lamp goes out shortly
after you start the engine. This shows that
the restraint systems are operational.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
In the event that the 1 indicator lamp
comes on during driving or does not come
on at all, the SRS self-check has detected a
malfunction. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have
the system checked, otherwise the SRS may
not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal
injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and
unnecessarily which could also result in
injury.
In addition, improper repair work creates a
risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or
causing unintended airbag deployment.
Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Airbags
Warning!
Warning!
G
Airbags are designed to reduce the potential
of injury and fatality in certain frontal impacts (front airbags, knee airbags) or side
impacts (head-thorax airbags). However, no
system available today can totally eliminate
injuries and fatalities.
The activation of the airbags temporarily releases a small amount of dust from the airbags. This dust, however, is neither injurious
to your health, nor does it indicate a fire in
the vehicle. The dust might cause some temporary breathing difficulty for people with
asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid
this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle
as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any
breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the
vehicle after the airbag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or door.
G
To reduce the risk of injury when the front
airbags inflate, it is very important for the
driver and front passenger to always be in a
properly seated position and to wear your
seat belts.
For maximum protection in the event of a
collision always be in normal seated position
with your back against the backrest. Fasten
your seat belt and make sure that it is properly positioned on your body (컄 page 46).
Since the airbag inflates with considerable
speed and force, a proper seating and hands
on steering wheel position will help to keep
you at a safe distance from the airbag.
Occupants who are unbelted, out of position
or too close to the airbag can be seriously injured by an airbag as it inflates with great
force in the blink of an eye:
앫
Sit properly belted in a nearly upright
position with your back against the seat
컄컄
backrest.
63
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄
앫
Adjust the driver seat as far as possible
rearward, still permitting proper operation of vehicle controls. The distance
from the center of the driver’s breastbone to the center of the airbag cover on
the steering wheel must be at least ten
inches (25 cm) or more. You should be
able to accomplish this by a combination of adjustments to the seat and
steering wheel. If you have any problems, please see an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫
Do not lean with your head or chest
close to the steering wheel or dashboard.
앫
Keep hands on the outside of steering
wheel rim. Placing hands and arms inside the rim can increase the risk and
potential severity of hand/arm injury
when driver front airbag inflates.
1
64
앫
Adjust the front passenger seat as far as
possible rearward from the dashboard
when the seat is occupied.
Failure to follow these instructions can
result in severe injuries to you or other
occupants.
앫
Occupants, especially children, should
never lean their heads in the area of the
door where the head-thorax airbag inflates. This could result in serious injuries or death should the airbag be
triggered. Always sit nearly upright,
properly use the seat belts and appropriate size infant or child restraint system.
If you sell your vehicle, it is important that
you make the buyer aware of this safety
information. Be sure to give the buyer this
Operator’s Manual.
앫
Children 12 years old and under must
never ride in this vehicle, except in a
Mercedes-Benz authorized
BabySmartTM1 compatible child seat,
which operates with the BabySmartTM
system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front airbag when it
is properly installed. Otherwise they will
be struck by the airbag when it inflates
in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury will result.
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens
Automotive Corp.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
G
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please
follow these guidelines:
Should you choose to place a child 12 years
old or under in the passenger seat of your
vehicle, you must properly use a
BabySmartTM child restraint which will turn
off the passenger front airbag (컄 page 72).
BabySmartTM will not, however, turn off any
side impact airbag.
(1) Occupants, especially children, should
never place their bodies or lean their
heads in the area of the door where the
head-thorax airbag inflates. This could
result in serious injuries or death should
the head-thorax airbag be activated.
Warning!
It should be noted, however, that there is a
possibility for a head-thorax airbag related
injury if occupants, especially children, are
not properly seated or restrained when next
to a head-thorax airbag which needs to deploy rapidly in a side impact in order to do its
job.
(2) Always sit nearly upright, properly use
the seat belts and use an appropriately
sized infant or child restraint system for
all children 12 years old or under.
If you believe that, even with the use of
these guidelines, it would be safer for your
passenger seat occupants to have the passenger side head-thorax airbag deactivated,
then deactivation can be accomplished
upon your written election to do so at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center at an additional cost. Please contact your local
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
our Customer Assistance Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
for details.
(3) Always wear seat belts properly.
65
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
i
Airbags are designed to activate only in
certain frontal impacts (front airbags,
knee airbags) and side impacts
(head-thorax airbags) which exceed
preset thresholds. Only during these
types of impacts, if of sufficient severity to meet the deployment threshold,
will they provide their supplemental
protection.
The driver and passengers should always wear their seat belts. Otherwise it
is not possible for the airbags to provide their intended supplemental protection.
66
In cases of other frontal impacts, angled impacts, roll-overs, other side impacts, rear collisions, or other
accidents and impacts below airbag
deployment thresholds, the airbags will
not be activated. The driver and passenger will then be protected to the extent possible by a properly fastened
seat belt.
We caution you not to rely on the presence of the airbags in order to avoid
wearing your seat belt.
Your vehicle was originally equipped
with airbags which are designed to activate in certain impacts exceeding a
preset threshold to reduce the potential and severity of injury. It is important
to your safety and that of your passenger that you replace deployed airbags
and repair any malfunctioning airbags
to ensure that the vehicle will continue
to provide supplemental crash protection for occupants.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Safety guidelines for the seat belt,
emergency tensioning device and
airbag
Warning!
앫
앫
앫
electrical/electronic equipment on or
near SRS components and wiring. Keep
area between airbags and occupants
free from objects (e.g. packages, purses, umbrellas, etc.).
G
Damaged seat belts or belts that were
highly stressed in an accident must be
replaced and their anchoring points
must also be checked. Only use belts installed or supplied by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Airbags and ETDs (Emergency Tensioning Devices) are designed to function on
a one-time-only basis. An airbag or ETD
that was activated must be replaced.
No modifications of any kind may be
made to any components or wiring of
the SRS. This includes changing or removing any component or part of the
SRS, the installation of additional trim
material, badges, etc. over the steering
wheel hub, passenger front airbag cover, knee airbag covers or door trim panels, and installation of additional
앫
Do not pass belts over sharp edges.
They could tear.
앫
Do not make any modification that could
change the effectiveness of the belts.
앫
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this
may severely weaken them. In a crash,
they may not be able to provide
adequate protection.
앫
Airbag system components will be hot
after an airbag has inflated. Do not
touch.
앫
Never place your feet on the instrument
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
seat.
앫
In addition, improper repair work on the
SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS
inoperative or causing unintended airbag deployment. Work on the SRS must
therefore only be performed by qualified
technicians. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫
For your protection and the protection
of others, when scrapping the airbag
unit or emergency tensioning device,
our safety instructions must be followed. These instructions are available
from your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
앫
Given the considerable deployment
speed and the textile structure of the
airbags, there is the possibility of abrasions or other injuries resulting from airbag deployment.
When you sell your vehicle, we strongly
urge you to give notice to the subsequent
owner that it is equipped with an SRS by
alerting them to the applicable section in
the Operator’s Manual.
67
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Knee airbags
Front airbags
Driver and passenger airbags are deployed:
앫
in the event of certain frontal impacts
앫
if impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
앫
independently of the head-thorax airbags
The airbags will not deploy in impacts
which do not exceed the system’s deployment thresholds. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belts.
The passenger airbag will only be deployed
if:
앫
the passenger seat is occupied
앫
the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning
lamp in the lower part of the center
console is not lit (컄 page 75)
앫
the impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold
68
1 Driver airbag
2 Passenger airbag
!
Do not place objects heavier than
20 lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger
seat. This could cause the front airbag,
the knee airbag or the head-thorax airbag on the front passenger side to
deploy in a crash which exceeds the
system’s deployment threshold.
1 Knee airbag, driver’s side
2 Knee airbag, passenger side
The kneebag airbags are located on the
lower instrument panel. They are designed
to operate together with the front airbags
in certain frontal impacts exceeding a
preset threshold. The knee airbags operate
best in conjunction with a properly
positioned and fastened seat belts and
when the footwell is kept clear of objects.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Head/thorax airbags
Seat belts
When the engine is started, the seat belt
telltale < illuminates to remind you and
your passenger to fasten your seat belts. If
the driver’s seat belt is not fastened before
the engine is started, the seat belt
telltale < illuminates and a warning
chime sounds for approximately six seconds when the engine is started.
1 Head/thorax airbag
The head-thorax airbags are deployed:
앫
on the impacted side of the vehicle
앫
in impacts exceeding a preset deployment threshold
앫
independently of the front airbags
The head-thorax airbags are not deployed
in impacts which do not exceed the system’s deployment threshold.
i
For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children, see “Children in the vehicle”
(컄 page 72).
The use of seat belts and infant and child
restraint systems is required by law in all
50 states, the District of Columbia, the
U.S. territories, and all Canadian provinces. Even where this is not the case, all vehicle occupants should have their seat
belts fastened whenever the vehicle is in
motion.
For information on fastening seat belts,
see “Fastening the seat belts” (컄 page 46).
The passenger head-thorax airbag will only
deploy if the system senses that the passenger seat is occupied.
69
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure your passenger is
properly restrained, even pregnant women.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
accident. You and your passenger should always wear seat belts.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are wearing your
seat belt. The airbags can only provide the
protection they were designed to afford if
the occupants are using their seat belts
(컄 page 69).
70
Warning!
G
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined position
as this can be dangerous. You could slide
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or
even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
seat belt provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in a nearly upright position and the
belt is properly positioned on the body.
Warning!
G
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Be sure
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt. Never use
a seat belt for more than one person at a
time.
Warning!
G
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
stressed in an accident must be replaced
and their anchoring points must also be
checked.
Only use seat belts which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Do not make any modifications to the seat
belts. This can lead to failure of the seat
belts.
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash, they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Have all work carried out only by qualified
technicians. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
앫
Never wear the shoulder belt under your
arm, against your neck or off your shoulder. In a crash, your body would move
too far forward. That would increase the
chance of head and neck injuries. The
belt would also apply too much force to
the ribs or abdomen, which could severely injure internal organs such as
your liver or spleen.
앫
Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time. Do not fasten a seat
belt around a person and another person or other objects.
앫
Belts should not be worn twisted. In a
crash, you wouldn’t have the full width
of the belt to manage impact forces. The
twisted belt against your body could
cause injuries.
앫
Never wear belts over rigid or breakable
objects in or on your clothing, such as
eyeglasses, pens, keys, etc., as these
might cause injuries.
앫
앫
Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips and not across the abdomen. If the belt is positioned across your
abdomen, it could cause serious injuries
in a crash.
Pregnant women should also use a
lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
should be positioned as low as possible
on the hips to avoid any possible pressure on the abdomen.
앫
Never place your feet on the instrument
panel, dashboard or on the seat. Always
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
seat.
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
앫
Seat belts can only work when used
properly. Never wear seat belts in any
other way than as described in this section, as that could result in serious injuries in case of an accident.
앫
Each occupant should wear their seat
belt at all times, because seat belts help
reduce the likelihood of and potential
severity of injuries in accidents, including rollovers. The integrated restraint
system includes SRS (driver airbag, passenger airbag, knee airbags, head-thorax airbags) and ETD (seat belt
emergency tensioning device). The system is designed to enhance the protection offered to properly belted
occupants in certain frontal (front airbags, knee airbags and ETD) and side
(head-thorax airbags and ETD) impacts
which exceed preset deployment
thresholds.
71
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Emergency tensioning device (ETD),
seat belt force limiter
Warning!
G
The seat belts are equipped with
emergency tensioning devices and belt
force limiters.
An emergency tensioning device (ETD) that
was activated must be replaced.
The ETD is designed to activate in the
following cases when the seat belts are
fastened:
When disposing of the emergency tensioning device, our safety instructions must be
followed. These are available at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫
in frontal or rear-end impacts exceeding a preset severity level
앫
if the restraint systems are operational
and functioning correctly, see 1 indicator lamp (컄 page 62).
In an impact, emergency tensioning devices remove slack from the belts in such a
way that the seat belts fit more snugly
against the body. Belt force limiters reduce
the force exerted by the seat belts on
occupants during a crash.
72
!
Do not place objects heavier than
20 lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger
seat. This could cause the front or side
impact airbag on the passenger side
and, with the seat belt fastened to secure the object, the ETD to deploy in a
crash which exceeds the system’s deployment threshold.
Children in the vehicle
If an infant or child is traveling with you in
the vehicle:
앫
Secure the child using an infant or child
restraint appropriate to the age and
size of the child.
앫
Make sure the infant or child is properly secured at all times while the vehicle
is in motion.
Infant and child restraint seats and information on choosing an appropriate restraint system can be obtained from any
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Infant and child restraint systems
TM1
Only use a BabySmart compatible child
restraint for the front passenger seat in
this vehicle.
We recommend all infants and children be
properly restrained at all times while the
vehicle is in motion.
The passenger lap-shoulder belt has a special seat belt retractor for the secure fastening of child restraints.
To fasten a child restraint follow child restraint instructions for mounting. Then pull
the shoulder belt out completely and let it
retract. During the seat belt retraction a
ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate
that the special seat belt retractor is activated. The belt is now locked. Push down
on child restraint to take up any slack.
1
To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and
let seat belt retract completely. The seat
belt can again be used in the usual
manner.
Warning!
G
Never release the seat belt buckle while the
vehicle is in motion, since the special seat
belt retractor will be deactivated.
!
The use of infant or child restraints is
required by law in all 50 states, the District of Columbia, the U.S. territories,
and all Canadian provinces.
Infants and small children should be
seated in an appropriate infant or child
restraint system which is properly
secured by a lap-shoulder belt and top
tether strap that complies with U.S.
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213 and Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
A statement by the child restraint manufacturer of compliance with this standard can be found on the instruction
label on the restraint and in the instruction manual provided with the restraint.
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens
Automotive Corp.
73
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
When using any infant or child restraint
system, be sure to carefully read and
follow all manufacturer’s instructions
for installation and use.
Please read and observe warning labels
affixed to inside of vehicle and to infant
or child restraints.
Warning!
G
Children 12 years old and under must never
ride in this vehicle, except in a
Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM
compatible child seat, which operates with
the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise
they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or
fatal injury will result.
74
Infants and small children must be seated in
an appropriate BabySmartTM compatible infant or child restraint system, which is properly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt and
top tether strap, fully in accordance with the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Warning!
G
Infants and small children should never
share a seat belt with another occupant.
During an accident, they could be crushed
between the occupant and seat belt.
Children too big for child restraint systems
should use regular seat belts. Position the
shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not
face or neck. A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper belt positioning for
children from 41 lbs until they reach a
height where a lap/shoulder belt fits
properly without a booster.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
When the child restraint is not in use, remove it from the vehicle or secure it with the
seat belt to prevent the child restraint from
becoming a projectile in the event of an
accident.
Adjust the passenger seat as far as possible
rearward from the dashboard when the seat
is occupied.
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle; even if the children are secured in a
child restraint system. Unsupervised
children in a child restraint system may use
vehicle equipment and cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
BabySmartTM1 airbag deactivation
system
The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp 1 located on the lower part of the
center console will be illuminated, except
with the SmartKey removed or in starter
switch position 0.
i
The system does not deactivate the
head-thorax airbag and the emergency
tensioning device.
1 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp
Self-test BabySmartTM without special
child seat installed
After turning the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 1 or 2, the PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp comes on for
approximately six seconds and then goes
out.
If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp should not come on or is continuously lit, the system is not functioning. You
must see an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center before seating any child on the
front passenger seat.
Special BabySmartTM compatible child
seats, designed for use with the
Mercedes-Benz system and available at
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, are
required for use with the BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system. With the special
child seat properly installed, the passenger
front airbag and the passenger knee airbag
will not deploy.
1
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens
Automotive Corp.
75
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
G
The BabySmartTM1 airbag deactivation system will ONLY work with a special child seat
designed to operate with it. It will not work
with child seats which are not BabySmartTM
compatible.
When using a BabySmartTM compatible
child seat on the passenger seat, the passenger front airbag will not deploy only if the
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp
(컄 page 75) remains illuminated.
Never place anything between seat cushion
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces
the effectiveness of the deactivation system. The bottom of the child seat must
make full contact with the passenger seat
cushion. An incorrectly mounted child seat
could cause injuries to the child in case of an
accident, instead of protecting the child.
Please be sure to check the PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp every time you
use the special system child seat. Should
the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp
go out while the restraint is installed, please
check installation. If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp remains out, do not
use the BabySmartTM restraint to transport
children on the passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
installation of special child seats.
1
Warning!
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens
Automotive Corp.
76
Warning!
G
Do not place powered-on laptops, cell
phones and like electronic devices on the
front passenger seat. Signals from such devices may interfere with the BabySmartTM
system. Such signal interference may cause
the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp
(컄 page 75) not to come on during self-test
or be continuously lit, indicating that the
system is not functioning.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Installation of infant and child restraint
systems
왘
This vehicle is equipped with a tether anchorage for a top tether strap behind the
passenger seat.
1 Cover of anchorage ring
왘
왘
To have better access to the anchorage
ring, move the passenger seat forward
(컄 page 43).
Remove cover 1 in direction of the arrow from anchorage ring 3.
Guide tether strap according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Make sure the tether strap is not
twisted.
2 Hook
3 Anchorage ring
왘
왘
Move the passenger seat back as far to
the rear as possible.
Once the top tether anchorage hook is
attached, the child restraint itself can be
secured.
왘
Properly secure the child restraint using the passenger seat lap/shoulder
belt (컄 page 73) and tether anchorage
for top tether strap, fully in accordance
with the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
왘
Tighten the top tether strap according
to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
왘
Reinstall cover 1 after removing the
tether strap.
Securely fasten hook 2, which is part
of the tether strap, to anchorage
ring 3.
i
For safety, make sure the hook has
attached to the ring beyond the safety
catch, as illustrated.
77
Safety and Security
Panic alarm
An audible alarm and flashing exterior
lamps will operate for approximately
3 minutes.
1 Â button
Activating
왘
Press and hold button 1 for at least
one second.
Deactivating
왘
Press button 1 again.
or
왘
Insert SmartKey in starter switch.
78
i
i
USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
왔 Driving safety systems
In this section you will find information on
the following driving safety systems:
앫
ABS (Antilock Brake System)
앫
Warning!
G
ABS
G
Warning!
BAS (Brake Assist System)
The following factors increase the risk of accidents:
앫
ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
앫
Excessive speed, especially in turns
앫
SBC (Sensotronic Brake Control)
앫
Wet and slippery road surfaces
앫
Following another vehicle too closely
Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm,
steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pumping the brake pedal defeats the purpose of
the ABS and significantly reduces braking
effectiveness.
i
In winter operation, the maximum effectiveness of the ABS, the BAS, the
ESP, and the SBC is only achieved with
winter tires (M+S tires) or snow chains
as required.
The ABS, BAS, ESP, and SBC cannot reduce
this risk.
Always adjust your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates
the brake pressure so that the wheels do
not lock during braking. This allows you to
maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.
The ABS is functional above a speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent
of road surface conditions.
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will respond even to light brake pressure.
79
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
The - indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster comes on (컄 page 29) when you
switch on the ignition. It goes out when the
engine is running.
The ABS/ESP warning lamp v flashes
whenever the ABS is activated which can
be an indication of hazardous road conditions and functions as a reminder to take
extra care while driving.
Braking
If the ABS activates during braking, the
ABS/ESP warning lamp v in the instrument cluster dial flashes. Because of the
SBC brake system, you will not feel any
pulsation in the brake pedal.
왘
Keep firm and steady pressure on the
brake pedal.
Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure
yields the advantages provided by the ABS,
namely braking power and the ability to
steer the vehicle.
Emergency brake maneuver
왘
Keep continuous, full pressure on the
brake pedal.
Warning!
G
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction. The
ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, following another vehicle too closely,
or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
For more information, see the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 297).
80
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
BAS
Warning!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in
emergency situations. If you apply the
brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically
provides full brake boost thereby potentially reducing the braking distance. Apply
continuous full braking pressure until the
emergency braking situation is over. The
ABS will prevent the wheels from locking.
When you release the brake pedal the
brakes function again as normal. The BAS
is then deactivated.
G
BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes
and tires or the traction. The BAS cannot
prevent accidents, including those resulting
from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BAS
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in
a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
ESP
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) is
operational as soon as the engine is running and monitors the vehicle’s traction
(force of adhesive friction between the
tires and the road surface) and handling.
The ESP recognizes when a wheel is
spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By
applying brakes to the appropriate wheel
and by limiting the engine output, the ESP
works to stabilize the vehicle. The ESP is
especially useful while driving off and on
wet or slippery road surfaces. The ESP also
stabilizes the vehicle during braking maneuvers.
The ABS/ESP warning lamp v in the instrument cluster (컄 page 29) flashes when
the ESP is engaged.
The ABS/ESP warning lamp v in the
instrument (컄 page 28) cluster comes on
when you switch on the ignition. It goes out
when the engine is running.
81
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Warning!
G
Never switch off the ESP when you see the
ABS/ESP warning lamp v flashing in the
instrument cluster. In this case proceed as
follows:
앫
While driving off, apply as little throttle
as possible.
앫
While driving, ease up on the accelerator.
앫
Adapt your speed and driving style to
the prevailing road conditions.
Failure to observe these guidelines could
cause the vehicle to skid.
The ESP cannot prevent accidents resulting
from excessive speed.
Warning!
G
The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase the traction afforded. The ESP
cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, or
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
!
Because of the ESP’s automatic operation, the engine must be shut off
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0
or 1) when
앫
the parking brake is being tested on
a brake test dynamometer
앫
the vehicle is towed with the front
axle raised
Active braking action through the ESP
may otherwise seriously damage the
brake system.
The ESP will only function properly if
you use wheels of the recommended
tire size (컄 page 379).
For more information, see the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 297).
82
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Switching off the ESP
Warning!
When you switch off the ESP
G
ESP should not be switched off during normal driving other than in the circumstances
described below. Disabling of the system
will reduce vehicle stability in standard driving maneuvers.
To improve the vehicle’s traction, turn off
the ESP in driving situations where it would
be advantageous to have the drive wheels
spin and thus cut into surfaces for better
grip such as:
앫
앫
starting out on slippery surfaces and in
deep snow in conjunction with snow
chains
in sand or gravel
앫
the ESP does not stabilize the vehicle
앫
the engine output is not limited, which
allows the drive wheels to spin and
thus cut into surfaces for better grip
앫
the traction control will still brake a
spinning wheel
앫
the ESP continues to operate when you
are braking
i
When the ESP is switched off and one
or more drive wheels are spinning, the
v ABS/ESP warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. However, the
ESP will then not stabilize the vehicle.
The switch is located on the lower part of
the center console.
1 ESP switch (off/on)
왘
Press switch 1.
The v ABS/ESP warning lamp in
the instrument cluster comes on.
The ESP is deactivated.
Turn on the ESP immediately if the aforementioned circumstances do not apply
anymore.
83
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Warning!
G
When the v ABS/ESP warning lamp is
illuminated continuously, the ESP is
switched off.
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and to the non-operating
status of the ESP.
!
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period with the ESP switched
off. This may cause serious damage to
the drivetrain which is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Switching on the ESP
왘
Press switch 1 again.
The ESP warning lamp v in the
speedometer goes out.
You are now again in normal driving
mode with the ESP switched on.
84
SBC brake system
Warning!
The SBC brake system combines a hydraulic brake circuit with electronically controlled brake servo assistance. You have
increased braking safety and improved
braking comfort.
Warning!
G
Never ignore a brake malfunction indicated
in the speedometer display, for example by
the ; (USA only) or 3 (Canada only)
indicator lamp. Refer to the “Practical hints”
section (컄 page 298). Also read and observe the messages in the instrument cluster multifunction display (컄 page 315).
G
The SBC brake system requires electrical
power to operate.
A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply
or electrical system may impair brake system operation and switch it into its emergency operation mode. In such a case, the
red brake warning lamp (컄 page 298)
comes on and warning messages
(컄 page 315) appear in the multifunction
display while driving. To brake, the driver
must then apply significantly greater brake
pedal pressure and depress the pedal much
further to obtain the expected braking effect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the
brake pedal. Stopping distance is increased!
If there is a malfunction in the SBC brake
system, we recommend that the vehicle be
transported with all wheels off the ground
using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly
equipment.
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
A tow bar must be used if circumstances do
not permit the use of the recommended
towing methods and the vehicle requires
towing with all four wheels on the ground.
Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on
the ground is only permissible for distances
up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to
exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). For more information, see “Towing the vehicle”
(컄 page 367).
The SBC brake system is automatically activated when you
앫
unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey
앫
open the driver’s or passenger door
앫
turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 1
앫
depress the brake pedal
앫
release the parking brake
i
If the SBC brake system is activated as
the brake pedal is first depressed, you
may feel a reduced pedal resistance
and longer pedal travel than normal.
When releasing the pedal, you may also
feel the brake pedal pulsate and you
may hear a sound which is caused by
the activation of the SBC pump. This is
normal and not an indication of a malfunction. Pedal travel returns to normal
when you release the brake pedal and
the sound soon ceases.
If you experience the above while driving and the red brake warning lamp
(컄 page 298) illuminates and/or warning messages appear in the multifunction display (컄 page 315), the brake
system is malfunctioning. Follow the instructions of the warning message(s)
and have the brake system checked
immediately.
Warning!
G
Have brake pad replacement and other work
on the SBC brake system carried out by
qualified technicians only. Contact your
Mercedes-Benz Center for further information. The SBC brake system must be deactivated prior to working on the system. High
pressure is intermittently built up in the system as part of its automatic self-test. In addition, the system is automatically activated
when the vehicle is unlocked by remote control, when the driver or passenger door is
opened, when the SmartKey in the starter
switch is turned to position 1, when the
brake pedal is depressed or when the parking brake is released. Failure to deactivate
the system prior to maintenance will cause
brake pistons to extend and brake fluid to
leak, which may result in injuries (contusions and acid burns). Extended brake
pistons may also cause injury.
85
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
The SBC brake servo assistance switches
off automatically
앫
앫
Note on driving with SBC
앫
approximately two minutes after you
turned the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0 or removed the
SmartKey
approximately 20 seconds after you
locked the vehicle from outside
앫
Following extended periods of only minor loads to your brake system, you
should occasionally apply the brakes
when traveling at high speeds. This improves the grip of the brake pads and
prevents possible brake noise.
After driving on wet or snow-covered
roads, you should apply your brakes
firmly before parking your vehicle. This
produces heat which serves to dry the
brake disks.
Warning!
G
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out these braking
maneuvers.
86
앫
On long and steep grades, shift to a
lower gear (gear range 1, 2, or 3) to
prevent the brakes from overheating
and to reduce brake wear.
앫
After hard braking, it is advisable to
drive on for some time so that the air
stream will cool down the brakes faster.
앫
Only Mercedes-Benz approved components (e.g. brake pads) should be installed on your vehicle. Brake pads not
approved by Mercedes-Benz may impair the safety of your vehicle.
Safety and Security
Performance enhancement system
왔 Performance enhancement system
Airbrake
Warning!
G
The Airbrake enhances the vehicle’s driving stability. It adapts the aerodynamics of
the vehicle to the driving conditions according to the speed and the mode set.
The following factors increase the risk of accidents:
앫
Excessive speed, especially in turns
This is achieved using a moveable spoiler.
앫
Wet and slippery road surfaces
The Airbrake is located at the rear edge of
the trunk lid.
앫
Following another vehicle too closely
Warning!
G
The Airbrake cannot reduce this risk.
i
If the ESP is active, the Airbrake is
automatically deactivated.
i
In winter operation, the maximum effectiveness of the Airbrake is only
achieved with winter tires (M+S tires)
or snow chains as required.
Always adjust your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions.
When operating the Airbrake, make sure
there is no danger of anyone being harmed
by the Airbrake operation (i.e. raising and
lowering of flap). Be especially careful when
small children are around.
87
Safety and Security
Performance enhancement system
The Airbrake switch is on the upper part of
the center console.
Test mode
Manual mode
The test mode allows you to check that the
Airbrake is functioning correctly.
In this mode, the Airbrake is set to an angle
of 30°. The driver downforce mode enhances handling in all conditions.
This mode can only be activated when the
vehicle is at standstill.
왘
Slide Airbrake switch 4 to
position 3.
The Airbrake swings upwards to an angle of 62°.
왘
Airbrake modes
1 Manual
2 Automatic
3 Test
4 Airbrake switch
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
The system runs a self-test to ensure
correct operation of the Airbrake.
Release the Airbrake switch.
The Airbrake returns to its initial position.
왘
Slide the Airbrake switch 4 to
position 1.
The Airbrake swings upwards to an angle of 30° and stays in this position.
i
In manual mode, the Airbrake automatic function is activated in an emergency
braking situation, see “Automatic
mode” (컄 page 89).
!
Before deactivating manual mode,
check the Airbrake for any objects
which may have become lodged, e.g.
branches or leaves, and remove them.
Otherwise the Airbrake can no longer
function correctly.
88
Safety and Security
Performance enhancement system
Automatic mode
Rapid braking
This mode should be used for normal driving conditions.
If you need to brake in an emergency from
a speed of more than 60 mph (95 km/h),
the Airbrake automatically swings upwards
to an angle of 62°.
왘
Slide the Airbrake switch 4 to
position 2.
With the ignition on, the Airbrake
swings upwards to an angle of 5° and
then returns to its initial position.
When the vehicle exceeds a speed of
60 mph (95 km/h), the Airbrake
swings up to an angle of 10°.
This allows you to achieve the best possible braking performance in an emergency.
Warning!
G
Hard braking activates the Airbrake which
may block the view through the interior rear
view mirror. In this case, monitor the traffic
behind you through the exterior rear view
mirrors.
89
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Immobilizer
Anti-theft alarm system
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized
persons from starting your vehicle.
Once the alarm system has been armed, a
visual and audible alarm is triggered when
someone opens
Activating
The alarm system will also be triggered
when
앫
someone attempts to raise the vehicle
앫
someone opens a door from the inside
if the vehicle was locked from the outside with the SmartKey
앫
앫
a door
앫
the trunk lid
앫
the hood
someone opens the trunk lid with the
emergency release button
Deactivating
앫
a storage compartment in the rear
Inserting the SmartKey in the starter
switch deactivates the immobilizer.
i
앫
the storage compartment under the
armrest.
The alarm will stay on, even if the activating element (a door, for example) is
immediately closed.
Removing the SmartKey from the starter
switch activates the immobilizer.
i
In case the engine cannot be started
(yet the vehicle’s battery is charged),
the system is not operational. Contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the
USA), or 1-888-881-6611 (in Canada).
90
If the alarm stays on for more than
30 seconds, a call to the Response
Center is initiated automatically by the
Tele Aid system (컄 page 213) provided
Tele Aid service was subscribed to and
properly activated, and that necessary
cellular service and GPS coverage are
available.
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Arming the alarm system
Disarming the alarm system
Canceling the alarm
왘
왘
Unlock your vehicle with the SmartKey.
To cancel the alarm:
The turn signal lamps flash once to
indicate that the alarm system is
disarmed.
왘
Lock the vehicle with the SmartKey.
The turn signal lamps flash three times
to indicate that the alarm system is
activated. The indicator lamp in the
central locking switch (컄 page 104) begins to flash after arming the alarm
system.
i
If the turn signal lamps do not flash
three times, one of the following
elements may not be properly closed:
앫
a door
앫
the trunk
앫
the hood
i
The alarm system will rearm automatically after approximately 40 seconds if
neither a door nor the trunk lid was
opened.
Press the Œ or ‹ button on the
SmartKey.
or
왘
Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
Close the respective element and lock
the vehicle again.
91
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Tow-away alarm
Once the tow-away alarm is armed, a visual
and audible alarm will be triggered when
someone attempts to raise the vehicle.
Arming tow-away alarm
Disarming tow-away alarm
왘
To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm,
switch off the tow-away alarm feature
before towing the vehicle, or when parking
on a surface subject to movement, such as
a ferry or auto train.
Lock your vehicle with the SmartKey.
The tow-away alarm is automatically
armed after about 30 seconds.
i
i
The tow-away protection alarm is
triggered, for example, if the vehicle is
lifted on one side.
When you unlock your vehicle, the
tow-away protection disarms
automatically. The tow-away alarm
remains disarmed until you lock the
vehicle again.
If the alarm stays on for more than
30 seconds, a call to the Response
Center is initiated automatically by the
Tele Aid system (컄 page 213) provided
Tele Aid service was subscribed to and
properly activated, and that necessary
cellular service and GPS coverage are
available.
The button is located on the lower part of
the center console.
1 Tow-away alarm off button
2 Indicator lamp
92
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
왘
왘
Switch off the ignition and remove the
SmartKey.
Canceling the alarm
i
왘
You cannot disarm the tow-away alarm
while the ignition is switched on.
or
Press button 1.
To cancel the alarm:
왘
Press the Œ or ‹ button on the
SmartKey.
Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
Indicator lamp 2 in button 1 comes
on briefly.
왘
Exit and lock your vehicle with the
SmartKey.
The tow-away alarm remains disarmed
until you lock your vehicle again.
93
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Lighting
Instrument cluster
Control system
Audio system
Automatic transmission
Good visibility
Automatic climate control
Power windows
Driving systems
Useful features
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
In the “Controls in detail” section you will
find detailed information on how to operate the equipment installed on your vehicle. If you are already familiar with the
basic functions of your vehicle, this section
will be of particular interest to you.
To quickly familiarize yourself with the basic functions of the vehicle, refer to the
“Getting started” section of this manual.
The corresponding page numbers are given at the beginning of each segment.
96
SmartKey
Your vehicle comes supplied with two
SmartKeys, each with remote control and
a removable mechanical key.
The SmartKey provides an extended operating range. To prevent theft, however, it is
advisable to only unlock the vehicle when
you are in close proximity to it.
The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks:
SmartKey with remote control
앫
the doors
앫
the trunk
앫
the fuel filler flap
1 ‹ Lock button
2 Š Unlock button for the trunk lid
3 Mechanical key locking tab
4 ΠUnlock button
5 Battery check lamp
6 Â Panic button
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. It is possible
for children to open a locked door from the
inside, which could result in an accident
and/or serious injury.
!
To prevent possible malfunction, avoid
exposing the SmartKey to high levels of
electromagnetic radiation.
i
i
USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
i
You can also open and close the power
windows using the SmartKey
(컄 page 193).
When you unlock the vehicle, the
SBC brake system is activated.
97
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Factory setting
Global unlocking
왘
Press button Œ.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
Selective setting
Global unlocking
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
to reprogram the SmartKey so that
pressing Œ only unlocks the driver’s
door and the fuel filler flap.
왘
왘
Global locking
The vehicle will lock again automatically
and reactivate the anti-theft alarm system
within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking if:
Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about five seconds
until battery check lamp 5 flashes
twice.
The SmartKey will then function as
follows:
앫
neither door nor trunk is opened
앫
the SmartKey is not inserted in the
starter switch
Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
flap
앫
the central locking switch is not
activated
왘
Global locking
왘
Press button ‹.
With the hood, trunk and all doors
closed, all turn signal lamps flash three
times. The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
98
Press button Πonce.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
Press button Πtwice.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
왘
Press button ‹.
With the hood, trunk and all doors
closed, all turn signal lamps flash three
times. The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Restoring to factory setting
Checking the batteries
Unlocking and opening the trunk lid
왘
왘
Press button ‹ or Œ.
You can unlock the trunk separately.
Battery check lamp 5 (컄 page 96)
comes on briefly to indicate that the
SmartKey batteries are in order.
A minimum height clearance of
5.5 ft (1.65 m) is required to open the
trunk lid.
!
왘
Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about six seconds
until battery check lamp 5
(컄 page 96) flashes twice.
!
If you can no longer lock or unlock the
vehicle with the SmartKey, then either
the batteries in the SmartKey are discharged, the SmartKey is malfunctioning or the vehicle battery is drained.
If battery check lamp 5 does not
come on briefly during check, then the
SmartKey batteries are discharged.
앫
Replace the batteries (컄 page 353).
앫
Check the batteries in the
SmartKey (컄 page 99) and replace
them if necessary (컄 page 353).
You can obtain the required batteries
at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
앫
Use the mechanical key to unlock
the vehicle (컄 page 351).
i
앫
Have the vehicle battery and the
battery connections checked. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Press and hold button Š until the
trunk unlocks and opens slightly.
i
If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked, the trunk lid will lock automatically when closed. The turn signals will
flash three times to confirm locking.
If the batteries are checked within
signal range of the vehicle, pressing
the ‹ or Œ button will lock or
unlock the vehicle accordingly.
If the SmartKey is malfunctioning,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
99
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key
Opening from the inside
i
If you lose a SmartKey or mechanical key,
you should do the following:
You can open a locked door from the inside. Open the door only if the vehicle is
stationary and when conditions are safe to
do so.
If the vehicle has previously been
locked from the outside with the
SmartKey, opening a door from the
inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm
system.
왘
Have the SmartKey deactivated by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Report the loss of the SmartKey or the
mechanical key immediately to your
car insurance company.
왘
If necessary, have the trunk lock
replaced.
To cancel the alarm, do one of the
following:
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
will be glad to supply you with a replacement.
Opening the doors
1 Inside door handle
왘
Opening from the outside
For information on opening the doors from
the outside, see “Getting started”
(컄 page 38).
100
Pull on door handle 1.
The door swings outwards and upwards automatically.
!
Ensure sufficient side- and overhead
clearance prior to opening the doors,
see “Main dimensions” (컄 page 383).
앫
Press button Œ or ‹ on the
SmartKey.
앫
Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Opening the trunk
The vehicle must be unlocked.
왘
Opening the trunk from the outside
A minimum height clearance of
5.5 ft (1.65 m) is required to open the
trunk lid.
The handle is located above the rear
license plate recess.
Pull on handle 2 and lift the trunk lid.
!
Always make sure that there is sufficient overhead clearance.
The trunk can also be opened using
button Š on the SmartKey or from its
inside in an emergency, see “Trunk lid
emergency release” (컄 page 102).
1 Remote trunk lid release switch
왘
Press remote trunk lid release
switch 1 until the trunk lid unlocks.
왘
Lift the trunk lid.
Opening the trunk from the inside
You can open the trunk from the inside if
the vehicle is stationary.
A minimum height clearance of
5.5 ft (1.65 m) is required to open the
trunk lid.
1 Trunk lock
2 Handle
The switch is located on the lower part of
the center console.
!
Always make sure that there is sufficient overhead clearance.
The trunk can also be opened using
button Š on the SmartKey or from its
inside in an emergency, see “Trunk lid
emergency release” (컄 page 102).
101
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
왘
Closing the trunk lid
Lower trunk lid by firmly pulling on
handle 1.
G
!
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the trunk
opening when closing the trunk lid. Be especially careful when small children are
around.
i
Warning!
Only drive with the trunk closed. Among other dangers, such as your view being blocked,
exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior.
Trunk lid emergency release
The trunk lid emergency release button is
located in the trunk lid.
Do not pull on the Airbrake. Otherwise
the Airbrake could be damaged.
Do not place the SmartKey in the open
trunk. You may lock yourself out.
If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked, the trunk lid will lock automatically after closing it. The turn signals
will flash three times to confirm locking.
Emergency release button
왘
Briefly press emergency release button.
The trunk unlocks and the trunk lid
opens slightly.
i
The emergency release button unlocks
and opens the trunk while the vehicle is
standing still or in motion.
1 Handle
102
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Illumination of the emergency release
button:
앫
The button will flash for 30 minutes
after opening the trunk.
앫
The button will flash for 60 minutes
after closing the trunk.
i
The emergency release button does
not open the trunk lid if the vehicle
battery is discharged or disconnected.
If the vehicle has previously been
locked from the outside with the
SmartKey, opening the trunk from the
inside using the emergency release
button will trigger the anti-theft alarm
system.
To cancel the alarm, do one of the
following:
앫
Press button Œ or ‹ on the
SmartKey.
앫
Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
Automatic locking
Locking and unlocking from the inside
The doors and the trunk lid lock automatically when the vehicle is set into motion.
You can lock or unlock the vehicle from inside using the central locking switches.
This can be useful, for example, if you want
to unlock the passenger door from the inside or want to lock the vehicle before
starting to drive.
You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.
i
The doors unlock automatically after an
accident if the force of the impact exceeds a preset threshold.
The vehicle locks automatically when
the ignition is switched on and the
wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or
more. You could therefore lock yourself
out when the vehicle
앫
is pushed
앫
is on a test stand
The central locking switch does not lock or
unlock the fuel filler flap.
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause
an accident and/or serious personal injury.
You can deactivate the automatic locking
using the control system (컄 page 135).
103
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Warning!
G
You can open a locked door from inside at
any time. Open door only when conditions
are safe to do so.
The switches are located on the upper part
of the center console.
Locking
Unlocking
왘
왘
Press central locking switch 1.
If all the doors are closed, the vehicle
locks.
Press central locking switch 2.
The vehicle unlocks.
i
If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked using the SmartKey, it will not
unlock using the central locking switch.
If the vehicle was previously locked
with the central locking switch
Central locking switches
1 Locking
2 Unlocking
104
앫
while in the global remote control
mode, the complete vehicle is unlocked when a door is opened from
the inside
앫
while in the selective remote control mode, only the door opened
from the inside is unlocked
Controls in detail
Lighting
왔 Lighting
For information on how to switch on the
headlamps and use the turn signals, see
“Switching on the headlamps” (컄 page 52)
and (컄 page 53).
Exterior lamp switch
The exterior lamp switch is located on the
dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.
i
ˆ Standing lamps, right (turn left one
stop)
‚ Standing lamps, left (turn left two
stops)
i
If you drive in countries where vehicles
drive on the other side of the road than
the country where the vehicle is registered, you must have the headlamps
modified for symmetrical low beams.
Relevant information can be obtained
at your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
If you remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch and open the driver’s
door while the parking lamps or low
beam headlamps are switched on, then
M Off
U Automatic headlamp mode
C Parking lamps (also tail lamps,
license plate lamps, side marker
lamps, instrument panel lamps)
앫
a warning sounds
앫
$ appears in the left multifunction display
앫
the message Turn off lamps
appears in right multifunction display
B Low beam headlamps (or high
beam headlamps when the
combination switch is pushed
forward) and parking lamps
105
Controls in detail
Lighting
Manual headlamp mode
The low beam headlamps and the parking
lamps can be switched on and off with the
exterior lamp switch.
Warning!
If the exterior lamp switch is set to U,
앫
Automatic headlamp mode
The following lamps switch on and off
automatically depending on the brightness
of the ambient light:
앫
Low beam headlamps
앫
Tail and parking lamps
앫
License plate lamps
앫
Side marker lamps
G
앫
the headlamps may switch off unexpectedly when the system senses bright
ambient light, for example light from
oncoming traffic.
the headlamps will not be automatically
switched on under foggy conditions.
To minimize risk to you and to others,
activate headlamps by turning exterior lamp
switch to B when driving or when traffic
and/or ambient lighting conditions require
you to do so.
In low ambient lighting conditions, only
switch from position U to B with the
vehicle at a standstill. Switching from U
to B will briefly switch off the
headlamps. Doing so while driving in low
ambient lighting conditions may result in an
accident.
106
The automatic headlamp feature is only an
aid to the driver. The driver is responsible for
the operation of the vehicle's lights at all
times.
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position U.
With the SmartKey in starter switch
position 1, only the parking lamps will
switch on and off automatically.
When the engine is running, the low
beam headlamps, the tail and parking
lamps, the license plate lamps, and the
side marker lamps will switch on and
off automatically.
i
Fog lamps cannot be switched on with
the exterior lamp switch in
position U. For switching on the fog
lamps, turn the exterior lamp switch to
position B first.
Controls in detail
Lighting
Daytime running lamp mode
Canada only:
USA only:
왘
The daytime running lamp mode is mandatory and therefore in a constant mode.
By default, the daytime running lamp mode
is deactivated. Activate the daytime
running lamp mode using the control
system, see “Setting daytime running lamp
mode (USA only)” (컄 page 131).
Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position M or U.
When the engine is running, the low beam
headlamps are switched on.
In low ambient light conditions, the
following lamps will switch on additionally:
앫
Tail and parking lamps
앫
License plate lamps
앫
Side marker lamps
For nighttime driving you should turn the
exterior lamp switch to position B to
permit activation of the high beam headlamps.
i
With the daytime running lamp mode
activated and the exterior lamp switch
in position M, the high beam headlamps cannot be switched on.
When the engine is running, and you shift
from a driving position to position N or P,
the low beam headlamps will switch off
with a three-minute delay.
When the engine is running, and you
앫
turn the exterior lamp switch to
position C, the parking lamps
switch on additionally.
앫
turn the exterior lamp switch to
position B, the manual headlamp
mode has priority over the daytime
running lamp mode.
When the engine is running, and you turn
the exterior lamp switch to position C
or B, the manual headlamp mode has
priority over the daytime running lamp
mode.
The corresponding exterior lamps switch
on (컄 page 105).
The corresponding exterior lamps
switch on (컄 page 105).
The high beam flasher is available at all
times.
107
Controls in detail
Lighting
Locator lighting and night security
illumination
The locator lighting and the night security
illumination are described in the “Control
system” section, see “Setting locator lighting” (컄 page 132) and “Setting night security illumination” (컄 page 133).
i
Front fog lamps
Fog lamps will operate with the parking
lamps and/or the low beam headlamps
on. Fog lamps should only be used in
conjunction with low beam headlamps.
Consult your State or Province Motor
Vehicle Regulations regarding permissible lamp operation.
왘
Switch on the low beam headlamps
(컄 page 105).
왘
Pull out the exterior lamp switch to first
stop.
The front fog lamps switch on.
The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
exterior lamp switch comes on.
Fog lamps
Warning!
G
In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,
only switch from position U to B with
the vehicle at a standstill. Switching
from U to B will briefly switch off the
headlamps. Doing so while driving in low
ambient lighting conditions may result in an
accident.
108
i
Fog lamps cannot be switched on with
the exterior lamp switch in
position U. For switching on the fog
lamps, turn the exterior lamp switch to
position B first.
왘
Push in the exterior lamp switch.
The front fog lamps switch off.
The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
exterior lamp switch goes out.
Controls in detail
Lighting
Rear fog lamp (driver’s side only)
왘
Switch on the front fog lamps
(컄 page 108).
왘
Pull out the exterior lamp switch to
second stop.
Combination switch
The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.
High beam
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position B or U (컄 page 105).
왘
Push the combination switch in
direction of arrow 1 to switch on the
high beam.
The rear fog lamp switches on.
The high beam headlamp indicator
lamp A in the instrument cluster
comes on (컄 page 29).
The yellow indicator lamp † in the
exterior lamp switch comes on.
왘
Push in the exterior lamp switch to first
stop.
왘
The rear fog lamp switches off.
The yellow indicator lamp † in the
exterior lamp switch goes out.
The front fog lamps remain lit.
Combination switch
Pull the combination switch in direction
of arrow 2 to its original position to
switch off the high beam.
The high beam headlamp indicator
lamp A in the instrument cluster
goes out.
1 High beam
2 High beam flasher
High beam flasher
왘
Pull the combination switch briefly in
direction of arrow 2.
109
Controls in detail
Lighting
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher can be
switched on at all times, even with the
SmartKey removed from the starter
switch.
The hazard warning flasher switches on
automatically when an airbag deploys.
The hazard warning flasher switch is
located on the upper part of the center
console.
1 Hazard warning flasher switch
110
Switching on hazard warning flasher
Switching off hazard warning flasher
왘
왘
Press hazard warning flasher
switch 1.
Press hazard warning flasher switch 1
again.
All turn signals are flashing.
i
i
If the hazard warning flasher has been
activated automatically, press hazard
warning flasher switch 1 once to
switch it off.
With the hazard warning flasher
activated and the combination switch
set for either left or right turn, only the
respective turn signals will operate
when the ignition is switched on.
Controls in detail
Lighting
Interior lighting
Automatic control
The controls are located in the overhead
control panel.
Activating
왘
Slide switch 4 to the left.
Interior lamps switches on in darkness
when you
1 Left-hand reading lamp on/off
2 Right-hand reading lamp on/off
3 Interior lighting on/off
4 Automatic control on/off
앫
unlock the vehicle
앫
open a door
앫
remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch
Deactivating
왘
Slide switch 4 to the right.
The interior lighting and the entry/exit
lamps remain switched off in darkness,
even when you
앫
unlock the vehicle
앫
open a door
앫
remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch
In addition, the entry/exit lamps in the
door come on when you open a door.
The interior lamps are switched off after a preset time, see “Interior lighting
delayed switch-off” (컄 page 134).
i
If a door remains open, the interior
lamps switch off automatically after approximately five minutes.
111
Controls in detail
Lighting
Manual control
Trunk lamp
Courtesy lighting
Switching lamps on
The trunk lamp switches on if the trunk lid
is opened.
For better orientation in the dark, courtesy
lamps will illuminate the interior of your
vehicle.
왘
Press switch 3.
The interior lighting switches on.
!
Make sure the interior lighting is
switched off when leaving the vehicle.
Switching lamps off
왘
Press switch 3 again.
The interior lighting switches off.
112
If you leave the trunk open for an extended
period of time, the trunk lamp will switch
off automatically after approximately ten
minutes.
i
The setting selected for the interior
lighting is used for the trunk lighting as
well.
When you open a door:
앫
the driver’s and passenger’s footwells
If the SmartKey is in starter switch
position 1:
앫
the center console
i
The center console is lit from the
interior rear view mirror.
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
왔 Instrument cluster
For a full view illustration of the instrument
cluster, see (컄 page 28).
The instrument cluster is activated when
you
앫
open a door
앫
switch on the ignition
앫
press the reset button (컄 page 29)
앫
switch on exterior lamps
Opening a door will activate the instrument
cluster only for about 30 seconds.
Instrument cluster illumination
Use the reset button to adjust the illumination brightness for the instrument cluster
and the switches on the center console.
To brighten illumination
왘
The instrument cluster illumination will
brighten.
i
The instrument cluster illumination is
dimmed or brightened to suit ambient
light conditions.
Turn the reset button in the instrument
cluster (컄 page 29) clockwise.
To dim illumination
왘
Turn the reset button in the instrument
cluster (컄 page 29) counterclockwise.
The instrument cluster illumination will
dim.
You can change the instrument cluster
settings in the Instrument cluster submenu
of the control system (컄 page 128).
113
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
!
Coolant temperature gauge
Warning
G
앫
Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids which
may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
앫
Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns an can occur just by
opening the hood. Stay away from the
engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
114
Excessive coolant temperature triggers
the coolant temperature warning lamp
(컄 page 300) and a warning in the
multifunction display (컄 page 323).
During severe operating conditions, e.g.
stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248°F (120°C).
The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature above 248°F
(120°C). Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Resetting the trip odometer
Tachometer
왘
The red marking on the tachometer
(컄 page 29) denotes excessive engine
speed.
왘
왘
Make sure you are viewing the trip
odometer and main odometer in the
left multifunction display (컄 page 117).
If it is not displayed, press button è
or ÿ on the multifunction steering
wheel until the trip odometer appears
in the left multifunction display.
Press and hold reset button 4
(컄 page 29) until the trip odometer is
reset.
!
Avoid driving at excessive engine
speeds, as it may result in serious
engine damage that is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply
is interrupted if the engine is operated
within the red marking.
Outside temperature indicator
Warning!
G
The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
The outside temperature is displayed in
the right multifunction display
(컄 page 29). For information on how to select the unit of the displayed temperature,
i.e. degrees Celsius (°C) or degrees Fahrenheit (°F), see “Selecting temperature
display mode” (컄 page 128).
115
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
The temperature sensor is located in the
front bumper area. Due to its location, the
sensor can be affected by road or engine
heat during idling or slow driving. Therefore, the accuracy of the displayed temperature can only be verified by comparison to
a thermometer placed next the sensor, not
by comparison to external displays, e.g.
bank signs, etc.
When moving the vehicle into colder ambient temperatures (e.g. when leaving your
garage), you will notice a delay before the
lower temperature is displayed.
A delay also occurs when ambient temperatures rise. This prevents inaccurate temperature indications caused by heat
radiated from the engine during idling or
slow driving.
116
Controls in detail
Control system
왔 Control system
The control system is activated as soon as
the SmartKey in the starter switch is
turned to position 1. The control system
enables you to
앫
call up information about your vehicle
앫
change vehicle settings
For example, you can use the control system to find out when your vehicle is next
due for service, to set the language for
messages in the instrument cluster display, and much more.
Warning!
G
A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
conditions must always be his/her primary
focus when driving.
For your safety and the safety of others, selecting features through the multifunction
steering wheel should only be done by the
driver when traffic and road conditions permit it to be done safely.
Multifunction display
The multifunction display consists of the
display fields in the speedometer and the
tachometer. In its default state, the left
display field shows the trip and main
odometer, while the present outside temperature appears in the right display field.
This default setting is referred to as the
standard display.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
The control system relays information to
the multifunction display.
Standard display
1 Main odometer
2 Trip odometer
3 Current gear selector lever position/gear range
4 Outside temperature
5 Automatic transmission shift program
mode
6 Clock
117
Controls in detail
Control system
Multifunction steering wheel
The displays in the multifunction display
and the settings in the control system are
controlled by the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel (컄 page 30).
1 Left multifunction display in the
speedometer
2 Right multifunction display in the
tachometer
Operating the control system
3 Selecting the submenu or setting the
volume:
Press button
æ up/to increase
ç down/to decrease
4 Telephone:
Press button
í to take a call
ì to end a call
118
5 Menu systems:
Press button
è for next menu
ÿ for previous menu
6 Moving within a menu:
Press button
j for next display
k for previous display
Pressing any of the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel will alter what is
shown in the multifunction display.
The information available in the multifunction display is arranged in menus, each
containing a number of functions or submenus.
Controls in detail
Control system
The individual functions are then found
within the relevant menu (radio or CD operations under AUDIO, for example). These
functions serve to call up relevant information or to customize the settings for your
vehicle.
It is helpful to think of the menus, and the
functions within each menu, as being
arranged in a circular pattern.
앫
If you press button è or ÿ
repeatedly, you will pass through each
menu one after the other.
앫
If you press button k or j
repeatedly, you will pass through each
function display, one after the other, in
the current menu.
In the Settings menu, instead of functions
you will find a number of submenus for
calling up and changing settings. For
instructions on using these submenus, see
“Settings menu” (컄 page 125).
The number of menus available in the system depends on which optional equipment
is installed in your vehicle.
The menus are described on the following
pages.
119
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus
120
This is what you will see when you scroll
through the menus.
The table on the next page provides an
overview of the individual menus.
Controls in detail
Control system
Commands/submenus
Menus, submenus and functions
Menu 1
Menu 2
Menu 3
Standard display
AUDIO
(컄 page 122)
(컄 page 122)
Menu 4
Menu 5
Menu 6
Vehicle status
Settings
message memory
Trip computer
Telephone
(컄 page 124)
(컄 page 136)
(컄 page 138)
(컄 page 125)
Digital speedometer Select radio station Call up vehicle mal- Reset to factory set- Fuel consumption Load phone book
function, warning
tings
statistics after start
and system status
messages stored in
memory
Call up maintenance Operate the
service display
CD player
Instrument cluster
submenu
Fuel consumption
statistics since the
last reset
Check tire inflation
pressure
Time submenu
Call up range
Search for name in
phone book
Lighting submenu
Vehicle submenu
121
Controls in detail
Control system
i
The headings used in the menus table
are designed to facilitate navigation
within the system and are not necessarily identical to those shown in the
control system displays.
The first function displayed in each
menu will automatically show you
which part of the system you are in.
Standard display menu
AUDIO menu
You can select the functions in the standard display menu with button k
or j.
The functions in the AUDIO menu operate
the audio equipment which you currently
have turned on.
The following functions are available:
Function
Page
If no audio equipment is currently turned
on, the message AUDIO OFF appears in the
multifunction display.
Call up digital speedometer
122
The following functions are available:
Call up maintenance service
display
287
Check tire inflation pressure
263
Display digital speedometer
왘
Press button j once.
The current vehicle speed is shown in
the multifunction display.
122
Function
Page
Select radio station
123
Operate CD player
123
Controls in detail
Control system
Selecting radio station
왘
왘
Turn on the radio (컄 page 144).
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the currently tuned station in the right display.
왘
Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired station is found.
The type of search depends on the setting for the station tuning
(컄 page 135):
앫
Memory: the next stored station is
selected (SP)
앫
Station search
Operating the CD player
왘
Turn on the radio and select the CD
player (컄 page 154).
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the settings for the CD currently
being played are shown in the right display.
i
1 Station frequency
2 Wave band setting
3 Setting for station selection using
memory
You can only store new stations using
the corresponding feature on the radio
(컄 page 149).
You can also operate the radio in the
usual manner.
1 Current track
2 Current CD (for CD changer)
왘
Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired track is selected.
123
Controls in detail
Control system
왘
Vehicle status message memory
Use the vehicle status message memory
menu to scan malfunction and warning
messages that may be stored in the
system. Such messages appear in the multifunction display and are based on conditions or system status the vehicle’s system
has recorded.
Warning!
G
Malfunction and warning messages are only
indicated for certain systems and are intentionally not very detailed. The malfunction
and warning messages are simply a reminder with respect to the operation of certain
systems and do not replace the owner’s
and/or driver’s responsibility to maintain
the vehicle’s operating safety by having all
required maintenance and safety checks
performed on the vehicle and by bringing
the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center to address the malfunction and
warning messages (컄 page 296).
124
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the vehicle status message
memory appears in the right display.
The following functions are available:
Function
Page
No malfunction messages
124
Malfunctions occurred
124
Vehicle status messages have been
recorded
If conditions have occurred causing status
messages to be recorded, the number of
messages appears in the right display:
No vehicle status messages
If no conditions are recorded in memory,
the message in the right display is:
1 Number of messages
Malfunction memory No malfunction
왘
Press button k or j.
The stored messages will now be
displayed in the order in which they
have occurred.
For malfunction and warning messages, see “What to do if ...” (컄 page 296).
Controls in detail
Control system
Should the vehicle’s system record any
conditions while driving, the number of
messages will reappear in the multifunction display when the SmartKey in the
starter switch is turned to position 0 or
removed from the starter switch.
Settings menu
In the Settings menu there are two functions:
앫
i
The vehicle status message memory
will be cleared when you turn the
SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 1 or 2. You will then only see
high-priority messages (컄 page 296).
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the Settings... menu appears in
the left display.
The Reset function with which you can
reset all the settings to those set at the
factory. Depending on production date,
the message
To reset:
Press reset button
for 3 seconds
The following settings and submenus are
available:
or
Function
Page
Reset
R-Button 3 sec.
Reset all settings
126
appears.
앫
왘
A collection of submenus with which
you can make individual settings for
your vehicle.
Submenus in the Settings menu 126
Reset the functions of a submenu
126
Instrument cluster submenu
128
Time submenu
129
Lighting submenu
131
Vehicle submenu
134
125
Controls in detail
Control system
Resetting all settings
Submenus in the Settings menu
Resetting the functions of a submenu
You can reset all the functions of all submenus to the factory settings.
왘
For each submenu you can reset all the
functions to the factory settings.
왘
Press button k or j.
In the right display you see the collection of submenus.
Press the reset button in the instrument cluster for approximately three
seconds.
왘
Move to a function in the submenu.
왘
Press the reset button in the instrument cluster for approximately three
seconds.
In the right display you will see the request to press the reset button again to
confirm.
왘
Press the reset button again.
The functions of all the submenus will
reset to factory settings.
i
The settings you have changed will not
be reset unless you confirm the action
by pressing the reset button a second
time. After approximately five seconds,
the Settings... menu reappears in
the multifunction display.
For safety reasons, the Light circuit
Headlamp mode in the Lighting submenu is not reset while driving.
126
왘
Press button ç.
The selection marker moves to the next
submenu.
The submenus are arranged by hierarchy.
Scroll down with the ç button, scroll up
with the æ button.
Move within the submenus with the k
or j button to the individual functions.
The settings themselves are made with
button æ or ç.
In the right display you will see the request to press the reset button again to
confirm.
왘
Press the reset button again.
All functions of the submenu will reset
to factory settings.
Controls in detail
Control system
The table below shows what settings can
be changed within the various menus. Detailed instructions on making individual
settings can be found on the following pages.
Instrument cluster
Time
Lighting
(hours)1
Vehicle
Select temperature display
mode
Set time
Set daytime running lamp mode Set station selection mode
(USA only)
(radio)
Select speedometer display
mode
Set time (minutes)1
Set locator lighting
Set automatic locking
Select language
Select time display mode1
Exterior lamps delayed
switch-off
Tire inflation pressure display
Interior lighting delayed
switch-off
1
Depending on production date, the time setting functions may not be arranged in a separate Time submenu as shown here, but may be found under the Instrument
cluster submenu instead.
127
Controls in detail
Control system
Instrument cluster submenu
Selecting temperature display mode
Access the Inst. cluster submenu via
the Settings menu. Use the Inst. cluster submenu to change the instrument
cluster display settings.
왘
왘
The following functions are available:
Function
Page
Select the temperature display
128
Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Inst. cluster
submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the left
display: Temp. indicator.
Selecting the speedometer display
(Canada only)
왘
Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Inst. cluster
submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the left
display: Speedometer.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Select the speedometer display 128
(Canada only)
Select the language
129
왘
128
Press æ or ç to set temperature
unit to degrees Celsius (°C) or degrees
Fahrenheit (°F).
왘
Press æ or ç to set the speedometer units to Kilometres or Miles.
Controls in detail
Control system
Selecting the language
Available languages:
Time submenu
왘
앫
German
앫
English
Access the Time submenu via the Settings
menu. Use the Time submenu to change
the time settings.
앫
Italian
앫
French
앫
Spanish
왘
Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Inst. cluster
submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the left
display: Text.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
The following functions are available:
Function
Page
Set time (hours)
130
Set time (minutes)
130
Select the time display
130
i
왘
Press æ or ç to select the language to be used for the multifunction
display messages.
Depending on production date, the
time setting functions may not be arranged in a separate Time submenu as
shown here, but may be found under
the Inst. cluster submenu instead.
129
Controls in detail
Control system
Set time (hours)
Set time (minutes)
Selecting time display
왘
Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Time submenu.
왘
Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Time submenu.
왘
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Set time Hours appears in the left display.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Set time Minutes
appears in the left display.
Move the selection marker with the
æ or ç button to the Time submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the left
display: Clock.
The selection marker is on the hour
setting.
왘
Press button æ or ç to set the
hour.
130
The selection marker is on the minute
setting.
왘
Press button æ or ç to set the
minutes.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press æ or ç to set the 12-hour
or 24-hour time display mode.
Controls in detail
Control system
Lighting submenu
Access the Lighting submenu via the
Settings menu. Use the Lighting submenu to change the lamp and lighting settings on your vehicle.
Setting daytime running lamp mode
(USA only)
i
This function is not available in
countries where the daytime running
lamp mode is mandatory and therefore
in a constant mode.
The following functions are available:
Function
왘
Page
Set daytime running lamp mode 131
(USA only)
Set locator lighting
132
Exterior lamps delayed
switch-off
133
Interior lighting delayed
switch-off
134
왘
왘
Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Lighting submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the left
display: Light circuit Headlamp
mode.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Press button æ or ç to select
manual operation (Manual) or daytime
running lamp mode (Constant)
activated.
With daytime running lamp mode activated
and the exterior lamp switch in
position M or U, the low beam
headlamps are switched on when the
engine is running.
In low ambient light conditions the
following lamps will switch on additionally:
앫
Parking lamps
앫
Tail lamps
앫
License plate lamps
앫
Side marker lamps
131
Controls in detail
Control system
For more information on the daytime
running lamp mode, see “Daytime running
lamp mode” (컄 page 107).
i
If you turn the exterior lamp switch to
another position, the corresponding
lamp(s) will switch on.
Setting locator lighting
왘
With the locator lighting feature activated
and the exterior lamp switch in
position U, the following lamps will
switch on when the vehicle is unlocked
with the SmartKey during darkness:
Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Lighting submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the left
display: Locator lighting.
앫
Parking lamps
For safety reasons, resetting the
Lighting submenu to factory settings
(컄 page 126) will not reset the daytime
running lamp mode.
앫
Tail lamps
앫
License plate lamps
앫
Side marker lamps
Depending on production date, one of
the following messages appears in the
right display:
앫
Front fog lamps
Cannot be fully reset to factory
settings when driving
or
Cannot be fully reset to factory
settings while driv.!
132
The locator lighting switches off when the
driver’s door is opened.
If you do not open a door after unlocking
with the SmartKey the lamps will switch off
automatically after approximately
40 seconds.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press æ or ç to switch the locator lighting function On.
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position U when exiting the vehicle
(컄 page 105).
The locator lighting feature is
activated.
Controls in detail
Control system
i
Setting night security illumination
(Headlamps delayed shut-off)
Use this function to set whether and how
long you would like the exterior lamps to
illuminate during darkness after exiting the
vehicle and all doors closed.
With the delayed shut-off feature activated
and the exterior lamp switch in
position U before the engine is turned
off, the following lamps will switch on after
you have removed the SmartKey from the
starter switch:
앫
Parking lamps
앫
Tail lamps
앫
License plate lamps
앫
Side marker lamps
앫
Front fog lamps
If you do not open a door after removing
the SmartKey from the starter switch, the
lamps will switch off automatically after
approximately 60 seconds.
You can select:
You can reactivate this function within
ten minutes by opening a door.
왘
왘
Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Lighting submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the left
display: Headlamps delayed
switch-off.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
왘
Press æ or ç to select the desired lamp-on period.
앫
0 s, the delayed switch-off feature
is deactivated
앫
15 s, 30 s, 45 s, or 60 s, the delayed switch-off feature is activated
Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position U before turning off the engine (컄 page 105).
The headlamps delayed switch-off
feature is activated.
You can temporarily deactivate the delayed switch-off feature:
왘
Before leaving the vehicle turn the
SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 0.
왘
Then turn it to position 2 and back
to 0.
The delayed switch-off feature is deactivated. It will reactivate as soon as you
reinsert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
133
Controls in detail
Control system
Interior lighting delayed switch-off
Vehicle submenu
Use this function to set whether and for
how long you would like the interior lighting to remain lit during darkness after the
SmartKey is removed from the starter
switch.
Access the Vehicle submenu via the
Settings menu. Use the Vehicle submenu
왘
왘
Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Lighting submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the left
display: Int. lighting delayed
switch-off.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
134
to make general vehicle settings.
The following functions are available:
왘
Press æ or ç to select the desired lamp-on time period. You can select:
앫
0 s, the delayed switch-off feature
is deactivated
앫
5 s, 10 s, 15 s, or 20 s, the delayed
switch-off feature is activated
Function
Page
Set station selection mode
(radio)
135
Set automatic locking
135
Tire inflation pressure display
136
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting radio station selection mode
Setting automatic locking
Use the Press button in audio mode function to select the manual or memory station selection mode for the radio
(컄 page 123).
Use this function to activate or deactivate
the automatic central locking. With the
automatic central locking system
activated, the vehicle is centrally locked at
vehicle speeds of approximately
9 mph (15 km/h).
왘
왘
Move the selection marker with the
æ or ç button to the Vehicle
submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the left
display: Press button in audio mode.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press æ or ç to select the desired station selection mode. You can
select:
앫
Memory, selects next stored station
앫
Station search, selects next re-
왘
Move the selection marker with the
æ or ç button to the Vehicle
submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the left
display: Automatic door lock.
ceivable station
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press æ or ç to switch
Automatic Door lock On or Off.
135
Controls in detail
Control system
Tire inflation pressure display
Use this function to set the unit for the tire
inflation pressure display.
왘
왘
Move the selection marker with the
æ or ç button to the Vehicle
submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until, depending on production date,
you see one of the following messages
in the left display: Tire pres. display
or Tire press. display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Fuel consumption statistics after start
Trip computer menu
Use the trip computer menu to call up
statistical data on your vehicle.
The following information is available:
Function
Page
Fuel consumption statistics after 136
start
Press æ or ç to select the desired tire inflation pressure unit.
136
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
Trip computer menu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until, depending on production date,
you see one of the following messages
in the left display: From start or
After start.
Fuel consumption statistics since 137
last reset
Call up range (distance to empty) 137
i
The last function called up will reappear the next time you enter the trip
computer menu.
왘
왘
1 Distance driven since start
2 Average speed since start
3 Time elapsed since start
4 Average fuel consumption since start
Controls in detail
Control system
i
Calling up range (distance to empty)
All statistics stored since the last engine start will be reset approximately
four hours after the SmartKey in the
starter switch is turned to position 0 or
removed from the starter switch.
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
Trip computer menu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the left
display: Range.
Resetting will not occur if you turn the
SmartKey back to position 1 or 2 within this time period.
Fuel consumption since last reset
왘
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
Trip computer menu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the left
display: From reset.
1 Distance driven since last reset
2 Average speed since last reset
3 Time elapsed since last reset
4 Average fuel consumption since last
reset
In the right display you will see the calculated range based on the current fuel
tank level. Your driving style will affect
the accuracy of the calculated range.
Resetting fuel consumption statistics
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
Trip computer menu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see the reading that you want
to reset in the left display.
왘
Press and hold the reset button in the
instrument cluster (컄 page 29) until
the value is reset to 0.
137
Controls in detail
Control system
TEL menu
Warning!
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury.
G
A driver’s attention to the road must always
be his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location
and stop before placing or taking a telephone call. If you choose to use the telephone while driving, please use the
hands-free device and only use the telephone when weather, road, and traffic conditions permit.
If the telephone is on:
The telephone will then search for a
network. During this time the right display is empty.
As soon as the telephone has found a
network, READY is indicated in the right
display.
You can use the functions in the TEL menu
to operate your telephone, provided it is
connected to a hands-free system and
switched on.
왘
Switch on the telephone and the radio.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.
왘
Press button ÿ or è on the
steering wheel repeatedly until you see
the TEL menu in the left display.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet
(approximately 14 m) every second.
Which messages will appear in the right
display field depends on whether your telephone is switched on or off:
138
앫
앫
If the telephone is off, the message in
the multifunction display is: TEL OFF.
1 Signal strength
This standby message indicates that your
telephone is ready for use and you can operate it using the control system.
Controls in detail
Control system
You may carry out the following functions:
Function
Page
Rejecting a call
139
Answering a call
139
Ending a call
139
Dialling a number from the
phone book
139
Redialing
140
Answering a call
Dialing a number from the phone book
When your telephone is ready to receive
calls, you can answer a call at any time. In
the right display you will then see the message:
If your telephone is ready to receive calls,
you may select and dial a number from the
phone book at any time.
왘
In the right display you will see the
standby message.
왘
Rejecting a call
왘
If you do not wish to receive the call, you
can choose to reject it.
왘
Press button ì.
You have rejected the call. The caller
receives a busy signal.
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the TEL menu in the left
display.
Press button í.
You have answered the call. In the right
display you see the length of the call.
Ending a call
왘
Press button ì.
You have ended the call. In the right
display you will again see the standby
message.
Press button j or k.
The control system reads the phone
book which is stored in the telephone.
This may take up to 30 seconds. In the
right display you will see the message
Please wait.
When the message Please wait disappears, the phone book has been loaded.
컄컄
139
Controls in detail
Control system
컄컄 왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the desired name appears in the
right display.
앫
The stored names are displayed in
ascending or descending alphabetical
order.
If the connection is successful, the
name of the party you called and the
duration of the call will appear in the
display.
Redialing
The control system stores the most recently dialed phone numbers. This eliminates
the need to search through your entire
phone book.
왘
i
If you press and hold j or k for
longer than one second, the system
scrolls rapidly through the list of names
until you release the button again.
Cancel the quick search mode by
pressing ì.
왘
Press button í.
The system dials the selected phone
number.
앫
If no connection is made, the control
system stores the dialed number in the
redial memory.
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the TEL menu in the left
display.
In the right display you will see the
standby message.
왘
Press button í.
In the right display you see the first
number in the redial memory.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the desired name appears in the
right display.
왘
Press button í.
The control system dials the selected
phone number.
140
Controls in detail
Audio system
왔 Audio system
Audio and telephone, operation
Operating safety
These instructions are intended to help
you become familiar with your
Mercedes-Benz audio system. They contain useful tips and a detailed description
of the user functions.
Warning!
G
In order to avoid distraction which could
lead to an accident, the driver should enter
system settings with the vehicle at a standstill and operate the system only when road
and traffic conditions permit. Always pay full
attention to traffic conditions first before
operating system controls while driving.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your car is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately
14 m) every second.
Warning!
Location of the audio system
G
The audio system control panel is located
behind a cover in the upper part of the center console.
Any alterations made to electronic components can cause malfunctions.
The radio, amplifier, CD changer and
telephone are interconnected. When one of
the components is not operational or has
not been removed/replaced properly, the
function of other components may be impaired.
This condition might seriously impair the
operating safety of your vehicle.
We recommend that you have any service
work on electronic components carried out
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
1 Cover
왘
Briefly press on the lower part of
cover 1.
The cover opens automatically.
141
Controls in detail
Audio system
Operating and display elements
142
Controls in detail
Audio system
Item
Page
Item
Page
1 CD mode selector
154
5 Alpha-numeric keypad
2 Manual tuning
(radio)
147
Band selection,
station buttons (radio)
147
Fast forward/reverse
(cassette, CD)
152,
156
CD selection (CD)
156
159
Speed dialing memory
(telephone)
161
Telephone number entry, retrieving speed dialing memory (telephone)
3 Radio mode selector
4 Display panel
Cassette compartment behind display panel
147
Page
9 Function keys
6 Scanning (radio, cassette,
CD)
149,
152,
156
7 Function button
148
8 Light-emitting diode
Item
a Cassette eject
151
b Cassette mode selector
150
c Telephone mode selector
158
d Seek tuning (radio)
148
Track search (cassette, CD)
151,
156
Speed dialing memory
(telephone)
161
e On/off
144
Volume
144
143
Controls in detail
Audio system
Button and soft key operation
In these instructions, the alpha-numeric
keypad (right side of radio panel) and the
function buttons (left side of radio panel)
are referred to as “buttons”. The four keys
below the display panel are referred to as
“soft keys”.
Operation
왘
Switching on/off
Do not press directly on the display
face. Otherwise the display will be
damaged.
The volume will increase or decrease
depending on the direction turned.
왘
i
Turn SmartKey in starter switch to
position 1 or 2.
왘
Press control knob a.
왘
Adjusting audio functions
If the radio is switched on without the
SmartKey in the starter switch, it will
automatically switch off again after approximately 30 minutes.
Press the AUD key to call up the bass, treble, balance and fader functions in the various operating modes. Settings for bass
and treble are stored separately for the AM
and FM frequency bands, cassette mode
and CD mode.
Remove SmartKey from starter switch.
or
왘
The volume setting can be selected
separately for the telephone and audio
system.
i
Switching off:
144
Turn control knob a.
Switching on:
or
!
Adjusting the volume
Press control knob a.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Bass
Treble
왘
왘
왘
Regardless of operating mode, press
the AUD key repeatedly until BASS
appears on the display.
Press + or - key to increase or decrease level.
or
왘
왘
Fader
Regardless of operating mode, press
the AUD key repeatedly until TREBLE
appears on the display.
i
Your vehicle may or may not have the
fader function, depending on the
vehicle equipment and model.
왘
Regardless of operating mode, press
the AUD key repeatedly until FADER
appears on the display.
왘
Press F or R key to shift sound accordingly to the front or rear speakers.
Press + or - key to increase or
decrease level.
or
Press both + and - keys simultaneously
to reset the Bass to its center (flat) level.
왘
Press both + and - keys simultaneously
to reset the Treble to its center (flat)
level.
or
왘
Press both F and R keys simultaneously
to reset the Fader to its center level.
145
Controls in detail
Audio system
Balance
왘
Regardless of operating mode, press
the AUD key repeatedly until BALANCE
appears on the display.
Returning audio functions to factory
settings
Press L or R key to shift sound accordingly to the left or right speakers.
or
왘
Press both L and R keys simultaneously
to reset the Balance to its center level.
146
왘
Regardless of operating mode, press
the AUD key.
The sound settings menu appears on
the display.
왘
왘
Audio system sound selection (EXT)*
왘
Press the EXT key.
왘
Press one of the function keys.
Regardless of operating mode, press
and hold AUD key longer than two
seconds. RESET will appear on the
display.
All settings for bass, treble and balance
are returned to the center level and the
volume is set to a predefined level.
Controls in detail
Audio system
You can select from among the
following settings:
Radio operation
The FM, AM and WB frequency bands
are called up one after the other.
앫
Selecting radio mode
The frequency band currently selected
appears in the upper left-hand corner
of the display.
앫
DRV: The tone level is set to the
Driver position; sound is directed
toward the passengers.
SP: The tone level is set for Speech,
왘
Press b button.
왘
You can now receive radio stations
over the analog FM, AM or WB station
frequencies.
optimizing the sound for the spoken
word.
앫
앫
AMB: The tone level is set for
Ambience, producing a
three-dimensional sound.
Analog station frequencies
OFF: The audio system sound
selection is turned off.
You can select from among FM, AM or WB
frequency bands.
Telephone muting
Selecting a station
The following options are available for
selecting a station:
앫
Direct frequency band input
(컄 page 148)
앫
Manual tuning (컄 page 148)
앫
Automatic seek tuning (컄 page 148)
앫
Scan tuning (컄 page 149)
i
앫
Preset buttons (컄 page 149)
FM frequency band:
FM
87.7......107.9 MHz
앫
Automatic station memory (Autostore)
(컄 page 149)
Selecting the band
Weather band (컄 page 150).
The radio will switch to telephone mode
when a call is incoming. The current audio
source is muted.
AM frequency band:
MW (medium wave) 530......1710 KHz
왘
Press FM, AM or WB key repeatedly until desired band has been selected.
147
Controls in detail
Audio system
Direct frequency input
Manual tuning
Automatic seek tuning
Select the desired frequency band.
왘
Select the desired frequency band.
왘
Select the desired frequency band.
왘
Press “ button.
왘
왘
Press either the f or e button.
왘
Enter desired frequency using
buttons 4 to M.
Press and hold either the d or
c button until the desired
frequency is reached.
i
You can only enter frequencies within
the respective waveband.
If a button is not pressed within four
seconds, the radio will return to the
station last tuned to.
148
Step-by-step station tuning takes place
in ascending or descending order of
frequency. The first three tuning steps
will take place without muting. Afterwards, the radio will be muted and
high-speed tuning will take place until
the button is released.
The radio will tune to the next higher or
next lower receivable frequency.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Scan tuning
Manual station memory (Presets)
Automatic station memory (Autostore)
앫
Starting scan tuning
You can store ten AM and ten FM stations.
왘
앫
The Autostore memory function provides
an additional memory level. The station
memory for manually stored stations is not
overwritten.
Select desired frequency band.
Storing stations
왘
Tune in the desired station.
왘
Press and hold desired station
button 4 to M until a brief
signal tone is heard.
앫
Calling up Autostore memory level
왘
Briefly press the AS key.
AS is highlighted in the display.
왘
The radio finds the ten stations with
the strongest signals. These
stations are stored on the station
buttons 4 to M in order of
signal strength.
Press 2 button.
SC will appear on the display. The
radio briefly tunes in all receivable
stations on the band selected. The
first scan cycle will tune in only the
stations with a strong signal. The
second scan cycle will tune in every
receivable station.
앫
The frequency is stored on the
selected station button.
The frequency band and station
button number are shown in the upper left-hand corner of the display.
Ending scan tuning
왘
Press 2 button or d, c,
f or e button.
SC disappears from the display.
앫
Retrieving a station from memory
왘
Press desired station button 4
to M.
앫
Retrieving a station from memory
왘
앫
Press desired station button 4
to M.
Leaving the Autostore memory level
왘
Press the AS key.
The highlighted AS in the display
disappears.
149
Controls in detail
Audio system
Weather band
Cassette operation
왘
Playing cassettes
왘
왘
The weather band station last selected
is tuned in.
왘
Select the desired weather band
station with buttons 4 to 7.
If a station cannot be tuned in, a scan
is automatically started.
왘
Press f or e button. The next
receivable weather band station is
tuned in.
150
!
Press 3 button.
Do not press directly on the display
face. Otherwise the display will be
damaged.
The display panel folds down and the
cassette compartment becomes accessible.
Press the WB key.
왘
Fold display panel back up and press
gently on the display panel frame to
lock it in place.
Insert cassette into the cassette compartment until it engages and tap it
gently.
The cassette will be pulled in automatically. The system switches to cassette
mode. Side 1 will be played and SIDE 1
appears in the display. Side 1 is the
side of the cassette which is facing upward. The cassette deck will automatically detect the type of tape.
or
왘
If a cassette is already in the
mechanism, press j button.
Controls in detail
Audio system
i
Cassette eject
A warning signal will sound after 20
seconds if the display panel is left in
the down position. Fold display panel
back up. If the display panel is not
closed, a warning signal will sound and
the radio will be muted.
왘
Track selection
Press eject button 3.
Press the TRK key.
The current track will be displayed as
SIDE 1 or SIDE 2.
왘
Track search forward
The display folds down and the cassette is ejected. The system will switch
back to radio mode automatically.
왘
Fold display panel back up and press
gently on the display panel frame to
lock it.
!
왘
Track search
왘
Press f button.
Do not press directly on the display
face. Otherwise the display will be
damaged.
SEEK FWD will appear in the display.
Track search will run the tape forward
to the start of the next track and switch
to Play.
i
i
The cassette will not be ejected when
the system is switched off or switched
to another operating mode.
The beginning of a track can only be
found if there is pause of at least
four seconds between tracks.
You can switch sides at any time.
The side will be changed automatically
at the end of the tape.
151
Controls in detail
Audio system
Track search backward
Scanning
Fast forward/reverse
왘
앫
앫
Press e button.
Starting scan
Starting cassette fast forward mode
SEEK RWD will appear on the display.
Track search will run the tape backward to the start of the track currently
playing and switch to Play.
Stopping track search
왘
왘
Press d, c, f or
e button.
왘
Press 2 button.
SC will appear on the display.
The cassette will switch over to Play.
Each track on the cassette will be
played briefly in ascending order.
앫
FORWARD will appear on the display.
앫
Starting cassette fast reverse mode
왘
Stopping scan
왘
Press 2, d, c, f or
e button.
The system will switch to Play.
Press d button.
Press c button.
REWIND will appear on the display.
The cassette will automatically switch over
to the play mode at the end or beginning of
the tape.
앫
Stopping the cassette fast forward/reverse mode
왘
Press d, c, f or
e button.
The cassette will switch over to the
play mode.
152
Controls in detail
Audio system
Skipping blank sections (skip blank)
Switching on the skip blank function
왘
Press the SB key.
Dolby NR1 (noise reduction system)
Switching on
To enable optimum sound reproduction of
cassettes recorded using Dolby B NR, the
Dolby NR system should be switched on.
왘
Press the NR key.
NR is highlighted in the display.
SB is highlighted in the display.
i
Switching off
If the system does not detect a sound
signal, the cassette will automatically
fast forward to the next sound signal.
The Dolby NR function should be
switched off when playing cassettes
not recorded with Dolby B NR.
왘
Press the NR key.
The highlighted NR in the display disappears.
Switching off the skip blank function
왘
Press the SB key.
The highlighted SB in the display disappears.
1
DOLBY and the double-D symbol Ù are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
The Dolby noise reduction system is manufactured
under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation.
153
Controls in detail
Audio system
CD changer operation
Only use original CDs. Using copied CDs
may create problems during playback.
General notes
Clean CDs from time to time with a commercially available cleaning cloth. Do not
use solvents, anti-static sprays, etc. for
cleaning. Replace the CD in its case after
use. Protect CDs from heat and direct sunlight.
Should excessively high temperatures occur while in CD mode, CD TEMP HIGH will
appear on the display and the CD will be
muted. The unit will then switch back to
the last operating mode used until the temperature has decreased to a safe operating
level.
Should excessively low temperatures occur while in CD mode, CD TEMP LOW will appear on the display, but the CD will
continue to play.
Handle CDs carefully to prevent interference during playback. Avoid fingerprints
and dust on CDs. Do not write on CDs or
apply any labels or other material to them.
154
Your CD drive has been designed to
play CDs which correspond to the
IEC 60908 standard.
If you insert thicker data carriers, e.g.
ones that have data on both sides (one
side with DVD data, the other side with
audio data), they cannot be ejected and
will damage the drive.
Warning!
Only use CDs, which bear the label shown
and that conform to the compact disc
digital audio standard (IEC 60908). You
can therefore only use CDs with a maximum thickness of 1.3 mm.
i
Use of CDs which do not meet this
standard may cause damage to the CD
changer. Do not play single-CDs
(80 mm) with an adapter.
G
The CD changer is a Class 1 laser product.
There is a danger of invisible laser radiation
if the cover is opened or damaged.
Do not remove the cover. The CD changer
does not contain any parts which can be serviced by the user. For safety reasons, have
any service work which may be necessary
performed only by qualified personnel.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Operational readiness of CD changer
Loading/unloading a CD magazine
i
The CD changer is located in the trunk on
the left side.
왘
CDs which have been inserted improperly or are unreadable will not be
played.
Slide changer door to the right and
press eject button g.
You do not need to place CDs in all six
CD trays.
The lowest tray is magazine slot number 1 and the highest tray is magazine
slot number 6.
왘
1 CD changer
The CD changer can be operated from the
front control panel of the radio. A loaded
magazine must be installed to play CDs.
1 CD
2 CD changer
3 CD tray
4 CD magazine
왘
The CD magazine 4 will be ejected.
왘
Remove CD magazine and pull
CD tray 3 fully out.
왘
Place CD 1 in recess of CD tray, label
side up.
왘
Push CD tray into CD magazine in direction of arrow.
Push magazine into CD changer 2 in
direction of arrow and close sliding
door.
Playing CDs
왘
Press i button.
CD will appear on the display.
The last CD listened to will then start playing at the point where it was switched off.
After the last track on a CD has finished,
the next CD is automatically played.
155
Controls in detail
Audio system
Selecting CDs
Skipping tracks forward/backward
앫
앫
왘
Skipping tracks forward
왘
Press f button.
왘
The relative time of the track is shown
on the display during the search.
Skipping tracks backward
왘
You can select from among the CDs in
the CD magazine using buttons 4
to 6.
Press e button.
If the track has been playing for
more than ten seconds, it will revert
to the start of that track. If it has
been playing for less than ten seconds, it will revert to the preceding
track.
CD and the magazine slot number of the
selected CD appear on the display. The
number of the current track is displayed after TRACK.
Press and hold c button until
desired point has been reached.
i
The next track will be played.
앫
Fast reverse
Scanning
앫
Starting scan
왘
Press 2 button.
Pressing the f or e button repeatedly will result in multiple tracks being
skipped.
If there is no CD in the selected magazine slot, NO CD appears on the display
with the corresponding slot number.
156
Fast forward/reverse
SC appears in the display.
앫
Each track on the current CD will be
played for approximately eight seconds in ascending order.
Fast forward
왘
Press and hold d button until
desired point has been reached.
Controls in detail
Audio system
앫
Ending scan
Repeat
왘
The repeat function (RPT) repeats the current track.
Press 2, d, c, f or
e button.
Random play
앫
Switching on repeat:
The random play function (RDM) plays the
tracks on the current CD in random order.
앫
왘
Switching on random play
왘
앫
Press the RDM key.
RDM is highlighted in the display.
앫
Switching off random play
왘
Press the RDM key.
The highlighted RDM in the display
disappears.
왘
Press the T key.
Press the RPT key.
The total number of tracks and the total
playing time of the CD appear in the
display.
The highlighted RPT in the display
disappears.
The CD main menu appears again after
eight seconds.
Switching off repeat:
왘
Press the T key.
The number of the track being played
and the elapsed playing time appear in
the display.
Press the RPT key.
RPT is highlighted in the display.
왘
Track and time display
i
The Random play and Repeat function
cannot be used simultaneously.
157
Controls in detail
Audio system
Telephone operation
Warning!
G
Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s
attention to the road must always be
his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location
and stop before placing or taking a telephone call.
If you choose to use the telephone1 while
driving, please use the hands-free device
and only use the telephone when road,
weather and traffic conditions permit. Some
jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet
(approximately 14 m) every second.
1
Observe all legal requirements.
158
Various car telephone functions and operating steps for the car telephone can be
performed and displayed via the audio system.
Further operating instructions not covered
here can be found in the operating
instructions for the multifunction steering
wheel and the telephone.
Switching on the telephone
왘
왘
The telephone is unlocked. If you have
entered the wrong code, you must repeat the entering procedure with the
correct code.
Switching off the telephone
왘
Press h button.
If you have programmed an unlock
code for the telephone, you must enter
the code now.
왘
Enter the code using buttons 4
to M.
왘
If necessary, correct number entered
with the CLR key. Press key briefly to
delete the last digit entered; press key
and hold to delete the complete number.
Press the OK key after entering correct
code.
Press h button repeatedly until
PHONE OFF appears in the display.
The receiving symbol in the display
disappears.
Adjusting the volume
왘
Turn control knob a during telephone operation.
The volume increases or decreases depending on the direction in which the
knob is turned.
i
The volume can be adjusted separately
for the telephone and radio.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Placing a call
Entering a telephone number and
starting the dialing process
Phone book
The numbers stored in the phone book can
be called up either by name or number.
Switching between name search and
number search
왘
Press the ABC key.
The name search is called up.
Calling up the phone book
or
왘
Press the NUM key.
The number search is called up.
왘
Enter the desired telephone number
using buttons 4 to M.
The number can have up to 32 digits,
but only 13 of these are visible on the
display.
Searching and calling up phone book entries by name
왘
Press d, c, f or
e button.
If necessary, correct number entered with
the CLR key.
왘
Press key briefly to delete the last digit
entered.
왘
Press key and hold to delete the complete number.
왘
After correct telephone number has
been entered, press the SND key.
왘
Press the ABC key.
The current name is highlighted on the
display.
컄컄
159
Controls in detail
Audio system
컄컄 왘
Press either the d or c button.
The stored entries are selected according to the alphabetical order of the initial letter.
Searching and selecting phone book entries by number
Press either the f or e button.
The stored entries are selected in
increments of four.
왘
Press the desired numerical key 2
to 9.
The stored entries are selected according to the alphabetical order of the initial letters (e.g. for B -Brown, press
button 2 twice).
i
Several characters and symbols cannot
be shown on the display for technical
reasons. They have been replaced with
spaces.
160
Press the NUM key.
The current number is marked in the
display.
or
왘
왘
Once you have selected a number,
press the SND key.
Repeat dialing
or
왘
Starting dialing process
왘
Press either the d or c button.
The stored entries are selected
according to numerical order.
or
왘
Press either the f or e button.
The stored entries are selected in
increments of 5 (e.g. Entry M5, Entry
M10, etc.)
If the number dialed is busy, you can again
place calls to the last ten telephone numbers dialed using the repeat dialing function.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Manual repeat dialing (redial)
Automatic repeat dialing (redial)
Speed dialing
If a call cannot be connected, press
the SND key.
왘
A maximum of two digits can be entered.
REDIAL will appear on the display and repeated attempts to place the call will be
made for the next four minutes.
왘
Press the SND key.
The last number dialed is shown in the
display.
왘
Select the desired telephone number
using d, c, f or
e button.
The abbreviation L and the number of
the entry are shown in the top line of
the display.
왘
When you have selected a number,
press the SND key.
Selecting numbers directly from the
directory
왘
Enter previously selected 3-digit
(1-999) number of the entry using
number keys 4 to M.
왘
Press the RCL key.
Input desired entry number using
number keys 4 to M.
If necessary, correct the last number
entered with the CLR key.
왘
Press the SND key.
The telephone number stored under
that entry will be dialed. The number, L
and the full entry number will be shown
in the display.
The telephone number stored under
that entry will be dialed.
왘
Press the SND key.
The call will be made.
The call will be made.
161
Controls in detail
Audio system
Quick-dialing
Emergency calls “911”
왘
The following describes how to dial a “911”
emergency call using the audio system
head unit when a Mercedes-Benz specified
mobile phone is inserted in the phone cradle. Unless otherwise specified, the descriptions refer to the audio system head
unit.
Press one of the desired number
buttons 4 to M longer than one
second.
The telephone number saved under
that number will be dialed.
!
Please be aware that button 4
might already be reserved for an emergency call number.
Consult the separate telephone operating
instructions that came with your mobile
phone for information on how to place a
“911” emergency call on the mobile
phone.
Warning!
G
The “911” emergency call system is a public
service. Using it without due cause is a criminal offense.
162
The following conditions must be met for a
“911” emergency call:
앫
Telephone must be switched on.
앫
The corresponding mobile communications network must be available.
i
Emergency calls may not be possible
with all telephone networks or if certain
network services and/or telephone
functions are active. Check with your
local service providers.
If you cannot make an emergency call, you
will have to initiate rescue measures
yourself.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Placing a “911” emergency call using
audio head unit with the phone locked
왘
Press h button to switch to
telephone operation.
Placing a “911” emergency call using
audio head unit with the phone
unlocked
왘
CODE? appears in the audio display.
왘
Press button 4 on the audio head
unit until 911 appears in the audio display.
911 appears in the audio display while
the telephone establishes the connection.
왘
Wait until the emergency call center
answers, then describe the emergency.
Press h button to switch to
telephone operation.
왘
Enter 911 using the number keypad on
the audio head unit.
왘
Press the SND key for dialing to begin.
The telephone establishes the connection.
왘
Wait until the emergency call center
answers, then describe the emergency.
Accepting an incoming call
Accepting an incoming call in telephone
mode
With an incoming call, a ringing tone can
be heard and the caller’s telephone number, or the name under which this telephone number has been saved in the
telephone book, appears on the display. If
the caller’s number is not transmitted,
CALL will appear in the display.
왘
Press the SND key to accept call.
163
Controls in detail
Audio system
Accepting an incoming call in cassette,
CD or radio mode
If the telephone is activated in the background (receiving symbol S visible on display), the audio source is muted when a
call is received. The ringing tone is heard
and the caller’s telephone number or the
name under which this telephone number
has been saved in the telephone book appears on the display. If the caller’s number
is not transmitted, CALL appears in the display.
왘
Press the SND key to accept the call.
Muting a call
Call waiting
It is possible to mute a call; the caller is
then no longer able to hear you.
If you receive another call during an already active call, you can accept the second call and switch between the two.
Mute on
왘
Press the MUT key.
Accepting a second call
왘
Mute off
왘
Press the SND key.
You are connected with the second
caller, the first call is muted.
Press the MUT key.
Terminating a call
Switching between the calls
왘
왘
Press the END key.
The current call is terminated.
Press the SND key.
Terminating the second call
왘
Press the END key.
The current call will be terminated. You
are connected with the muted call
again.
164
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
왔 Automatic transmission
For information on driving with an automatic transmission, see the “Getting
started” section (컄 page 49).
Your vehicle’s transmission adapts its gear
shifting process to your individual driving
style by continually adjusting the shift
points up or down. These shift point adjustments are performed based on current
operating and driving conditions.
If the operating conditions change, the
automatic transmission reacts by
adjusting its gear shift program.
i
During the brief warm-up, transmission
upshifting is delayed. This allows the
catalytic converter to heat up more
quickly to operating temperature.
!
Allow engine to warm up under low
load use. Do not place full load on the
engine until the operating temperature
has been reached (컄 page 301).
Shift into park position P or reverse
gear R only when the vehicle is
stopped.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period when driving off on
slippery road surfaces. This may cause
serious damage to the drivetrain which
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Gearshift pattern
The automatic transmission selects individual gears automatically, depending on:
앫
the gear selector lever position D with
gear ranges 4, 3, 2 and 1 (컄 page 168)
앫
the selected shift program mode
(C/MAN/S) (컄 page 171)
앫
the position of the accelerator pedal
(컄 page 171)
앫
the vehicle speed
The current gear selector lever position
(P/R/N/D), the gear range (1/2/3/4) and
the shift program (C/M/S) are shown in the
standard display (컄 page 117).
165
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
An additional indication of the current gear
selector lever position can be found on the
cover of the shifting-gate.
Warning!
G
It is dangerous to shift the gear selector
lever out of P or N if the engine speed is
higher than idle speed. If your foot is not
firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
166
When the gear selector lever is in
position D, you can influence transmission
shifting by
앫
limiting the shift range
앫
changing gears manually
One-touch gearshifting
Even with an automatic transmission you
can change the gears manually when the
gear selector lever is in position D.
Downshifting
왘
Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the left in the D- direction.
The transmission will shift from the current gear to the next lower gear. This
action simultaneously limits the gear
range of the transmission
(컄 page 168).
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Warning!
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.
i
To avoid overrevving the engine when
the gear selector lever is moved to
the D- direction, the transmission will
not shift to a lower gear if the engine’s
max. speed would be exceeded.
Upshifting
Shifting into optimal gear range
왘
왘
Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the right in the D+ direction.
The transmission will shift from the current
gear to the next higher gear as permitted
by the shift program. This action simultaneously extends the gear range of the
transmission.
Press and hold the gear selector lever
in the D- direction.
The transmission will automatically select
the gear range suited for optimal
acceleration and deceleration. This will
involve shifting down one or more gears.
Canceling gear range limit
왘
Press and hold the gear selector lever
in the D+ direction until D reappears in
the right multifunction display.
The transmission will shift from the current
gear range directly to gear range D.
167
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Gear ranges
i
With the gear selector lever in position D,
you can limit the transmission’s gear range
by pressing the gear selector lever to the
left (D-), and reverse the gear range limit
by pressing the gear selector lever to the
right (D+).
If, when driving in shift program mode
C and S the maximum engine speed for
the gear range has been reached, the
transmission shifts up automatically,
even if the gear range is restricted. In
shift program MAN the transmission
will not shift up automatically.
The selected gear range appears in the
right multifunction display (컄 page 117). If
you press on the accelerator when the engine has reached its rpm limit, the transmission will upshift beyond any gear range
limit selected.
Effect
Effect
é The transmission shifts through
fourth gear only.
è The transmission shifts through
third gear only.
With this selection you can use the
braking effect of the engine.
168
ç The transmission shifts through
second gear only.
Allows the use of engine’s braking
power when driving:
앫
on steep downgrades
앫
in mountainous regions
앫
under extreme operating conditions
æ The transmission operates in the
first gear only.
For maximum use of engine’s
braking effect on very steep or
lengthy downgrades.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Gear selector lever positions
Effect
ì Park position
Gear selector lever position
when the vehicle is parked. Place
gear selector lever in position P
only when vehicle is stopped.
The park position is not intended
to serve as a brake when the
vehicle is parked. Rather, the
driver should always set the
parking brake in addition to
placing the gear selector lever in
position P to secure the vehicle.
Effect
The SmartKey can only be
removed from the starter switch
with the gear selector lever in
position P. With the SmartKey
removed, the gear selector lever
is locked in position P.
If the vehicle’s electrical system
is malfunctioning, the gear
selector lever could remain
locked in position P.
í Reverse gear
Place gear selector lever in
position R only when vehicle is
stopped.
Effect
ë Neutral
No power is transmitted from the
engine to the drive axle. When
the brakes are released, the
vehicle can be moved freely
(pushed or towed).
To avoid damage to the transmission, never engage N while
driving.
If the ESP is deactivated or
malfunctioning:
Move gear selector lever to N
only if the vehicle is in danger of
skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
ê Drive
The transmission shifts
automatically. All five forward
gears are available.
169
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
!
Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any
other reason with gear selector lever
in N can result in transmission damage
that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Warning!
G
Getting out of your vehicle with the gear
selector lever not fully engaged in position P
is dangerous. Also, position P alone is not
intended to or capable of preventing your
vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people
or objects.
Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to position P (컄 page 57).
When parked on an incline, turn the front
wheels towards the road curb.
Do not park this vehicle in areas where
combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
170
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Children
could move the gear selector lever from
position P, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Shift program mode selector switch
1 Program mode selector switch
C Comfort
For comfort driving
MAN Manual
For manual gearshift
program
S Sport
For standard driving
왘
Turn the program selector switch to the
desired setting.
Driving tips
Select C for comfort operation:
Accelerator position
앫
Your driving style influences the
transmission’s shifting behavior:
The vehicle starts out in second
gear for gentler starts. This does
not apply if full throttle is applied or
gear range 1 is selected.
앫
Traction and driving stability are
improved on icy roads.
앫
Upshifts occur earlier even when
you give more gas. The engine then
operates at lower rpms and the
wheels are less likely to spin.
Less throttle
Earlier upshifting
More throttle
Later upshifting
Kickdown
Use kickdown when you want maximum
acceleration.
왘
Select MAN for the manual gearshift program. This program allows you to perform
manual gearshifts (컄 page 174).
Press the accelerator past the point of
resistance.
The transmission shifts into a lower
gear.
왘
Ease on the accelerator when you have
reached the desired speed.
The transmission shifts up again.
171
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Stopping
Maneuvering
When you stop briefly, e.g. at traffic lights:
When you maneuver in tight areas,
e.g. when pulling into a parking space:
왘
Leave the transmission in gear.
왘
Hold the vehicle with the brake.
When you stop longer with the engine
idling or on an uphill gradient:
왘
Set the parking brake.
왘
Move the gear selector lever to
position P.
Steering wheel gearshift control
왘
Control the vehicle speed by gradually
releasing the brakes.
왘
Accelerate gently.
왘
Never abruptly step on the accelerator.
You can change the gears manually on the
steering wheel or by using the gear
selector lever (컄 page 166).
The steering wheel gearshift buttons are
located on the left and right side of the
steering wheel.
Working on the vehicle
Warning!
G
When working on the vehicle, set the
parking brake and move gear selector lever
to position P. Otherwise the vehicle could
roll away.
1 Left button: downshift
2 Right button: upshift
172
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
i
You can change gears using the steering wheel gearshift buttons independent of the currently selected gearshift
program (C/MAN/S).
You cannot shift with the steering
wheel gearshift buttons when the gear
selector lever is in position P, N or R.
Upshifting
Downshifting
Warning!
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.
왘
Press button 1 on the left side of the
steering wheel.
The transmission shifts to the next lower gear.
The current gear selector position appears in the right multifunction display
(컄 page 117).
왘
Press button 2 on the right side of the
steering wheel.
The transmission shifts to the next
higher gear.
The current gear selector position appears in the right multifunction display
(컄 page 117).
The transmission will shift to the next higher gear as permitted by the shift program.
This action simultaneously extends the
gear range of the transmission
(컄 page 168) when you are driving in the
automatic program mode C or S
(컄 page 171).
The transmission will shift to the next lower gear as permitted by the shift program.
This action simultaneously limits the gear
range of the transmission (컄 page 168)
when you are driving in the automatic
program mode C or S (컄 page 171).
173
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Manual gearshift program
Selecting manual gearshift program
In the manual gearshift program M you can
change the gears manually on the steering
wheel (컄 page 172) or by using the gear
selector lever (컄 page 166).
The currently selected manual gearshift program (I, II or III) does not appear in the right multifunction display.
The current setting is indicated only on
the program mode selector switch 3.
Turn program mode selector switch 1
(컄 page 171) to the MAN setting.
The transmission switches to the
manual program mode M. The letter M
appears in the right multifunction display and the lamp in program mode selector switch 3 (컄 page 174) comes
on. Automatic shifting is switched off.
The gear range is not limited.
3 Program selector switch for the manual
gearshift program
I Sport
For sporty driving
II Super Sport
For very sporty driving
III Race
For racing-like driving1
The individual shifting programs differ with
regard to spontaneity, response time, and
shifting smoothness.
1
174
Turn program selector switch 3 to the
desired setting (I, II or III).
i
Activating manual gearshift program
왘
왘
Please always drive carefully and obey applicable
speed limits.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
왘
Downshifting
Warning!
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.
Press button 1 (컄 page 172) on the
left side of the steering wheel.
or
왘
Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the left in the D- direction.
The transmission shifts to the next lower gear.
The current gear selector position appears in the right multifunction display
(컄 page 117).
i
When you brake or stop, the transmission shifts down to a gear from which
you can easily accelerate or take off.
Upshifting
!
In the manual program mode M, the
transmission will not upshift, even if
the engine has reached its overrevving
range. Shift up to the next gear before
the engine has reached its overrevving
range. Make absolutely certain that the
engine speed does not reach the red
marking on the tachometer
(컄 page 28). Otherwise the engine
could be damaged which is not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
175
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
왘
Press button 2 (컄 page 172) on the
right side of the steering wheel.
or
왘
Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the right in the D+ direction.
The transmission shifts to the next
higher gear.
The current gear selector position appears in the right multifunction display
(컄 page 117).
If the red gearshift indicator lamp >
comes on in the speedometer display
(컄 page 29), shift to the next higher gear.
The fuel supply will otherwise be interrupted to prevent the engine from overrevving.
176
Deactivating manual gearshift program
왘
Turn program mode selector switch 1
(컄 page 171) to the C or S setting.
The selected gearshift program appears in the right multifunction display.
Emergency operation
(Limp Home Mode)
If vehicle acceleration worsens or the
transmission no longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in limp
home (emergency operation) mode. In this
mode only second gear and reverse gear
can be activated.
왘
Stop the vehicle.
왘
Move gear selector lever to P.
왘
Turn off the engine.
왘
Wait at least ten seconds before
restarting.
왘
Restart the engine.
왘
Move gear selector lever to position D
(for second gear) or R.
왘
Have the transmission checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
Controls in detail
Good visibility
왔 Good visibility
For information on the windshield wipers,
see (컄 page 54) and adjusting the mirrors,
see (컄 page 44).
Headlamp cleaning system
Rear view mirrors
The switch is located on the left side of the
dashboard.
For more information on setting the rear
view mirrors, see “Mirrors” (컄 page 44).
Auto-dimming mirror
The reflection brightness of the interior
rear view mirror will respond automatically
to glare when
앫
the ignition is switched on
and
앫
1 To clean the headlamps
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
왘
Press switch 1.
The headlamps are cleaned with a
high-pressure water jet.
incoming light from headlamps falls on
the sensor in the interior rear view
mirror.
The rear view mirror will not react if
앫
reverse gear R is engaged
앫
the interior lighting is turned on
For information on filling up the washer
reservoir, see “Windshield washer system
and headlamp cleaning system”
(컄 page 249).
177
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Warning!
G
The auto-dimming function does not react if
incoming light is not aimed directly at sensors in the interior rear view mirror.
!
Sun visors
Electrolyte drops coming into contact
with the vehicle paint finish can be
completely removed only while in the
liquid state and by applying plenty of
water.
The sun visors protect you from sun glare
while driving.
Warning!
Glare can endanger you and others.
Warning!
G
In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte
may escape from the mirror housing if the
mirror glass breaks.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not
allow the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.
178
Warning!
G
Exercise care when using the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your
interior rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.
G
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed
while vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare
can endanger you and others.
왘
Swing sun visors down when you
experience glare.
Controls in detail
Good visibility
!
Rear window defroster
If the rear window defroster switches
off too soon and the indicator lamp
starts flashing, this means that too
many electrical consumers are
operating simultaneously and there is
insufficient voltage in the battery. The
system responds automatically by
deactivating the rear window defroster.
The rear window defroster uses a large
amount of power. To keep the battery
drain to a minimum, switch off the
defroster as soon as the rear window is
clear. The defroster is automatically
deactivated after approximately
6 to 17 minutes of operation depending on
the outside temperature.
1 Mirror cover
2 Mirror lamp
3 Mounting
4 Holder for gas cards
왘
To use illuminated mirror, lift up
cover 1.
i
If sunlight enters through a side
window, disengage sun visor from
mounting 3 and pivot to the side.
The mirror lamp 2 will switch off.
Warning!
As soon as the battery has sufficient
voltage, the rear window defroster
automatically turns itself back on.
G
Any accumulation of snow and ice should be
removed from the rear window before
driving. Visibility could otherwise be
impaired, endangering you and others.
Deactivating
왘
Press button F again.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
Activating
왘
Press button F on the climate
control panel (컄 page 182).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
179
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
180
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Function
1 Center air vent, adjustable
2 Air temperature controls for center
and side air vents
i
For draft-free ventilation, move the sliders for the center air vents to the middle position.
3 Center air vent, adjustable
4 Air volume control for center and
side air vents
5 Side air vent, adjustable
6 Automatic climate control panel
181
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Function
1 Air distribution, left (automatic or
manual operation)
182
6 Temperature control, right
2 Defrosting the windshield
7 Automatic climate control on/off
(complete system)
3 Air recirculation
8 Residual heat/ventilation
4 Rear window defroster (컄 page 179)
9 Air volume control (automatic or
manual operation)
5 Air distribution, right (automatic or
manual operation)
Automatic climate control panel
Function
a AC cooling on/off
b Temperature control, left
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
The automatic climate control is operational whenever the engine is running. You can
operate the climate control system in either the automatic or manual mode. The
system cools or heats the interior depending on the selected interior temperature
and the current outside temperature.
Warning!
G
When operating the automatic climate control, the air that enters the passenger compartment through the air vents in the
footwell can be very hot or very cold (depending on the set temperature). This may
cause burns or frostbite on unprotected skin
in the immediate area of the air vents. Always keep sufficient distance between unprotected parts of the body and the footwell
air vents. If necessary change the air flow
using the air distribution controls to direct
the air away from the footwell air vents
(컄 page 185).
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and
odors are filtered out before outside air enters the passenger compartment through
the air distribution system.
Warning!
G
Follow the recommended settings for heating and cooling given on the following pages. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you and
others.
Adjusting the temperature
Use temperature controls 6 and b to
separately adjust the air temperature on
each side of the passenger compartment.
You should raise or lower the temperature
setting in small increments, preferably
starting at 72°F (22°C).
i
When operating the climate control
system in automatic mode, you will
only rarely need to adjust the temperature, air volume and air distribution.
i
If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate
the interior before driving off.
Keep the air intake grille in front of the
windshield free of snow and debris.
Increasing
왘
Turn the outer adjustment ring slightly
to the right.
The automatic climate control system
will correspondingly adjust the interior
air temperature.
183
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Decreasing
Turning off warm air
왘
왘
Turn the outer adjustment ring slightly
to the left.
Press the left button (red).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. The air from the outlets will return
to the temperature set in the system.
The automatic climate control system
will correspondingly adjust the interior
air temperature.
When outside temperatures are low, you
can manually raise the air temperature for
the center and side air vents. The
controls 2 are located between the center air vents (컄 page 180).
Turning on warm air
왘
Press the left button (red).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. Warm air will enter from the
center and side air vents.
184
Use air volume control knob 9
(컄 page 182) for both automatic and manual air volume adjustment.
Adjusting manually
Turning on cooler air
Adjusting the temperature for the
center and side air vents
Adjusting air volume
왘
왘
Press the right button (blue).
Press the control knob.
The U light on the control knob
goes out. You can now select one of
nine air volume settings.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. Cooler air will enter from the
center and side air vents.
Adjusting automatically
Turning off cooler air
왘
Press the right button (blue).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. The air from the outlets will return
to the temperature set in the system.
왘
Press the control knob.
The U light on the control knob
comes on. The airflow is adjusted automatically.
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Adjusting air distribution
Use air distribution control knobs 1
and 5 (컄 page 182) to separately adjust
the air distribution on each side of the passenger compartment. The following symbols are found on the controls:
Adjusting manually
왘
Press the control knob.
The U light on the control knob
goes out. The air distribution can be adjusted manually.
Adjusting automatically
Symbol
Function
h
Directs air through the center air vents
j
V
Directs air to the windows
k
왘
Maximum cooling MAXCOOL
If the left and right air distribution controls
as well as the airflow volume control are
set to U and there is a high need for
cooling, MAXCOOL is activated.
This provides the fastest possible cooling
of the vehicle interior.
Press the control knob.
The U light on the control knob
comes on. The air distribution is adjusted automatically.
Directs air into the entire
vehicle interior
Windshield fogged on the outside
Directs air to the footwells
왘
Switch the windshield wipers on.
왘
Turn the air distribution control to h
or k.
185
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Defrosting the windshield
i
These settings should only be selected
for a short time.
Activating
왘
Press button P (컄 page 182).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
Deactivating
왘
Press button P (컄 page 182).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. Defrosting is turned off.
186
Activating
Air recirculation mode
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
from the outside. This setting cuts off the
intake of outside air and recirculates the
air in the passenger compartment.
Warning!
G
When the outside temperature is below
41°F (5°C), only switch to air recirculation
mode for short periods to prevent window
fogging.
왘
Press button , (컄 page 182).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
Warning!
G
Never operate the windows if there is the
possibility of anyone being harmed by the
closing procedure.
In the event that the procedure causes potential danger, the closing of the windows
can be immediately halted by releasing the
, button or by pressing or pulling the respective window switch.
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
i
Deactivating
If you keep button , pressed, the
windows will close.
왘
앫
at high outside temperatures
앫
if the concentration of carbon monoxide and nitrogen oxide in the outside air increases, for example in a
tunnel
If you have turned off the air conditioner (컄 page 190) or the outside
temperature is below 41°F (5°C), the
air recirculation mode will not switch
on automatically.
after five minutes if the air conditioner
is turned off
앫
after 30 minutes if the outside temperature is above approximately 41°F
(5°C)
Press button , (컄 page 182).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
The air recirculation mode is activated
automatically
앫
i
If you keep button , pressed, the
windows will return to their previous
position.
At outside temperatures above 79°F
(26°C) the system will not automatically
switch back to outside air. A quantity of
outside air is added after approximately
30 minutes.
The air recirculation mode is deactivated
automatically
앫
after five minutes if the outside temperature is below approximately 41°F
(5°C)
187
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Residual heat and ventilation
With the engine switched off, it is possible
to continue to heat or ventilate the interior
for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes
use of the residual heat produced by the
engine.
i
How long the system will provide heating depends on the coolant temperature and the temperature set by the
operator. The blower will run at speed
setting 1 regardless of the air distribution control setting.
188
Activating
Deactivating
왘
왘
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 1 or 0 or remove it from the
starter switch.
Press button T (컄 page 182).
The indicator lamp on button T
comes on.
Press button T (컄 page 182).
The indicator lamp on button T
goes out.
The residual heat is automatically turned
off:
앫
when the ignition is switched on
앫
after about 30 minutes
앫
if the battery voltage drops
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Deactivating the automatic climate
control system
i
When the air conditioning is switched
off, the outside air supply and circulation are also switched off. Only choose
this setting for a short time. Otherwise
the windows could fog up.
Deactivating
Reactivating
It is possible to completely deactivate the
automatic climate control system.
There are several ways to reactivate the
automatic climate control system:
왘
왘
Press button M (컄 page 182).
The indicator lamp on button M
comes on.
The indicator lamp on button M
switches off.
i
Under certain circumstances, e.g.
when the fuel system is too hot and
needs to be cooled, the cooling switches on again automatically. The red lamp
on the ± button the automatic climate control panel flashes.
Press any button on the automatic climate control panel (컄 page 182).
or
왘
Turn one of the control knobs on the
automatic climate control.
The indicator lamp on button M
switches off.
After cooling the fuel system sufficiently, the air conditioning switches off
again and the red lamp stops flashing.
189
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Air conditioning
The air conditioning is operational while
the engine is running and cools the interior
air to the temperature set by the operator.
i
Condensation may drip out from underneath the vehicle. This is normal and
not an indication of a malfunction.
Deactivating
Activating
It is possible to deactivate the air conditioning (cooling) function of the automatic
climate control system. The air in the vehicle will then no longer be cooled or dehumidified.
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
dehumidify the air with the air conditioning.
왘
Press ± button (컄 page 182).
The indicator lamp on the ±
button comes on.
i
Under certain circumstances, e.g.
when the fuel system is too hot and
needs to be cooled, the cooling switches on again automatically. The red lamp
on the ± button the automatic climate control panel flashes.
After cooling the fuel system sufficiently, the air conditioning switches off
again and the red lamp stops flashing.
190
왘
Press ± button again (컄 page 182).
The indicator lamp on the ± button
goes out.
The air conditioning uses the refrigerant
R134A. This refrigerant is free of CFCs
which are harmful to the ozone layer.
!
If you press the ± button on the automatic climate control panel and it
starts to flash, this indicates that the
air conditioning is losing refrigerant.
The compressor has turned off. The air
conditioning cannot be turned on
again.
Have the air conditioning checked at
the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Controls in detail
Power windows
왔 Power windows
Opening and closing the windows
Warning!
The windows are opened and closed electrically. The switches for the windows are
located on the door sill on the driver’s side
(컄 page 34). The switch for the passenger
side is located on the door sill on the passenger side.
G
When closing the windows, make sure there
is no danger of anyone being harmed by the
closing procedure.
The closing of the windows can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or, if
switch was pulled past the resistance point
and released, by either pressing or pulling
the respective switch.
If the window encounters an obstruction
that blocks its path in a circumstance where
you pulled the switch past the resistance
point and released it to close the window,
the automatic reversal function will stop the
window and open it slightly.
If the window encounters an obstruction
that blocks its path in a circumstance where
you are closing the window by pulling and
holding the switch, or by pressing and holding button ‹ on the SmartKey, or by
pressing and holding the , button on the
climate control panel, the automatic reversal function will not operate.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from starter switch, take it with
you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause an
accident and/or serious personal injury.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
1 Left window
2 Right window
191
Controls in detail
Power windows
Opening the windows
왘
Press switch 1 or 2 to the resistance
point.
Fully opening the windows
(Express-open)
왘
The corresponding window will move
downwards until you release the
switch.
Closing the windows
왘
Pull switch 1 or 2 to the resistance
point.
The corresponding window will move
upwards until you release the switch.
Warning!
Press switch 1 or 2 past the resistance point and release.
The corresponding window opens completely.
Fully closing the windows
(Express-close)
왘
Pull switch 1 to 4 past the
resistance point and release.
The corresponding window closes
completely.
!
If the upward movement of the window
is blocked during the closing
procedure, the window will stop and
open slightly.
Remove the obstruction, pull the
switch again past the resistance point
and release.
If the window still does not close when
there is no obstruction, then pull and
hold the switch again. The window will
then close without the obstruction sensor function.
G
Warning!
If you pull and hold the switch up when
closing the window, and upward movement
of the window is blocked by some obstruction including but not limited to arms, hands,
fingers, etc., the automatic reversal will not
operate.
192
G
Driver’s door only:
If within five seconds you again pull the
switch past the resistance point and
release, the automatic reversal will not
function.
Controls in detail
Power windows
Stopping the windows
Opening (Summer opening feature)
왘
왘
Press or pull respective switch again.
Opening and closing the windows with
the SmartKey
The windows begin to open after approximately one second.
You can also open and close the windows
from the outside using the SmartKey.
Warning!
G
Never operate the windows if there is the
possibility of anyone being harmed by the
opening or closing procedure.
Press and hold button Πafter
unlocking the vehicle.
왘
왘
Release the Πbutton to stop
procedure.
Aim transmitter eye at the rear quarterlight window.
The SmartKey must be in close proximity to the rear quarterlight window.
In the event that the procedure causes
potential danger, the procedure can be
immediately halted by releasing the
transmit button on the SmartKey. To reverse
direction of movement, press button Œ
for opening or ‹ for closing.
193
Controls in detail
Power windows
Closing (Convenience feature)
왘
왘
Press and hold button ‹ after
locking the vehicle.
Synchronizing power windows
The power windows must be
resynchronized each time
The windows begin to close after approximately one second.
앫
after the battery has been
disconnected.
Release the ‹ button to stop
procedure.
앫
if the power windows cannot be fully
opened (Express-open) or closed
(Express-close).
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
왘
Pull the power window switches until
the windows are closed.
Make sure all windows are properly closed
before leaving the vehicle.
Hold the switches for approximately
one second.
The power windows are synchronized.
194
Controls in detail
Driving systems
왔 Driving systems
The driving system of your vehicle is
described on the following pages:
앫
Cruise control, with which the vehicle
can maintain a preset speed
For information on the BAS, ABS and ESP
driving systems, (컄 page 79).
Cruise control
Warning!
Cruise control automatically maintains the
speed you set for your vehicle.
Use of cruise control is recommended for
driving at a constant speed for extended
periods of time. You can set or resume
cruise control at any speed over 20 mph
(30 km/h).
The cruise control function is operated by
means of the cruise control lever.
The cruise control lever is the uppermost
lever on the left-hand side of the steering
column (컄 page 30).
G
Cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation. The driver is and must remain at all
times responsible for the vehicle speed and
for safe brake operation.
Only use cruise control if the road, traffic
and weather conditions make it advisable to
travel at a steady speed.
앫
The use of cruise control can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic
because conditions do not allow safe
driving at a steady speed.
앫
The use of cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in
tire traction can result in wheel spin and
loss of control.
앫
Deactivate cruise control when driving
in fog.
The “Resume” function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this
particular preset speed.
195
Controls in detail
Driving systems
왘
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
The cruise control is automatically cancelled, when
Cruise control is activated.
앫
ESP works to stabilize the vehicle
i
앫
you move the gear selector lever to
position N
On uphill or downhill grades, cruise
control may not be able to maintain the
set speed. Once the grade eases, the
set speed will be resumed.
1 Sets current or higher speed
2 Sets current or lower speed
3 Cancels cruise control
4 Resumes at last set speed
Setting current speed
왘
Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
speed.
왘
Briefly lift 1 or depress 2 the cruise
control lever.
The current speed is set.
196
Canceling cruise control
There are several ways to cancel cruise
control:
왘
Step on the brake pedal.
Cruise control is canceled. The last
speed set is stored for later use.
or
왘
Briefly push the cruise control lever to
position 3.
Cruise control is canceled. The last
speed set is stored for later use.
!
However, the gear selector lever
should not be moved to position N
while driving, except to coast when the
vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on
icy roads).
i
The last stored speed is canceled when
you turn off the engine.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting a higher speed
i
왘
When you use the cruise control lever
to decelerate, the transmission will
automatically downshift if the engine’s
braking power does not brake the
vehicle sufficiently.
왘
Lift cruise control lever to position 1
and hold it up until the desired speed is
reached.
Release cruise control lever.
The new speed is set.
i
Depressing the accelerator pedal does
not deactivate cruise control. After
brief acceleration (e.g. for passing),
cruise control will resume the last
speed set.
Setting a lower speed
왘
Depress cruise control lever to
position 2 and hold it down until the
desired speed is reached.
왘
Release cruise control lever.
Fine adjustment in 1 mph
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments
Faster
왘
Briefly tip cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 1.
Setting to last stored speed
(“Resume” function)
Warning!
The speed stored in memory should only be
set again if prevailing road conditions permit. Possible acceleration or deceleration
differences arising from returning to preset
speed could cause an accident and/or serious injury to you and others.
왘
Slower
왘
Briefly tip cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 2.
G
Briefly push cruise control lever to
position 4.
The cruise control resumes the last set
speed.
왘
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
The new speed is set.
197
Controls in detail
Useful features
Map pocket in passenger footwell
Warning!
G
Do not place heavy or fragile objects, or objects having sharp edges in the map pocket.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, they could be thrown
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
to vehicle occupants.
Storage compartments
Warning!
Armrest storage compartment
G
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when stowing objects in the vehicle. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat backs.
Do not place anything on the shelf below the
rear window.
Luggage nets cannot secure hard or heavy
objects.
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help
to prevent stored objects from being thrown
about and injuring vehicle occupants during
an accident.
198
왘
Reach into the recess and lift armrest.
The armrest opens automatically.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Center storage compartment
Rear storage compartment
Parcel net in trunk
There is a net available in the trunk to secure loads:
1 Release button
2 Cover
1 Release button
2 Cover
왘
왘
Press release button 1.
Cover 2 opens automatically.
왘
Pull the trunk floor net from the trunk
back wall towards the front over the
luggage.
왘
Hang the hooks of the net on the eyes
on the trunk floor.
Press release button 1.
Cover 2 opens automatically.
The telephone is installed in the cover
of the storage compartment.
199
Controls in detail
Useful features
Ashtray and cigarette lighter
The ashtray and the cigarette lighter are located in the storage compartment under
the armrest.
Ashtray
Warning!
Cigarette lighter
G
Remove front ashtray only with vehicle
standing still.
Removing ashtray insert
왘
Pull insert 2 upwards.
Replacing ashtray insert
왘
1 Cigarette lighter
2 Ashtray insert
200
Press the insert into the holder until
you hear it click into place.
Lighter socket 1 may be used for accessories with a maximum power consumption of 180 W.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
왘
Push in cigarette lighter 1.
The cigarette lighter pops out automatically when hot.
Warning!
G
Never touch the heating element or sides of
the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the
knob only.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause
an accident and/or serious personal injury.
Controls in detail
Useful features
12-V socket
Telephone
The 12-V socket is located on the left side
in the trunk.
The telephone is located in the center storage compartment (컄 page 199).
Warning!
1 12-V socket
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
왘
Flip up cover and insert electrical plug
(cigar lighter type).
G
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and personal
injury.
Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a citizens band unit, should only
be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on
the outside of the vehicle.
The external antenna must be approved by
Mercedes-Benz. Please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for information on the installation of an approved
external antenna. Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regarding use
of an external antenna.
i
The 12-V socket can be used to
accommodate electrical consumers
(e.g. air pump, auxiliary lamps) up to a
maximum of 180 W or as a battery
charging point (컄 page 365).
201
Controls in detail
Useful features
Warning!
G
Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s
attention to the road must always be
his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location
and stop before placing or taking a telephone call.
If you choose to use the telephone1 while
driving, please use the hands-free device
and only use the telephone when road,
weather and traffic conditions permit. Some
jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet
(approximately 14 m) every second.
1
Observe all legal requirements.
202
You can take and place telephone calls using the í and ì buttons on the
steering wheel. To carry out other telephone functions, use the control system
(컄 page 138).
Removing the cellular phone from the
cellular phone cradle
See separate instruction manual for instructions on how to operate the telephone.
i
For additional information on operating
the telephone using the audio system
head unit, see “Telephone operation”
(컄 page 158).
1 Release button
2 Remove the cellular phone
왘
i
Standard Mercedes-Benz cellular
phone design shown, SLR phone design may vary.
Press the release button 1 and remove the cellular phone in direction of
arrow 2 from the cellular phone
cradle.
Controls in detail
Useful features
i
Inserting the cellular phone in the cellular phone cradle
왘
Remove the round aerial contact cover
on the back of the cellular phone.
4 Release button
5 Engage the cell phone in cellular phone
cradle
왘
1 Insert the cellular phone
2 Connector contact
3 Cellular phone cradle
왘
Slide the lower end of the cellular
phone in direction of arrow 1 into connector contact 2 on cellular phone
cradle 3.
Push the top of the cellular phone in direction of arrow 5, until the lug on the
cellular phone release button 4 engages.
If you insert the cellular phone in the
cellular phone cradle and the SmartKey
is not in the starter switch, the cellular
phone will remain on for approximately
one minute. If you make a call during
this time, the cellular phone will be
switched off approximately one minute
(delayed switch-off time) after you
hang up.
When you remove the SmartKey from
the starter switch, the cellular phone
remains on for approximately one
minute.
The battery will be charged depending
on its charge status and the position of
the SmartKey in the starter switch. The
charging process is shown in the cellular phone display.
203
Controls in detail
Useful features
Making calls in private mode
Re-inserting the cellular phone
1 Release button
2 Cellular phone cradle
3 Holder
4 Remove the cellular phone and cradle
5 Cellular phone flap
1 Fold the cellular phone flap down
2 Insert the cellular phone and cradle
왘
왘
왘
Fold the cellular phone flap 1 down.
왘
Guide the cellular phone, together with
the cellular phone cradle in direction of
arrow 2, into the holder.
Press the release button 1.
The cellular phone cradle 2 folds up.
왘
204
Remove the cellular phone, together
with the cellular phone cradle 2 in direction of arrow 4, from the
holder 3.
Fold the cellular phone flap 5 up.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Making calls in hands-free mode
왘
Open the cellular phone flap.
왘
Either accept the call or dial the desired
number.
왘
Close the cellular phone flap.
Hands-free mode is selected.
If you wish to change back to private
mode:
3 Engage cellular phone cradle
왘
Push the top of the cellular phone in direction of arrow 3, until the cellular
phone cradle engages in the holder.
!
To prevent any damage, the cellular
phone flap must be folded down before
closing the telephone compartment.
왘
Open the cellular phone flap.
왘
Remove the cellular phone from the
holder (컄 page 204).
i
Tele Aid
!
The initial activation of the Tele Aid system may only be performed by completing the subscriber agreement and
placing an acquaintance call using the
¡ button. Failure to complete either
of these steps will result in a system
that is not activated.
If you have any questions regarding activation, please call the Response
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)
or 1-888-881-6611 (in Canada).
For additional information on operating
the telephone using the audio system
head unit, refer to “Telephone operation” (컄 page 158) in chapter “Audio
system”.
For additional information on operating
the telephone using the multifunction
steering wheel, refer to “Control system” (컄 page 138).
205
Controls in detail
Useful features
The Tele Aid system
i
System self-check
(Telematic Alarm Identification on
Demand)
The SOS button is located above the inside rear view mirror.
The Tele Aid system consists of three
types of response:
The Roadside Assistance button •
and the Information button ¡ are
located in the center storage compartment (컄 page 199).
Initially, after switching on the ignition,
malfunctions are detected and indicated
(the indicator lamps in the SOS button, the
Roadside Assistance button • and the
Information button ¡ stay on longer
than ten seconds or do not come on). The
message Tele Aid – Drive to workshop
appears for approximately ten seconds in
the multifunction display.
앫
automatic and manual emergency
앫
Roadside assistance
앫
information
The Tele Aid system is operational providing that the vehicle’s battery is charged,
properly connected, not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is available.
The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can
be adjusted when using the volume control
on the multifunction steering wheel. To
raise, press button æ and to lower,
press button ç.
왘
To activate, press the SOS button, the
Roadside Assistance button • or
the Information button ¡, depending on the type of response required.
206
Shortly after the completion of your Tele
Aid acquaintance call, you will receive a
user ID and password. By visiting
www.mbusa.com and selecting “Tele Aid”
(USA only), you will have access to account
information, remote door unlock, and
more.
!
The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular
network for communication and the
GPS (Global Positioning System) satellites for vehicle location. If either of
these signals are unavailable, the Tele
Aid system may not function and if this
occurs, assistance must be summoned
by other means.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Warning!
G
If the indicator lamps in the SOS button, in
the Roadside Assistance button, and/or in
the Information button do not come on during the system self-check, or if any of these
indicators remain illuminated continuously
in red and/or the message Tele Aid Drive to workshop is displayed in the
multifunction display after the system
self-check, a malfunction in the system has
been detected.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
above, the system may not operate as expected. Have the system checked at the
nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Emergency calls
An emergency call is initiated
automatically following an accident in
which the emergency tensioning devices
(ETDs) or airbags have deployed.
An emergency call can also be initiated
manually by opening the cover next to the
inside rear view mirror labeled SOS, then
briefly pressing the button located under
the cover.
For more information, see “Initiating an
emergency call manually” (컄 page 208).
Once the emergency call is in progress, the
indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin
to flash. The message Connecting call
appears in the multifunction display. When
the connection is established, the message Call connected appears in the multifunction display. All information relevant to
the emergency, such as the location of the
vehicle (determined by the GPS satellite location system), vehicle model, identification number and color are generated.
A voice connection between the Response
Center and the occupants of the vehicle
will be established automatically soon after the emergency call has been initiated.
The Response Center will attempt to determine more precisely the nature of the accident provided they can speak to an
occupant of the vehicle.
207
Controls in detail
Useful features
The Tele Aid system is available if
앫
앫
it has been activated and is operational. Activation requires a subscription
for monitoring services, connection
and cellular air time
the relevant cellular phone network
and GPS signals are available and pass
the information on to the Response
Center
i
Location of the vehicle on a map is only
possible if the vehicle is able to receive
signals from the GPS satellite network
and pass the information on to the
Response Center.
Warning!
G
If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is
flashing continuously and there was no
voice connection to the Response Center
established, then the Tele Aid system could
not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available).
The message Call failed! appears in the
multifunction display for approximately
ten seconds.
Should this occur, assistance must be summoned by other means.
Initiating an emergency call manually
1 Cover
2 SOS button
왘
Briefly press on cover 1.
The cover will open.
왘
Press SOS button 2 briefly.
The indicator lamp in SOS button 2
will flash until the emergency call is
concluded.
208
왘
Wait for a voice connection to the
Response Center.
왘
Close cover 1 after the emergency
call is concluded.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Warning!
G
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the
vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, vehicle in a dangerous road location), please
do not wait for voice contact after you have
pressed the emergency button. Carefully
leave the vehicle and move to a safe location. The Response Center will automatically
contact local emergency officials with the
vehicle’s approximate location if they receive an automatic SOS signal and cannot
make voice contact with the vehicle occupants.
Roadside Assistance button •
The Roadside Assistance button • is
located below the center armrest cover.
왘
Press and hold the button (for longer
than two seconds)
A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside
Assistance dispatcher will be initiated.
The button will flash while the call is in
progress. The message
Connecting call will appear in the
multifunction display.
When the connection is established, the
message Call connected appears in the
multifunction display. The Tele Aid system
will transmit data generating the vehicle
identification number, model, color and location (subject to availability of cellular
and GPS signals).
A voice connection between the Roadside
Assistance dispatcher and the occupants
of the vehicle will be established.
왘
Describe the nature of the need for assistance.
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to
tow your vehicle to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such
as labor and/or towing, charges may apply. Refer to the Roadside Assistance
Manual for more information.
These programs are only available in the
USA:
앫
Sign and Drive services: Services such
as jump start, a few gallons of fuel or
the replacement of a flat tire are obtainable.
209
Controls in detail
Useful features
i
The indicator lamp in the Roadside
Assistance button • remains illuminated in red for approximately ten seconds during the system self-check after
switching on the ignition (together with
the SOS button and the Information
button ¡).
See system self-check (컄 page 206) if
the indicator lamp does not come on in
red or stays on longer than approximately ten seconds.
If the indicator lamp in the Roadside
Assistance button • is illuminated
continuously and there was no voice
connection to the Response Center established, then the Tele Aid system
could not initiate a Roadside
Assistance call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available). The
message Call failed! appears in the
multifunction display.
210
Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated using the ì button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
Information button ¡
The Information button ¡ is located below the center armrest cover.
왘
Press and hold the button (for longer
than two seconds).
A call to the Customer Assistance
Center will be initiated. The button will
flash while the call is in progress. The
message Connecting call will appear
in the multifunction display.
When the connection is established, the
message Call connected appears in the
multifunction display. The Tele Aid system
will transmit data generating the vehicle
identification number, model, color and location (subject to availability of cellular
and GPS signals).
A voice connection between the Customer
Assistance Center representative and the
occupants of the vehicle will be established. Information regarding the operation
of your vehicle, the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz
USA products and services is available to
you.
For more details concerning the Tele Aid
system, please visit www.mbusa.com and
use your ID and password (sent to you separately) to learn more (USA only).
Controls in detail
Useful features
i
!
Upgrade scenario
The indicator lamp in the Information
button ¡ remains illuminated in red
for approximately ten seconds during
the system self-check after switching
on the ignition (together with the SOS
button and the Roadside Assistance
button •).
If the indicator lamps do not start flashing after pressing one of the buttons or
remain illuminated (in red) at any time,
the Tele Aid system has detected a
malfunction or the service is currently
not active, and may not initiate a call.
Visit your Mercedes-Benz Center and
have the system checked or contact
the Response Center at
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-881-6611 (in Canada) as soon
as possible.
An emergency call is possible even if other
services are active.
See system self-check (컄 page 206) if
the indicator lamp does not come on in
red or stays on longer than approximately ten seconds.
If the indicator lamp in the Information
button ¡ is illuminated continuously and no voice connection to the
Response Center was established, then
the Tele Aid system could not initiate
an Information call (e.g. the relevant
cellular phone network is not available). The message Call failed! appears in the multifunction display.
i
The indicator lamp in the respective
button flashes until the call is concluded. Calls can only be terminated by a
Response Center or Customer
Assistance Center representative except Roadside Assistance and
Information calls, which can also be
terminated by pressing button ì on
the multifunction steering wheel.
Information calls can be terminated using the ì button on the multifunction steering wheel.
211
Controls in detail
Useful features
!
Remote door unlock
i
If the indicator lamp continues to flash
or the system does not reset, contact
the Response Center at
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-881-6611 (in Canada), or
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) in the USA or
Customer Service at 1-888-881-6611
in Canada.
In case you have locked your vehicle unintentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle),
and the reserve SmartKey is not handy:
The remote door unlock feature is available if the relevant cellular phone network is available.
왘
The SOS button will flash and the message Connecting call will appear in
the multifunction display to indicate receipt of the door unlock command.
i
When a Tele Aid call has been initiated,
the audio system is muted and the selected mode (radio or CD) pauses. The
cellular phone (if installed) switches
off. If you must use this phone, the vehicle must be parked. Disconnect the
coiled cord and place the call. The display in the instrument cluster is available for use.
Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)
or 1-888-881-6611 (in Canada).
You will be asked to provide your password which you provided when you
completed the subscriber agreement.
왘
Then return to your vehicle and pull the
trunk recessed handle for a minimum
of 20 seconds until the SOS button is
flashing.
The message Connecting call appears in the multifunction display.
As an alternative, you may unlock the vehicle via Internet using the ID and password
sent to you shortly after the completion of
your acquaintance call.
The Response Center will then unlock your
vehicle with the remote door unlocking
feature.
212
Once the vehicle is unlocked,
a Response Center specialist will attempt to establish voice contact with
the vehicle occupants.
If the trunk recessed handle was pulled
for more than 20 seconds before door
unlock authorization was received by
the Response Center, you must wait
15 minutes before pulling the trunk recessed handle again.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Stolen Vehicle Recovery services
In the event your vehicle was stolen:
왘
Report the incident to the police
The police will issue a numbered incident report.
왘
Pass this number on to the
Mercedes-Benz Response Center along
with your password issued to you when
you subscribed to the service.
The Response Center will then attempt
to covertly contact the vehicle’s Tele
Aid system. Once the vehicle is located, the Response Center will contact
the local law enforcement and you. The
vehicle’s location will only be provided
to law enforcement.
i
Garage door opener
The built-in remote control is capable of
operating up to three separately controlled
devices, for example garage door openers,
gate openers, or other devices compatible
with HomeLink® or some other systems.
You can program the signal transmitter
buttons.
Remote control integrated into the interior
rear view mirror
1
Indicator lamp
2 3 4 Signal transmitter button
5
Hand-held transmitter button
6
Hand-held remote control
transmitter (not part of the
vehicle equipment)
When the anti-theft alarm or the
tow-away alarm stays on for more than
30 seconds, a call is initiated automatically to the Response Center. See
anti-theft alarm system (컄 page 90)
and tow-away alarm (컄 page 92).
213
Controls in detail
Useful features
Warning!
G
Before programming the integrated remote
control to a garage door opener or gate
operator, make sure people and objects are
out of the way of the device to prevent potential harm or damage. When programming
a garage door opener, the door moves up or
down. When programming a gate operator,
the gate opens or closes.
Do not use the integrated remote control
with any garage door opener that lacks
safety stop and reverse features as required
by U.S. federal safety standards (this
includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982).
A garage door that cannot detect an object
- signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U.S. federal safety
standards.
214
i
i
Certain types of garage door openers
are incompatible with the integrated
opener. If you should experience
difficulties with programming the
transmitter, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, or call
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (in the USA) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer
Service (in Canada) at
1-888-881-6611.
USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
Controls in detail
Useful features
i
Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
Programming or reprogramming the
integrated remote control
Step 3:
왘
Step 1:
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
Step 2:
왘
If you have previously programmed an
integrated signal transmitter button
and wish to retain its programming,
proceed to step 3. Otherwise press and
hold the two outer signal transmitter
buttons 2 and 4 and release them
only when the indicator lamp 1 begins
to flash after approximately
20 seconds (do not hold the button for
longer than 30 seconds). This procedure erases any previous settings for
all three channels and initializes the
memory. If you later wish to program a
second and/or third hand-held transmitter to the remaining two signal
transmitter buttons, do not repeat this
step and begin directly with step 3.
Hold the end of the hand-held remote
control transmitter 6 of the device
you wish to train approximately 2 to
5 in (5 to12 cm) away from the surface
of the integrated remote control
located on the interior rear view mirror,
keeping the indicator lamp 1 in view.
Step 4:
왘
Using both hands, simultaneously
press the hand-held transmitter
button 5 and the desired integrated
signal transmitter button (2, 3
or 4). Do not release the buttons until
completing step 5.
The indicator lamp 1 on the
integrated remote control will flash,
first slowly and then rapidly.
215
컄컄
Controls in detail
Useful features
컄컄
i
i
Rolling code programming
The indicator lamp 1 flashes the first
time the signal transmitter button is
programmed. If this button has already
been programmed, the indicator lamp
will only start flashing after
20 seconds.
If the indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly
for about two seconds and then turns
to a constant light, continue with
programming steps 8 through 12 as
your garage door opener may be
equipped with the “rolling code”
feature.
To train a garage door opener (or other
rolling code devices) with the rolling code
feature, follow these instructions after
completing the “Programming” portion
(steps 1 through 6) of this text. (A second
person may make the following training
procedures quicker and easier.)
Step 5:
왘
When the indicator lamp 1 flashes
rapidly, release both buttons.
Step 6:
왘
Press and hold the just-trained
integrated signal transmitter button
and observe the indicator lamp 1.
If the indicator lamp 1 stays on
constantly, programming is complete
and your device should activate when
the integrated signal transmitter
button is pressed and released.
216
Step 7:
왘
To program the remaining two buttons,
repeat the steps above starting with
step 3.
Step 8:
왘
Locate “training” button on the garage
door opener motor head unit.
Exact location and color of the button
may vary by garage door opener brand.
Depending on manufacturer, the
“training” button may also be referred
to as “learn” or “smart” button. If there
is difficulty locating the transmitting
button, refer to the garage door opener
operator’s manual.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Step 9:
Step 12:
왘
왘
Press “training” button on the garage
door opener motor head unit.
The “training light” is activated.
You have 30 seconds to initiate the
following step.
Step 10:
왘
Firmly press, hold for two seconds and
release the programmed integrated
signal transmitter button (2, 3
or 4).
Step 11:
왘
Press, hold for two seconds and
release same button a second time to
complete the training process.
Some garage door openers (or other rolling
code equipped devices) may require you to
perform this procedure a third time to
complete the training.
Confirm the garage door operation by
pressing the programmed integrated
signal transmitter button (2, 3
or 4).
Step 13:
왘
To program the remaining two buttons,
repeat the steps above starting with
step 3.
If you live in Canada or if you are having
difficulties programming a gate operator
(regardless of where you live) by using the
programming procedures, replace step 4
with the following:
Step 4:
왘
Continue to press and hold the
integrated signal transmitter button
(2, 3 or 4) while you press and
re-press (“cycle”) your hand-held
remote control transmitter 6 every
two seconds until the frequency signal
has been learned. Upon successful
training, the indicator lamp 1 will
flash slowly and then rapidly after
several seconds.
왘
Proceed with programming step 5 and
step 6 to complete.
Gate operator/Canadian programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission
which may not be long enough for the
integrated signal transmitter to pick up the
signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
are designed to “time-out” in the same
manner.
217
Controls in detail
Useful features
Operation of integrated remote control
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
왘
Select and press the appropriate
integrated signal transmitter button
(2, 3 or 4) to activate the remote
controlled device.
The integrated remote control transmitter continues to send the signal as
long as the button is pressed – up to
20 seconds.
Erasing the integrated remote control
memory
Reprogramming a single integrated
signal transmitter button
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
왘
Simultaneously hold down the signal
transmitter buttons 2 and 4, for
approximately 20 seconds, until the
indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly. Do
not hold for longer than 30 seconds.
To program a device using a signal transmitter button previously trained, follow
these steps:
The codes of all three channels are
erased.
i
If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes
of all three channels.
218
왘
Press and hold the desired signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4).
Do not release the button.
왘
The indicator lamp will begin to flash
after 20 seconds. Without releasing
the integrated signal transmitter
button, proceed with programming
starting with step 3.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Floormats
Warning!
Installing
Removing
1 Eyelet
2 Retainer pins
왘
Pull the floormats off retainers pins.
왘
Remove the floormat.
G
When you are using floormats, make sure
there is enough clearance and that the floormats are securely fastened.
Floormats must always be securely fastened
using eyelets 1 and retainer pins 2.
Before driving off, check that the floormats
are securely in place and adjust them if necessary. A loose floormat could slip and
hinder proper functioning of the pedals.
Do not place two or more floormats on top
of each other.
왘
Lay down the floormat.
왘
Press eyelets 1 onto retainers pins 2
in direction of arrow.
219
Controls in detail
Useful features
Dust cover
Warning!
앫
G
Allow the engine to cool down completely
before slipping the dust cover on your vehicle. Otherwise you could be seriously
burned when coming into contact with the
hot exhaust system.
앫
Remove the padlock that serves as
an anti-theft device before slipping
the dust cover on or off
(컄 page 222).
앫
To avoid scratches, make sure the
zip fastener and the steel cable do
not come into contact with the vehicle (컄 page 222).
앫
Make sure the dust cover is clean
and dry before inserting it in the bag
provided with the dust cover.
!
To avoid damage to the vehicle and the
dust cover, observe the following:
앫
Use the dust cover only when the
vehicle is garaged.
앫
Cover the vehicle only when the engine has cooled down completely.
220
The vehicle as well as the dust cover must be dry before slipping the
dust cover on the vehicle.
i
Clean the dust cover according to the
care label on the inside of the dust cover.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Slipping dust cover on/off
왘
Place the rolled-up dust cover with its
dark grey side facing downwards on
the vehicle roof.
Make sure the FRONT label is facing towards the front of the vehicle.
왘
Roll the side that is labelled FRONT
over the hood.
왘
Roll the rear part over the tail end of
the vehicle.
왘
On the rear right, pull down the dust
cover below the bumper.
Unfold the dust cover.
왘
Pull down the dust cover on the right
side of the vehicle.
왘
On the front right, pull down the dust
cover below the bumper.
왘
왘
On the rear left, pull down the dust cover below the bumper.
왘
Pull down the dust cover on the left
side of the vehicle.
왘
On the front left, pull down the dust
cover below the bumper.
i
You can now apply the anti-theft device, see “Anti-theft device for dust
cover” (컄 page 222).
221
컄컄
Controls in detail
Useful features
컄컄
왘
Anti-theft device for dust cover
왘
Open hook and loop fastener 1.
The anti-theft device is located on the lower edge of the dust cover on the left side of
the vehicle.
왘
Open zip fastener 2.
왘
Tighten the steel cable by pulling elastic band 3.
왘
Secure both eyes 4 of the steel cable
with a padlock 5.
왘
Close zip fastener 2.
왘
Close fabric border using hook and
loop fastener 1.
To remove the dust cover, follow the
above steps in reverse order.
1 Hook and loop fastener with fabric border
2 Zip fastener
3 Elastic band and steel cable
4 Eyes
5 Padlock1
1
222
Not included.
Controls in detail
Useful features
!
Roof and trunk lid racks
To avoid damage to the vehicle and the
dust cover, observe the following:
앫
앫
Once you have secured the dust
cover with the anti-theft device, the
dust cover can be removed only by
using force. This can cause damage
to the dust cover (tearing) or to the
paintwork.
The dust cover anti-theft device will
not prevent burglary or vehicle
theft.
Warning!
G
This vehicle has not been designed to
accommodate any type of roof or trunk lid
rack. Therefore do not fit such accessories.
Otherwise the rack could fall off and cause
serious personal injury.
!
Do not use any type of roof or trunk lid
rack. Otherwise you will damage the
bodywork or paintwork of your SLR.
223
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
Driving instructions
At the gas station
Engine compartment
Trunk
Tires and wheels
Winter driving
Maintenance
Vehicle care
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
In the “Operation” section you will find
detailed information on operating, maintaining and caring for your vehicle.
226
The more cautiously you treat your vehicle
during the break-in period, the more satisfied you will be with its performance later
on. You should therefore observe the following for the first 1000 miles (1500 km):
앫
Drive at varying but moderate road and
engine speeds.
앫
Do not drive faster than 150 mph
(240 km/h).
앫
Break in new tires for the first
100 miles (160 km), therefore avoid
high-speed cornering. Do not exceed a
speed of 125 mph (200 km/h).
앫
Do not drive at engine speeds above
4500 rpm.
앫
Try to avoid heavy load on the engine
(driving at full throttle) and driving at
high engine speeds (maximum of 2/3
of top speed of each gear) during this
break-in period.
앫
Avoid accelerating by kick-down.
앫
Change gears in good time.
앫
Do not attempt to slow the vehicle
down by shifting to a lower gear using
the gear selector lever.
앫
Select positions 3, 2 or 1 only when
driving at moderate speeds (for hill
driving).
앫
Select C as the preferred shift program
(컄 page 171) for the first 1000 miles
1500 km).
After 1000 miles (1500 km), you may gradually bring the vehicle up to full road and
engine speed.
All of the above instructions also apply
when driving the first 1000 miles
(1500 km) after the engine or the rear differential has been replaced.
i
Always obey applicable speed limits.
Operation
Driving instructions
왔 Driving instructions
Drive sensibly – save fuel
Fuel consumption, to a great extent,
depends on driving habits and operating
conditions.
To save fuel you should:
앫
Keep tires at the recommended tire
inflation pressures.
앫
Remove unnecessary loads.
앫
Allow engine to warm up under low
load use.
앫
Avoid frequent acceleration and deceleration.
앫
Have all maintenance work performed
at the intervals specified in the
Maintenance Booklet and as required
by the maintenance service display.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Drinking and driving
Warning!
Pedals
G
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs
and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or
drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions
and judgement.
Warning!
G
Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times.
Objects stored in this area may impair pedal
movement.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal
accident are greatly increased when you
drink or take drugs and drive.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
anyone to drive who has been drinking or
taking drugs.
Fuel consumption is also increased by
driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go
traffic, on short trips and in hilly area.
227
Operation
Driving instructions
Power assistance
Warning!
G
The brake system requires electrical energy
for operation.
A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply
or electrical system may impair brake system operation and switch it into its emergency operation mode. In such a case, the
red brake warning lamp (컄 page 298) and
warning messages (컄 page 305) in the instrument cluster come on while driving. To
brake, the driver must then apply significantly greater brake pedal pressure and depress the pedal much further to obtain the
expected braking effect. If necessary, apply
full pressure to the brake pedal. Brakes are
only applied to the front wheels. Stopping
distance is increased! If there is a malfunction in the SBC brake system, we recommend that the vehicle be transported with
all wheels off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly equipment.
228
A tow bar must be used if circumstances do
not permit the use of the recommended
towing methods and the vehicle requires
towing with all four wheels on the ground.
Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on
the ground is only permissible for distances
up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to
exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). For more information, see “Towing the vehicle”
(컄 page 367).
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle.
Brakes
Warning!
G
After driving in heavy rain for some time
without applying the brakes or through water deep enough to wet brake components,
the first braking action may be somewhat
reduced and increased pedal pressure may
be necessary to obtain expected braking effect. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles
in front.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will
cause excessive and premature wear of the
brake pads.
It can also result in the brakes overheating
thereby significantly reducing their effectiveness. It may not be possible to stop the
vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an accident.
Operation
Driving instructions
After driving on wet or snow-covered
roads, you should apply your brakes firmly
before parking your vehicle. This produces
heat which serves to dry the brake disks.
i
The brake system is designed to decelerate your SLR from high speeds at the
best possible rate. Depending on the
applied brake force, speed, and ambient conditions, the brake system may
produce a squeak-type noise when you
apply the brakes at a moderate rate. If
you experience this noise, you should
occasionally test the effectiveness of
the brakes by applying above-normal
braking pressure at high speeds. This
will also enhance the grip of the brake
pads.
Warning!
G
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out these braking
maneuvers.
!
Refer to the description of the Brake
Assist System (BAS) (컄 page 81).
If the parking brake is released and the red
brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster stays on, there is a malfunction in the
SBC brake system (컄 page 298) or the
brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low.
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may
be the reason for low brake fluid in the reservoir.
Have the brake system inspected immediately.
All checks and service work on the brake
system should be carried out by qualified
technicians only. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Only install brake pads and brake fluid recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
Warning!
G
If other than recommended brake pads are
installed, or other than recommended brake
fluid is used, the braking properties of the
vehicle can be degraded to an extent that
safe braking is substantially impaired. This
could result in an accident.
Be certain to read and observe the warning
notices on brake pad replacement
(컄 page 85).
!
When driving down long and steep
grades, relieve the load on the brakes
by shifting into a lower gear to use the
engine’s braking power. This helps prevent overheating of the brakes and reduces brake pad wear.
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive
on for some time, rather than immediately
park the vehicle, so the air stream will cool
down the brakes faster.
229
Operation
Driving instructions
Driving off
Parking
Warning!
Apply the brakes to test them briefly after
driving off. Perform this procedure only
when the road is clear of other traffic.
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not
place full load on the engine until the
operating temperature has been reached
(컄 page 301).
When starting off on a slippery surface, do
not allow a drive wheel to spin for an
extended period with the ESP switched off.
Doing so may cause serious damage to the
drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
!
Simultaneously depressing the
accelerator pedal and applying the
brake reduces engine performance and
causes premature brake and drivetrain
wear.
230
!
Set the parking brake whenever parking or leaving the vehicle. In addition,
move gear selector lever to position P.
When parking on hills, always turn front
wheels towards the road curb.
G
Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
To reduce the risk of personal injury as a result of vehicle movement, before turning off
the engine and leaving the vehicle always:
앫
Keep right foot on brake pedal.
앫
Pull the parking brake lever up as many
notches as possible.
앫
Move the gear selector lever to
position P.
앫
Slowly release brake pedal.
앫
When parked on an incline, turn front
wheels towards the road curb.
앫
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 0 and remove the SmartKey
from the starter switch.
앫
Take the SmartKey with you and lock
the vehicle when leaving.
Operation
Driving instructions
Tires
Warning!
The treadwear indicator appears as a solid
band across the tread.
G
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible damage to your vehicle has occurred,
you should turn on the hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from
the road.
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
appear unsafe, have it towed to the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Center or tire dealer for
repairs.
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. These indicators are located in six
places on the tread circumference and
become visible at a tread depth of
approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which
point the tire is considered worn and
should be replaced.
Warning!
G
Although the applicable federal motor
vehicle safety laws consider a tire to be
worn when the treadwear indicators (TWI)
become visible at approximately 1/16 in
(1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not
allow your tires to wear down to that level.
As tread depth approaches 1/8 in (3 mm),
the adhesion properties on a wet road are
sharply reduced.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
widely.
Have worn tires replaced in pairs (front pair
or rear pair). Otherwise the driving stability
of the vehicle will be adversely affected.
Specified tire inflation pressures must be
maintained. This applies particularly if the
tires are subjected to high loads (e.g. high
speeds, heavy loads, high ambient temperatures).
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle. Continued
driving with a flat tire or driving at high
speed with a flat tire will cause excessive
heat build-up and possibly a fire.
!
A wheel change should only be carried
out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. Otherwise there is a danger of
damaging the vehicle by jacking it up
incorrectly.
231
Operation
Driving instructions
Hydroplaning
Tire traction
Depending on the depth of the water layer
on the road, hydroplaning may occur, even
at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce
vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the
road and apply brakes cautiously in the
rain.
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or
icy road is always lower than on a dry road.
You should pay particular attention to the
condition of the road whenever the outside
temperatures are close to the freezing
point.
Warning!
G
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction
will be substantially reduced. Under such
weather conditions, drive, steer and brake
with extreme caution.
Mercedes-Benz recommends M+S rated
radial-ply tires with a minimum tread depth
of approximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four
wheels for the winter season to ensure
normal balanced handling characteristics.
On packed snow, they can reduce your
stopping distance compared to summer
tires. Stopping distance, however, is still
232
considerably greater than when the road is
not covered with snow or ice. Exercise appropriate caution.
!
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This
may cause serious damage to the
drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Tire speed rating
Regardless of the tire speed rating, local
speed limits should be obeyed. Use
prudent driving speeds appropriate to
prevailing conditions.
Operation
Driving instructions
Warning!
G
Even when permitted by law, never operate
a vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed rating of the tires.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire
failure, causing loss of vehicle control and
possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury and possible death, for you
and for others.
Winter driving instructions
The most important rule for slippery or icy
roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid
abrupt acceleration, braking and steering
maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
system under such conditions.
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding,
move gear selector lever to position N.
Try to keep the vehicle under control by
corrective steering action.
i
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
“(Y)”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of over 186 mph (300 km/h).
For information on driving with snow
chains, see “Snow chains”
(컄 page 286).
i
For information on tire speed rating for
winter tires, see “Winter tires*”
(컄 page 285).
For additional general information on
tire speed markings on tire sidewall,
see “Tire speed rating” (컄 page 272).
Warning!
G
Road salts and chemicals can adversely
affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal
force may become necessary to produce
the normal braking effect.
Depressing the brake pedal periodically
when traveling at length on salt-strewn
roads can bring road-salt-impaired braking
efficiency back to normal.
If the vehicle is parked after being driven
on salt-treated roads, the braking
efficiency should be tested as soon as
possible after driving is resumed.
Warning!
G
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out these braking
maneuvers.
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of control loss.
233
Operation
Driving instructions
Warning!
G
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make
sure snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe
and from around the vehicle with the engine
running. Otherwise deadly carbon monoxide
(CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death.
To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation,
open a window slightly on the side of the
vehicle not facing the wind.
Warning!
G
The outside temperature indicator is not
designed to serve as an ice-warning device
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Indicated temperatures just above the
freezing point do not guarantee that the
road surface is free of ice.
For more information, see “Winter driving”
(컄 page 285).
234
Standing water
!
Do not drive through flooded areas or
water of unknown depth. Before driving
through water, determine its depth.
Never accelerate before driving into
water. The bow wave could force water
into the engine and auxiliary equipment, thus damaging them.
If you must drive through standing water, drive slowly to prevent water from
entering the passenger compartment
or the engine compartment. Water in
these areas could cause damage to
electrical components or wiring of the
engine or transmission, or could result
in water being ingested by the engine
through the air intake causing severe
internal engine damage. Any such
damage is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Passenger compartment
Warning!
G
Always fasten items being carried as
securely as possible.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
to vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
The trunk is the preferred place to carry
objects.
Driving abroad
Abroad, there is an extensive
Mercedes-Benz service network at your
disposal. If you plan to drive into areas
which are not listed in the index of your
Mercedes-Benz Center directory, you
should request pertinent information from
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Operation
Driving instructions
Control and operation of radio
transmitters
Catalytic converter
Telephones and two-way radios
Warning!
G
Radio and telephone
Warning!
G
Please do not forget that your primary
responsibility is to drive the vehicle safely.
Only operate the radio or telephone1 if road,
weather and traffic conditions permit.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet
(approximately 14 m) every second.
1
Observe all legal requirements.
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system,
possibly resulting in an accident and
personal injury.
Radio transmitters, such as a portable
telephone or a citizens band unit should
only be used inside the vehicle if they are
connected to an antenna that is installed
on the outside of the vehicle.
Refer to the radio transmitter operation
instructions regarding use of an external
antenna.
Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with
monolithic-type catalytic converters, an
important element in conjunction with the
oxygen sensors to achieve substantial
control of the pollutants in the exhaust
emissions. Keep your vehicle in proper
operating condition by following our
recommended maintenance instructions
as outlined in your Maintenance Booklet.
!
To prevent damage to the catalytic
converters, only use premium unleaded
gasoline in this vehicle.
Any noticeable irregularities in engine
operation should be repaired promptly.
Otherwise excessive unburned fuel
may reach the catalytic converter,
causing it to overheat and potentially
start a fire.
235
Operation
Driving instructions
Warning!
G
As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or
operate this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves
can come into contact with the hot exhaust
system, as these materials could be ignited
and cause a vehicle fire.
Warning!
G
The exhaust areas on the engine hood and
between the doors and front wheels get very
hot. Avoid contact with them, otherwise
there is the risk of severe burns.
236
Emission control
Warning!
Certain systems of the engine serve to
keep the toxic components of the exhaust
gases within permissible limits required by
law.
These systems, of course, will function
properly only when maintained strictly
according to factory specifications. Any
adjustments on the engine should,
therefore, be carried out only by qualified
Mercedes-Benz Center authorized technicians. Engine adjustments should not be
altered in any way. Moreover, the specified
service jobs must be carried out regularly
according to Mercedes-Benz servicing
requirements. For details refer to the
Maintenance Booklet.
G
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide, and inhaling it can cause
unconsciousness and lead to death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
have the cause determined and corrected
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive only with at least one
window fully open at all times.
Operation
Driving instructions
Coolant temperature
Warning!
During severe operating conditions and
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant
temperature may rise close to
approximately 248°F (120°C).
The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature over 248°F
(120°C). Doing so may cause serious
engine damage which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
G
앫
Driving when your engine is badly
overheated can cause some fluids,
which may have leaked into the engine
compartment, to catch fire. You could
be seriously burned.
앫
Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns and can occur just
by opening the hood. Stay away from
the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
237
Operation
At the gas station
왘
Refueling
Warning!
G
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.
It burns violently and can cause serious
injury. Whenever you are around gasoline,
avoid inhaling fumes and skin contact,
extinguish all smoking materials. Never
allow sparks, flame or smoking materials
near gasoline!
The fuel filler flap is located on the
right-hand side of the vehicle towards the
rear. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with
the SmartKey automatically locks/unlocks
the fuel filler flap.
Take off cap and set it in the recess on
the fuel filler flap.
To prevent fuel vapors from escaping
into open air, fully insert filler nozzle
unit.
i
왘
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
왘
Open the fuel filler flap by pushing at
the point indicated by arrow.
The fuel filler flap opens.
왘
Turn fuel cap counterclockwise and
hold on to it until possible pressure is
released.
Only use premium unleaded gasoline
with a minimum Posted Octane Rating
of 91 (average of 96 RON/86 MON).
Information on gasoline quality can
normally be found on the fuel pump.
왘
Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle
unit cuts out – do not top up or
overfill.
Warning!
G
Overfilling of the fuel tank may create
pressure in the system which could cause a
gas discharge. This could cause the gas to
spray back out when removing the fuel
pump nozzle, which could cause personal
injury.
238
Operation
At the gas station
왘
Replace fuel cap by turning it clockwise
until it audibly engages.
왘
Close the fuel filler flap until you hear
the latch close shut.
Check regularly and before a long trip
Coolant
For normal replenishing, use water (potable water quality). For more information,
see “Coolant” (컄 page 247) and see “Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.”
(컄 page 385).
i
More information on gasoline can be
found in the Factory Approved Service
Products pamphlet.
Engine oil level
Leaving the engine running and the fuel
cap open can cause the ú malfunction indicator lamp (USA only) or
the ± malfunction indicator lamp
(Canada only) to illuminate.
Brake fluid
For more information, see “Practical
hints” (컄 page 299).
For more information on engine oil level,
see “Engine oil” (컄 page 244).
!
1 Coolant
2 Engine oil
3 Brake fluid
i
Opening the hood, see (컄 page 241).
If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
minimum mark or below, have the
brake system checked for brake pad
thickness and leaks immediately.
Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center immediately. Do not add brake
fluid as this will not solve the problem.
For more information, see “Practical
hints” (컄 page 298).
239
Operation
At the gas station
Windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning system
For more information on filling up the
washer reservoir, see “Windshield washer
system and headlamp cleaning system”
(컄 page 249).
240
Vehicle lighting
Tire inflation pressure
Check function and cleanliness. For more
information on replacing light bulbs, see
“Replacing bulbs” (컄 page 355).
For more information on tire inflation pressure, see “Checking tire inflation pressure
manually” (컄 page 263).
Exterior lamp switch (컄 page 105).
Operation
Engine compartment
왔 Engine compartment
Hood
Opening
Warning!
Warning!
G
Do not pull the release lever while the
vehicle is in motion. Otherwise the hood
could be forced open by passing air flow.
Warning!
G
The exhaust areas on the engine hood and
between the doors and front wheels get very
hot. Avoid contact with them, otherwise
there is the risk of severe burns.
Warning!
G
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
moving parts when the hood is open and the
engine is running. Make sure the hood is
properly closed before driving. When closing
the hood, use extreme caution not to catch
hands or fingers.
The radiator fan may also start at any time
automatically, even after the SmartKey has
been removed from the starter switch. Stay
clear of fan blades.
Warning!
G
The engine is equipped with a transistorized
ignition system. Because of the high voltage
it is dangerous to touch any components
(ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic socket) of the ignition system
앫
with the engine running
앫
while starting the engine
앫
if ignition is “on” and the engine is
turned manually
G
Engine components may become very hot.
Avoid contact with them, otherwise there is
the risk of severe burns.
241
Operation
Engine compartment
The release lever is located in the driver's
footwell.
!
Make sure the windshield wipers are
not folded away from the windshield.
Otherwise the windshield wipers or the
hood could be damaged.
Make sure there is sufficient clearance
before opening the hood. A minimum
clearance in front of the vehicle of
3
/4 ft (25 cm) is required.
1 Release lever
242
The hood folding mechanism is disengaged
in two stages.
왘
Pull release lever 1 downwards.
This completes the first stage.
i
If it was not possible to release the
hood, pull the release lever downwards
more firmly.
Operation
Engine compartment
2 Hood latch
The hood latches are located in the upper
air intake next to the headlamp units.
왘
왘
Pull the hood towards you to the stop.
왘
Press the front part of the hood.
Pull the hood latches 2.
The hood opens and will automatically
be held in position by gas-filled spring
struts.
This completes the second stage.
!
Make sure there is sufficient clearance
before opening the hood. A minimum
overhead clearance of 6.6 ft (2.0 m) is
required.
243
Operation
Engine compartment
!
Closing
Warning!
Make sure the rollers at the rear of the
hood are engaged and the guide pins
line up with the guide holes. Otherwise
the hood may be damaged.
G
Be careful that you do not close the hood on
anyone.
왘
Hold the front center part of the hood
with both hands and push it backwards. After pushing the hood backwards about half-way, you will feel the
hood passing a crest and the resulting
force pulling the hood away from you.
At that point, let go of the hood and let
it fall onto the latches.
The hood should now be locked and entirely closed.
왘
Pull the hood upwards in the center,
against the resistance of the gas-filled
spring struts.
244
왘
Check that the hood is properly closed.
If the hood is not properly engaged, repeat the closing procedure.
Engine oil
The amount of oil your engine needs will
depend on a number of factors, including
driving style. Higher oil consumption can
occur when
앫
the vehicle is new
앫
the vehicle is driven frequently at
higher engine speeds
Engine oil consumption checks should only
be made after the vehicle break-in period.
!
Do not use any special lubricant additives, as these may damage the drive
assemblies. Using special additives not
approved by Mercedes-Benz may
cause damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Operation
Engine compartment
Checking the engine oil level
When checking the oil level,
앫
the vehicle must be parked on level
ground
앫
the engine must be at normal operating
temperature (min. 80°C)
왘
Wait for at least 30 seconds with
engine still at idle.
왘
Measure engine oil level with engine
still at idle.
The dipstick and the cap are located on the
passenger side in the engine compartment.
Dipstick
The engine oil level must be between the
lower (min) and upper (max) marks.
1 Dipstick
2 Filler cap
왘
Top up the engine oil if necessary.
왘
Pull out dipstick 1 and wipe it off.
i
왘
Reinsert the dipstick fully into the
guide.
왘
The difference in level between the upper and lower marks represents a
volume of about 2.1 US qt (2.0 l).
Pull out the dipstick again after three
seconds.
245
Operation
Engine compartment
!
Adding engine oil
Warning!
Only use approved engine oils and oil
filters required for vehicles with
Maintenance System. For a listing of
approved engine oils and oil filters,
refer to the Factory Approved Service
Products pamphlet in your vehicle
literature portfolio, or contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
G
The filler cap on the filler neck could be hot.
Use a rag when you unscrew the filler cap.
Otherwise you could burn yourself.
Using engine oils and oil filters of
specification other than those
expressly required for the Maintenance
System, or changing of oil and oil filter
at change intervals longer than those
called for by the Maintenance System
will result in engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
246
왘
Using a rag, unscrew filler cap 2 from
filler neck.
왘
Add engine oil as required. Be careful
not to overfill with oil.
Be careful not to spill any oil when adding.
Avoid environmental damage caused by oil
entering the ground or water.
!
Excess oil must be siphoned or drained
off. It could cause damage to the
engine and catalytic converter not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
왘
Screw the filler cap back on filler neck.
You will find further information about engine oil in the “Technical data” section
(컄 page 386) and (컄 page 385).
Transmission fluid level
The transmission fluid level does not need
to be checked. If you notice transmission
fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions,
have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
check the transmission.
Operation
Engine compartment
Coolant
앫
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
and anticorrosion/antifreeze. To check
the coolant level, the vehicle must be
parked on level ground and the engine
must be cool.
앫
The coolant expansion tank is located on
the passenger side of the engine compartment.
Warning!
Using a rag, slowly open the cap
approximately 1/2 turn to relieve excess
pressure. If opened immediately, scalding hot fluid and steam will be blown out
under pressure.
앫
Do not remove pressure cap on coolant
reservoir if coolant temperature is
above 194°F (90°C). Allow engine to
cool down before removing cap. The
coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and
is under pressure.
앫
for cold coolant: reaches the upper
mark on the bracing rib of the expansion tank (arrow)
앫
for warm coolant: is approximately
0.4 in (1 cm) higher
왘
Add coolant as required.
왘
Replace and tighten cap.
For more information, see “Coolants”
(컄 page 389).
In order to avoid any possibly serious burns:
Use extreme caution when opening the
hood if there are any signs of steam or
coolant leaking from the cooling system,
or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the coolant is overheated.
Continue turning the cap to the left and
remove it.
The coolant level is correct if the level
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine
parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene
glycol which may burn if it comes into
contact with hot engine parts.
G
앫
왘
1 Expansion tank
왘
Using a rag, turn cap slowly approximately one half turn to the left to
release any excess pressure.
247
Operation
Trunk
Batteries
Your vehicle is equipped with two batteries.
앫
Starter battery in the trunk
앫
Consumer battery in the trunk
These batteries should always be sufficiently charged in order to achieve its rated service life. A flat battery must be fully
recharged. Refer to Maintenance Booklet
for battery maintenance intervals.
If you use your vehicle mostly for
short-distance trips, you will need to have
the battery charge checked more
frequently.
When replacing batteries, always use batteries approved by Mercedes-Benz. Have
this work only carried out by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle
for an extended period of time, consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about
steps you need to observe.
248
all safety instructions
Wear eye protection.
and precautions when handling
G Observe
E
automotive batteries.
A Risk of explosion.
C
Keep children away.
D
F
Follow the instructions in this
Operator’s Manual.
Keep flames or sparks away
from battery. Do not smoke.
acid is caustic. Do not
allow it to come into contact
B Battery
with skin, eyes or clothing.
In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with clean
water and seek medical help if
necessary.
!
You must not jump start the vehicle,
otherwise the vehicle electrical systems could be damaged.
For more information on battery maintenance, see “Batteries” (컄 page 363).
Operation
Trunk
Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system
Fluid for the windshield washer system and
the headlamp cleaning system is supplied
from the windshield washer reservoir. It
has a capacity of approximately
7.4 US qt (7 l).
During all seasons, add MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate “S” to water. Premix
the windshield washer fluid in a suitable
container.
왘
Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate and water (or
commercially available premixed
windshield washer solvent/antifreeze,
depending on ambient temperatures).
Always use washer solvent/antifreeze
where temperatures may fall below the
freezing point. Failure to do so could
result in damage to the washer
system/reservoir.
!
Only use washer fluid which is suitable
for plastic lenses. Improper washer
fluid can damage the plastic lenses of
the headlamps.
Warning!
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the
trunk underneath the floor on the left hand
side.
G
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze
on hot engine parts, because it may ignite
and burn. You could be seriously burned.
1 Quick-release fasteners
2 Loop
왘
Lift up the interior floor panel by
loop 2.
왘
Turn the quick-release fasteners
counterclockwise 1 and remove the
cover.
249
Operation
Trunk
Opening washer fluid reservoir
왘
Pull up cap 3 by the tab.
Closing washer fluid reservoir
왘
Press cap 3 on to the filler neck until
it engages fully.
For more information, see “Windshield and
headlamp washer system” (컄 page 391).
3 Cap for windshield washer reservoir
250
Operation
Tires and wheels
왔 Tires and wheels
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use tires approved by
Mercedes-Benz for use on SLR vehicles.
See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for information on tested and
recommended rims and tires for summer
and winter operation. They can also offer
advice concerning tire service and
purchase.
Warning!
G
Replace rims or tires with the same designation, manufacturer and type as shown on the
original part. See an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for further information. If incorrectly sized rims and tires are
mounted:
앫
The wheel brakes or suspension
components can be damaged.
앫
The operating clearance of the wheels
and the tires may no longer be correct.
Warning!
G
Important guidelines
!
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
sustained damage, replace them.
When replacing rims, only use genuine
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
particular rim type. Failure to do so can
result in the bolts loosening and possibly an
accident.
Retreaded tires are not tested or recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous
damage cannot always be recognized on
retreads. The operating safety of the
vehicle cannot be assured when such tires
are used.
A wheel change should only be carried
out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. Otherwise there is a danger of
damaging the vehicle by jacking it up
incorrectly.
앫
For the first 100 miles (160 km) avoid
high-speed cornering. Do not exceed a
speed of 125 mph (200 km/h).1
앫
Only use sets of tires and rims of the
same type and make.
앫
Tires must be of the correct size for the
rim.
앫
Regularly check the tires and rims for
damage. Dented or bent rims can
cause tire inflation pressure loss and
damage to the tire beads.
1
Please always drive carefully and obey applicable
speed limits.
251
Operation
Tires and wheels
앫
앫
앫
If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
inflation pressure and correct as
required.
Do not allow your tires to wear down
too far. Adhesion properties on wet
roads are sharply reduced at tread
depths under 1/8 in (3 mm).
When replacing individual tires, you
should mount new tires on the front
wheels first (on vehicles with
same-sized wheels all around).
Tire care and maintenance
Warning!
G
Regularly check the tires for damage. Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure
loss. As a result, you could lose control of
your vehicle.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
sustained damage, replace them.
252
Have worn or damaged tires replaced in
pairs (front pair or rear pair). Otherwise the
driving stability of the vehicle will be adversely affected.
Regularly check your tire inflation pressure
at least once a month. For more information on checking tire inflation pressure,
see “Recommended tire inflation pressure” (컄 page 261).
Warning!
Have worn or damaged tires replaced in
pairs (front pair or rear pair). Otherwise, the
driving stability of the vehicle will be adversely affected.
Life of tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including but not limited to:
Tire inspection
앫
Driving style
Every time you check your tire inflation
pressure, you should also inspect your
tires for the following:
앫
Tire inflation pressure
앫
Distance driven
앫
excessive treadwear (컄 page 253)
앫
cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber
앫
bumps, bulges, cuts, cracks or splits in
the tread or side of the tire
Replace the tire if you find any of the above
conditions.
G
Warning!
G
Tires should be replaced after six years,
regardless of the remaining tread.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tread depth
Do not allow your tires to wear down too
far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are
sharply reduced at tread depths under
1
/8 in (3 mm).
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. These indicators are located in six
places on the tread circumference and
become visible at a tread depth of approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which point
the tire is considered worn and should be
replaced.
to wear down to that level. As tread depth
approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the adhesion
properties on a wet road are sharply
reduced.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
widely.
Summer tires 1/8 in (3 mm)
앫
Winter tires 1/6 in (4 mm)
Warning!
!
Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry
place with as little exposure to light as
possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease and gasoline.
Cleaning tires
!
Never use a round nozzle to power
wash tires. The intense jet of water can
result in damage to the tire.
Recommended minimum tire tread depth:
앫
Storing tires
Always replace a damaged tire.
G
Although the applicable federal motor safety
laws consider a tire to be worn when the
treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible at
approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not allow your tires
Warning!
1 TWI (TreadWear Indicator)
The treadwear indicator appears as a solid
band across the tread.
G
Have worn or damaged tires replaced in
pairs (front pair or rear pair). Otherwise, the
driving stability of the vehicle will be adversely affected.
253
Operation
Tires and wheels
Direction of rotation
Loading the vehicle
Unidirectional tires offer added advantages, such as better hydroplaning performance. To benefit, however, you must
make sure the tires rotate in the direction
specified.
Two labels on your vehicle show how much
weight it may properly carry.
An arrow on the sidewall indicates the
intended direction of rotation (spinning) of
the tire.
Warning
G
19" turbine-style wheels:
The wheels must be mounted corresponding
to the labelling on the inside of the rim,
where LEFT refers to the left-hand side of
the vehicle and RIGHT to the right-hand side
of the vehicle, both seen in direction of travel. Otherwise the driving stability of the vehicle will be adversely affected.
254
앫
The Tire and Loading Information
placard (Example A) or the Vehicle Tire
Information placard (Example B) can be
found on the driver’s door B-pillar. This
placard tells you important information
about the number of people that can be
in the vehicle and the total weight that
can be carried in the vehicle. It also
contains information on the proper size
and recommended tire inflation
pressures for the original equipment
tires on your vehicle.
앫
The Certification label found on the
driver’s door A-pillar (컄 page 376) tells
you about the gross weight capacity of
your vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo. The
Certification label also tells you about
the front and rear axle weight capacity,
called the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR). The GAWR is the total allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). Never exceed
the GVWR or GAWR for either the front
axle or rear axle.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire and Loading Information
Warning!
G
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit or vehicle capacity
weight as indicated on the placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or
brake failure.
Your vehicle is equipped with either the
Tire and Loading Information placard
(Example A) or the Vehicle Tire Information
placard (Example B).
i
Data shown on placard examples are
for illustration purposes only. Load limit data are specific to each vehicle and
may vary from data shown in the illustrations below. Refer to placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your
vehicle.
1 Driver’s door B-pillar
Following is a discussion on how to work
with the information contained on the two
placards with regards to loading your
vehicle.
255
Operation
Tires and wheels
Placard (Example A)
Placard (Example B)
Seating capacity
The seating capacity gives you important
information on the number of occupants
that can be in the vehicle. Observe front
and rear seating capacity. Your vehicle is
equipped with either placard Example A or
placard Example B located on the driver’s
door B-pillar (컄 page 255).
i
1 Load limit information on the Tire and
Loading Information placard
1 Load limit information on the Vehicle
Tire Information placard
The placard showing the load limit information is located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire and
Loading Information placard (Example A),
locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.”
on this placard. The combined weight of all
occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue load (if applicable) should never
exceed the weight referenced in that
statement.
The placard showing the load limit information is located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Vehicle
Tire Information placard (Example B),
locate the heading “Vehicle Capacity
Weight” on this placard. The combined
weight of all occupants, cargo/luggage
and trailer tongue (if applicable) should
never exceed the weight listed next to
vehicle capacity weight.
256
Data shown on placard examples are
for illustration purposes only. Seating
data are specific to each vehicle and
may vary from data shown in the illustrations below. Refer to placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your
vehicle.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Steps for determining correct load limit
The following steps have been developed
as required of all manufacturers under Title
49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part
575 pursuant to the “National Traffic and
Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
Step 1 (Vehicles equipped with placard
Example A)
Placard (Example A)
Placard (Example B)
1 Seating capacity
1 Seating capacity
왘
Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on
your vehicle’s placard.
Step 1 (Vehicles equipped with placard
Example B)
왘
Locate the heading “Vehicle Capacity
Weight” on your vehicle’s placard.
컄컄
257
Operation
Tires and wheels
컄컄 Step
왘
2
Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
Step 5
왘
Step 3
왘
Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.
Step 4
왘
The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs and there will
be five 150 lbs passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
(1400-750 (5 x150) = 650 lbs).
258
Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in step 4.
Step 6 (if applicable)
왘
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle (컄 page 260).
The following table shows examples on
how to calculate total and cargo load
capacities with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants.
The following examples use a load limit
of 1500 lbs. This is for illustration
purposes only. Make sure you are using
the actual load limit for your vehicle stated
on the vehicle’s placard (컄 page 256).
Operation
Tires and wheels
Example Combined
weight limit
of occupants
and cargo
from placard
Number of Seating
Occupants weight
occupants configura(driver and tion
passengers)
Combined
Available cargo/luggage and trailer
weight of all tongue weight (total load limit or
occupants
vehicle capacity weight from placard minus combined weight of all
occupants)
1
1500 lbs
2
2
Occupant 1: 150 lbs
Occupant 2: 180 lbs
330 lbs
1500 lbs - 330 lbs = 1170 lbs
2
1500 lbs
1
1
Occupant 1: 200 lbs
200 lbs
1500 lbs - 200 lbs = 1300 lbs
3
1500 lbs
1
1
Occupant 1: 150 lbs
150 lbs
1500 lbs - 150 lbs = 1350 lbs
The higher the weight of all occupants, the
less cargo and luggage load capacity is
available.
For more information, see “Trailer tongue
load” (컄 page 260).
259
Operation
Tires and wheels
Certification label
Even after careful determination of the
combined weight of all occupants, cargo
and the trailer tongue load (if applicable)
(컄 page 260) as to not exceed the permissible load limit, you must make sure that
your vehicle never exceeds the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the
front or rear axle. You can obtain the
GVWR and GAWR from the Certification label. The Certification Label can be found
on the driver’s door A-pillar, see “Technical
data” (컄 page 376).
260
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The
total weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
all cargo, and the trailer tongue load
(컄 page 260) must never exceed the
GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The total allowable weight that can be carried by
a single axle (front or rear).
To assure that your vehicle does not exceed the maximum permissible weight
limits (GVWR and GAWR for front and rear
axle), have the loaded vehicle (including
driver, passengers and all cargo and, if applicable, trailer fully loaded) weighed on a
suitable commercial scale.
Trailer tongue load
The tongue load of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects
the load you can carry in your vehicle. If a
trailer is towed, the tongue load must be
added to the weight of all occupants riding
and any cargo you are carrying in the
vehicle. The tongue load typically is ten
percent of the trailer weight and everything loaded in it.
Your Mercedes-Benz has been designed
primarily to carry passengers and their
cargo. Mercedes-Benz does not recommend trailer towing with your vehicle.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Recommended tire inflation pressure
Warning!
G
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel economy,
and are more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
Your vehicle is equipped with either the
Tire and Loading Information placard
(Example A) or the Vehicle Tire Information
placard (Example B) located on the driver’s
door B-pillar (컄 page 255).
The tire inflation pressure should be
checked regularly and should only be adjusted on cold tires. The tires can be considered cold if the vehicle has been parked
for at least three hours or driven less than
one mile (1.6 km).
Placard (Example A)
Follow recommended cold tire inflation
pressures listed on placard.
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best handling, tread life and
riding comfort.
In addition to the tire placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar, also consult the fuel
filler flap for any additional information
pertaining to special driving situations. For
more information, see “Important notes on
tire inflation pressure” (컄 page 262).
i
1 Tire and Loading Information placard
with recommended cold tire inflation
pressures
Placard (Example A) lists the recommended cold tire inflation pressures for maximum loaded vehicle weight. The tire
inflation pressures listed apply to the tires
installed as original equipment.
Data shown on placard examples are
for illustration purposes only. Tire data
are specific to each vehicle and may
vary from data shown in the illustrations below. Refer to placard on vehicle
for actual data specific to your vehicle.
261
Operation
Tires and wheels
Placard (Example B)
Important notes on tire inflation
pressure
Warning!
G
If the tire inflation pressure repeatedly
drops:
1 Vehicle Tire Information placard with
recommended cold tire inflation
pressures
Placard (Example B) lists the recommended cold tire inflation pressures for maximum loaded vehicle weight. The tire
inflation pressures listed apply to the tires
installed as original equipment.
i
Placard (Example B) may list
recommended cold tire inflation
pressures for different vehicle loads.
262
앫
Check the tires for punctures from
foreign objects.
앫
Check to see whether air is leaking from
the valves or from around the rim.
Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure
are also increased while driving, depending
on the driving speed and the tire load.
If you will be driving your vehicle at high
speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher,
where it is legal and conditions allow,
consult the placard on the inside of the fuel
filler flap on how to adjust the cold tire inflation pressure. If you do not adjust the
tire inflation pressure, excessive heat can
build up and result in sudden tire failure.
Be sure to readjust the tire inflation
pressure for normal driving speeds. You
should wait until the tires are cold before
adjusting the tire inflation pressure.
Some vehicles may have supplemental tire
inflation pressure information for vehicle
loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition. If such information is provided, it can be found on the placard located
on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
Tire inflation pressure changes by approximately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18°F (10°C) of
air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire inflation pressure
where the temperature is different from
the outside temperature.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Checking tire inflation pressure
Regularly check your tire inflation pressure
at least once a month.
Check and adjust the tire inflation
pressure when the tires are cold. The tires
can be considered cold if the vehicle has
been parked for at least three hours or
driven less than one mile (1.6 km).
If you check the tire inflation pressure
when the tires are warm (the vehicle has
been driven for several miles or sitting less
than three hours), the reading will be
approximately 4 psi (0.3 bar) higher than
the cold reading. This is normal. Do not let
air out to match the specified cold tire inflation pressure. Otherwise the tire will be
underinflated.
i
Checking tire inflation pressure
manually
If you have overfilled the tire, release
tire inflation pressure by pushing the
metal stem of the valve with e.g. a tip of
a pen. Then recheck the tire inflation
pressure with the tire gauge.
Follow the steps below to achieve correct
tire inflation pressure:
왘
Remove the cap from the valve on one
tire.
왘
Firmly press a tire gauge onto the
valve.
왘
Read tire inflation pressure on tire
gauge and check against the recommended tire inflation pressure on the
placard on the driver’s door B-pillar
(컄 page 261). If necessary, add air to
achieve the recommended tire inflation
pressure.
왘
Install the valve cap.
왘
Repeat this procedure for each tire.
263
Operation
Tires and wheels
Checking tire inflation pressure
electronically
The tire inflation pressure monitor only
functions on wheels that are equipped with
the proper electronic sensors. It monitors
the tire inflation pressure, as selected by
the driver, in all four tires. A warning is
issued to alert you to a decrease in tire
inflation pressure in one or more of the
tires.
You can call up the tire inflation pressure
monitoring display using the control
system (컄 page 136).
i
i
After you have reactivated the tire inflation pressure monitor, the current tire
inflation pressures will only be shown
after a few minutes driving time.
During this time, depending on production date, you will see one of the
following message in the display:
Possible differences between the readings of a tire inflation pressure gauge of
an air hose, e.g. gas station equipment,
and the vehicle’s control system can
occur. The readings issued by the
control system are more precise.
Tire pressure
displayed only
after driving
a few minutes
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
왘
Press button è or ÿ on the
multifunction steering wheel
repeatedly until the standard display
menu appears in the multifunction
display (컄 page 117).
왘
Press button k repeatedly until the
current tire inflation pressures for each
tire appear in the multifunction display.
or
Tire pressure displayed
after
driving a few mins.
Reactivate w/
R-button
264
왘
Operation
Tires and wheels
Warning!
i
You can select the unit of measure
(bar/psi) used for the tire inflation
pressure by changing the setting in the
control system (컄 page 136).
G
When the tire inflation pressure monitoring
system warning light is lit, one or more of
your tires is significantly under-inflated. You
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper tire
inflation pressure as indicated on the vehicle’s tire information placard. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Each tire,
including the spare, should be checked
monthly when cold and set to the recommended tire inflation pressure as specified
in the vehicle placard and owner’s manual.
i
The recommended tire inflation pressures for your vehicle can be found on
the tire placard located on the driver’s
door B-pillar. The tire inflation pressures are not listed in the owner’s
manual.
Warning!
G
The tire inflation pressure monitor does not
indicate a warning for wrongly selected tire
inflation pressures. Always adjust tire inflation pressure according to the placard on
the driver’s door B-pillar or, if available, the
inside of the fuel filler flap.
The tire inflation pressure monitor is not
able to issue a warning due to a sudden dramatic loss of tire inflation pressure (e.g. tire
blowout caused by a foreign object). In this
case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully
applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt
steering maneuvers.
컄컄
265
Operation
Tires and wheels
컄컄
i
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit or vehicle capacity
weight as indicated on the placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout.
Operating radio transmission equipment (e.g. wireless headsets, two-way
radios) in or near the vehicle could
cause the tire inflation pressure
monitor to malfunction.
Warning!
G
왘
i
If transporting a deflated road wheel or
additional wheel sensors in the vehicle,
the tire inflation pressure monitor
should not be reactivated until the deflated wheel or additional wheel sensors have been removed from the
vehicle. Otherwise the deflated wheel
or additional sensors could confuse the
tire inflation pressure monitor system
and cause it to malfunction.
Activating the tire inflation pressure
monitor (vehicles produced until
approx. October 2004)
Follow recommend tire inflation pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel economy,
and are more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
266
You must activate the tire inflation pressure monitor in the following cases:
앫
if you have changed the tire inflation
pressure
앫
if you have replaced the wheels or tires
앫
if you have installed new wheels or
tires
왘
Make sure the tire inflation pressure is
set correctly.
Press the k button on the multifunction steering wheel until the inflation pressure of each tire appears in
the right display field.
왘
Press the reset button (컄 page 29).
The following message will appear in
the speedometer display field:
Monitor current tire pressure?
Operation
Tires and wheels
왘
Press æ button.
The following message will appear in
the speedometer display field:
Tire pressure displayed
after
driving a few mins.
Reactivate w/
R-button
If you wish to cancel activation:
왘
Press ç button.
If the following message appears in the
speedometer display field:
The tire inflation pressure monitor must be
reactivated in the following situations:
If you are transporting a deflated tire
and/or additional wheel sensors in the
vehicle, do not activate the tire inflation
pressure monitor until
앫
If you have changed the tire inflation
pressure
앫
앫
If you have replaced the wheels or tires
the deflated tire and/or additional
wheel sensors are no longer in the
vehicle
앫
If you have installed new wheels or
tires
앫
you have inflated the tire to the
correct tire inflation pressure
왘
Using the tire placard on the driver’s
door B-pillar or, if available, the inside
of the fuel filler flap, make sure the tire
inflation pressure of all four tires is correct.
Reactivate tire press. monit.
왘
Re-start the activation of the tire inflation pressure monitor.
If the following message appears in the
speedometer display field:
Tire pressure
Check tires!
왘
Re-start the activation of the tire inflation pressure monitor.
i
Reactivating the tire inflation pressure
monitor (vehicles produced as of approx. October 2004)
왘
Press button k repeatedly until you
see the current tire inflation pressures
for each tire appear in the multifunction display or the following message
appears in the multifunction display:
왘
Press the reset button on the instrument cluster (컄 page 29).
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display:
Monitor current
tire pressure?
컄컄
Tire pressure
displayed only
after driving
a few minutes
267
Operation
Tires and wheels
컄컄 왘
Press the æ button.
If you wish to cancel activation:
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display:
왘
If one of the following messages appears in the multifunction display:
Tire pres. monitor
reactivated
앫
The tire inflation pressure monitor will
now monitor the tire inflation pressure
values of all four tires.
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display field:
Tire pressure
displayed only
after driving
a few minutes
This display appears until the individual
tire inflation pressure values are
matched with the tires. The individual
values are then displayed
(컄 page 264).
268
Press the ç button.
앫
Reactivate tire
pressure monitor
after rectifying
pressure
Tire pressure
Please rectify
왘
Check the tire inflation pressures and
correct them if necessary.
왘
Reactivate the tire inflation pressure
monitor.
Potential problems associated with
underinflated and overinflated tires
Underinflated tire inflation pressure
Underinflated tires can:
앫
cause excessive and uneven tire wear
앫
adversely affect fuel economy
앫
lead to tire failure from being
overheated
앫
adversely affect handling
characteristics
Warning!
G
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel economy,
and are more likely to fail from being
overheated.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Overinflated tire inflation pressure
Overinflated tires can:
Besides tire name (sales designation) and
manufacturer name, a number of markings
can be found on a tire.
앫
adversely affect handling
characteristics
앫
cause uneven tire wear
앫
be more prone to damage from road
hazards
앫
adversely affect ride comfort
앫
increase stopping distance
Warning!
Tire labeling
G
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
Following are some explanations for the
markings on your vehicle’s tires:
1 Uniform Quality Grading Standards
(컄 page 277)
2 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
(컄 page 274)
3 Maximum tire load (컄 page 275)
4 Maximum tire inflation pressure
(컄 page 276)
5 Manufacturer
6 Tire ply material (컄 page 279)
7 Tire size designation, load and speed
rating (컄 page 270)
8 Load identification (컄 page 273)
9 Tire name
i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in
above illustration.
For more information, see “Rims and
tires” (컄 page 379).
269
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire size designation, load and speed
rating
General:
Aspect ratio
Depending on the design standards used,
the tire size molded into the sidewall may
have no letter or a letter preceding the tire
size designation.
The aspect ratio 2 (컄 page 270) is the
dimensional relationship between tire
section height and section width and is
expressed in percentage. The aspect ratio
is arrived at by dividing section height by
section width.
No letter preceding the size designation
(as illustrated above): Passenger car tire
based on European design standards.
Letter “P” preceding the size designation:
Passenger car tire based on U.S. design
standards.
1 Tire width
2 Aspect ratio in %
3 Radial tire code
4 Rim diameter
5 Tire load rating
6 Tire speed rating
i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires is specific to each vehicle
and may vary from data shown in above
illustration.
270
Letter “LT” preceding the size designation:
Light Truck tire based on U.S. design
standards.
Letter “T” preceding the size designation:
Temporary spare tires which are high
pressure compact spares designed for
temporary emergency use only.
Tire width
The tire width 1 (컄 page 270) indicates
the nominal tire width in mm.
Tire code
The tire code 3 (컄 page 270) indicates
the tire construction type. The “R” stands
for radial tire type. Letter “D” means diagonal or bias ply construction; letter “B”
means belted-bias ply construction.
At the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire
with a speed capability above 149 mph
(240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size
designation (for example: 245/40 ZR 18).
For additional information, see “Tire speed
rating” (컄 page 272).
Operation
Tires and wheels
Rim diameter
The rim diameter 4 (컄 page 270) is the
diameter of the bead seat, not the
diameter of the rim edge. Rim diameter is
indicated in inches (in).
Warning
G
Tire load rating
The tire load rating must always be at least
half of the GAWR (컄 page 280) of your vehicle. Otherwise tire failure may be the result
which may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury to you or others.
The tire load rating 5 (컄 page 270) is a
numerical code associated with the
maximum load a tire can support.
Always replace rims and tires with the same
designation, manufacturer and type as
shown on the original part.
For example, a load rating of 91 corresponds to a maximum load of 1356 lbs
(615 kg) the tire is designed to support.
See also “Maximum tire load”
(컄 page 275) where the maximum load associated with the load index is indicated in
kilograms and lbs.
Warning!
For additional information on tire load
rating, see “Load identification”
(컄 page 273).
i
Tire load rating 5 (컄 page 270) and
Tire speed rating 6 (컄 page 270) are
also referred to as “service description”.
G
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit or vehicle capacity
weight as indicated on the placard located
on the driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the
tires can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or
brake failure.
271
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire speed rating
Summer tires
The tire speed rating 6 (컄 page 270)
indicates the approved maximum speed
for the tire.
Index
Speed rating
Q
up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
R
up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
S
up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
T
up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H
up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V
up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
W
up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y
up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
(Y)
above 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR
above 149 mph (240 km/h)
Warning!
G
Even when permitted by law, never operate
a vehicle at speeds greater than the
maximum speed rating of the tires.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire
failure, causing loss of vehicle control and
possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury and possible death, for you
and for others.
앫
i
Tire load rating 5 (컄 page 270) and
Tire speed rating 6 (컄 page 270) are
also referred to as “service description”.
272
At the tire manufacturer’s option, any
tire with a speed capability above
149 mph (240 km/h) can include a
“ZR” in the size designation (for example: 245/40 ZR18). To determine the
maximum speed capability of the tire,
the service description for the tire must
be referred to. The service description
is comprised of the tire load rating 5
(컄 page 270) and the tire speed
rating 6 (컄 page 270).
If your tire includes “ZR” in the size
designation and no service
description 5 and 6 (컄 page 270) is
given, the tire manufacturer must be
consulted for the maximum speed capability.
If a service description 5 and 6
(컄 page 270) is given, the speed capability is limited by the speed symbol in
the service description.
Example: 245/40 ZR18 97Y.
In this example, “97Y” is the service
description. The letter “Y” designates
the speed rating and the speed capability of the tire is limited to 186 mph
(300 km/h).
Operation
Tires and wheels
앫
Any tire with a speed capability above
186 mph (300 km/h) must include a
“ZR” in the size designation AND the
service description must be placed in
parenthesis. Example: 275/40 ZR 18
(99Y). The “(Y)” speed rating in parenthesis designates the maximum speed
capability of the tire as being above
186 mph (300 km/h). Consult the tire
manufacturer for the actual maximum
permissible speed of the tire.
All-season and winter tires
Index
Speed rating
Q M+S
up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
T M+S
up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H M+S
up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V M+S
up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
Load identification
i
The marking “M+S” next to the service
description designates tires with mud
and snow capabilities.
1 Load identification
i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in
above illustration.
273
Operation
Tires and wheels
In addition to tire load rating, special load
information may be molded into the tire
sidewall following the letter designating
the tire speed rating 1 (컄 page 273).
No specification given: absence of any text
(like in above example) indicates a
standard load (SL) tire.
XL (Extra Load): designates an extra load
(or reinforced) tire.
Light Load: designates a light load tire.
C, D, E: designates load range associated
with the maximum load a tire can carry at
a specified pressure.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
U.S. tire regulations require each new tire
manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a
TIN into or onto a sidewall of each tire
produced.
The TIN is a unique identifier which facilitates efforts by tire manufactures to notify
purchasers in recall situations or other
safety matters concerning tires and gives
purchasers the means to easily identify
such tires.
The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s
identification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type
code” and “Date of manufacture”.
1 DOT
2 Manufacturer’s identification mark
3 Tire size
4 Tire type code (at the option of the tire
manufacturer)
5 Date of manufacture
i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in
above illustration.
274
Operation
Tires and wheels
DOT (Department of Transportation)
Tire type code
A tire branding symbol 1 (컄 page 274)
which denotes the tire meets requirements of the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
The code 4 (컄 page 274) may, at the
option of the manufacturer, be used as a
descriptive code for identifying significant
characteristics of the tire.
Manufacturer’s identification mark
Date of manufacture
The manufacturer’s identification mark 2
(컄 page 274) denotes the tire
manufacturer.
The date of manufacture 5 (컄 page 274)
identifies the week and year of manufacture.
New tires have a mark with two symbols.
The first two figures identify the week,
starting with “01” to represent the first full
week of the calendar year. The second two
figures represent the year.
Retreaded tires have a mark with four symbols. For more information on retreaded
tires, see (컄 page 251).
Tire size
The code 3 (컄 page 274) indicates the
tire size.
For example, “3202” represents the 32nd
week of 2002.
Maximum tire load
1 Maximum tire load rating
i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in
above illustration.
The maximum tire load is the maximum
weight the tires are designed to support.
275
Operation
Tires and wheels
Warning!
G
Maximum tire inflation pressure
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit or vehicle capacity
weight as indicated on the placard located
on the driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the
tires can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or
brake failure.
For more information on tire load rating
(컄 page 271).
For information on calculating total and
cargo load capacities (컄 page 257).
Warning!
G
Never exceed the max. tire inflation
pressure. Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
1 Maximum permissible tire inflation
pressure
i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in
above illustration.
This is the maximum permissible tire
inflation pressure for the tire.
276
Always follow the recommended tire
inflation pressure (컄 page 261) for proper
tire inflation.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are
more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
(U.S. vehicles)
Tire manufacturers are required to grade
tires based on three performance
factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance.
Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear Traction Temperature
200
AA
A
All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (11/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly
from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
1 Treadwear
2 Traction
3 Temperature resistance
i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in
above illustration.
277
Operation
Tires and wheels
Traction
Temperature
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Warning!
G
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
278
Warning!
G
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause
excessive heat build-up and possible tire
failure.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire ply material
Tire and loading terminology
Accessory weight
1 Plies in sidewall
2 Plies under tread
i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in
above illustration.
This marking tells you about the type of
cord and number of plies in the sidewall
and under the tread.
The combined weight (in excess of those
standard items which may be replaced) of
automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power
seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that
these items are available as
factory-installed equipment (whether
installed or not).
Bar
Another metric unit for air pressure. There
are 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi)
to 1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa)
to 1 bar.
Bead
The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the
rim.
Cold tire inflation pressure
Air pressure
The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire.
Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi), or kilopascal (kPa) or
bars.
Aspect ratio
Dimensional relationship between tire
section height and section width
expressed in percentage.
Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle
has been sitting for at least three hours or
driven no more than one mile (1.6 km).
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum
capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so
equipped, air conditioning and additional
optional equipment, but without passengers and cargo.
279
Operation
Tires and wheels
DOT (Department of Transportation)
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
Maximum tire inflation pressure
A tire branding symbol which denotes the
tire meets requirements of the
U.S. Department of Transportation.
This is the maximum permissible vehicle
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (weight of
the vehicle including all options, passengers, fuel, and cargo and, if applicable,
trailer tongue load). It is indicated on
Certification label located on the driver’s
door A-pillar.
This number is the greatest amount of air
pressure that should ever be put in the tire
under normal driving conditions.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible
axle weight. The gross vehicle weight on
each axle must never exceed the GAWR for
the front and rear axle indicated on the
Certification label located on the driver’s
door A-pillar.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
The GVW comprises the weight of the
vehicle including fuel, tools, spare wheel,
installed accessories, passengers and
cargo and, if applicable, trailer tongue
load. The GWV must never exceed the
GWVR indicated on the Certification label
located on the driver’s door A-pillar.
280
Kilopascal (kPa)
The metric unit for air pressure. There are
6.9 kPa to one psi; another metric unit for
air pressure is bars. There are
100 kilopascals (kPa) to one bar.
Maximum load rating
The maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire.
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The sum of curb weight, accessory weight,
vehicle capacity weight and production
options weight.
Normal occupant weight
The number of occupants the vehicle is
designed to seat, multiplied by
68 kilograms (150 lbs).
Occupant distribution
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle
at their designated seating positions.
Production options weight
The combined weight of those installed
regular production options weighing over
5 lbs (2.3 kilograms) in excess of those
standard items which they replace, not
previously considered in curb weight or
accessory weight, including heavy duty
brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
battery, and special trim.
Operation
Tires and wheels
PSI (Pounds per square inch)
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
Tire speed rating
A standard unit of measure for air pressure
-> bar, kilopascal (kPa).
Unique identifier which facilitates efforts
by tire manufacturers to notify purchasers
in recall situations or other safety matters
concerning tires and gives purchases the
means to easily identify such tires. The TIN
is comprised of “Manufacturer’s identification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code”
and “Date of manufacture”.
Part of tire designation; indicates the
speed range for which a tire is approved.
Tire load rating
The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Recommended tire inflation pressure
Recommended tire inflation pressure
listed on placard located on driver’s door
B-pillar for normal driving conditions.
Provides best handling, tread life and
riding comfort.
Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire beads are
seated.
Sidewall
The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
Numerical code associated with the
maximum load a tire can support.
Tire ply composition and material used
This indicates the number of plies or the
number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials
in the tire and sidewall, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
Traction
Force exerted by the vehicle on the road
via the tires. The amount of grip provided.
Tread
Treadwear indicators
Narrow bands, sometimes called
“wear bars” that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 in (1.6 mm) of tread
remains.
281
Operation
Tires and wheels
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
A tire information system that provides
consumers with ratings for a tire’s traction,
temperature and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The
ratings are molded into the sidewall of the
tire.
Rotating tires
!
A wheel change should only be carried
out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. Otherwise there is a danger of
damaging the vehicle by jacking it up
incorrectly.
Vehicle capacity weight
Rated cargo and luggage load plus
68 kilograms (150 lbs) times the vehicle’s
designated seating capacity.
Vehicle maximum load on the tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each axle its
share of the maximum loaded vehicle
weight and dividing it by two.
282
front-to-rear rotation pattern that will
maintain the intended rotation (spinning)
direction of the tire (컄 page 254).
Warning!
G
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires
are of the same dimension.
If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size
tires (different tire dimensions front vs.
rear), tire rotation is not possible.
Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles
with tires of the same dimension all
around. If your vehicle is equipped with
tires of the same dimension all around,
tires can be rotated, observing a
In some cases, such as when your vehicle
is equipped with mixed-size tires (different
tire dimension front vs. rear), tire rotation
is not possible.
If applicable to your vehicle’s tire configuration, tires can be rotated according to
the tire manufacturer’s recommended intervals in the tire manufacturer’s warranty
pamphlet located in your vehicle literature
portfolio. If none is available, tires should
be rotated every 3000 to 6000 miles
(5000 to 10000 km), or sooner if necessary, according to the degree of tire wear.
The same rotation (spinning) direction
must be maintained (컄 page 254).
Rotate tires before the characteristic tire
wear pattern becomes visible (shoulder
wear on front tires and tread center wear
on rear tires).
Operation
Tires and wheels
Thoroughly clean the mounting face of
wheels and brake disks, i.e. the inner side
of the wheels/tires, during each rotation.
Check for and ensure proper tire inflation
pressure.
Warning!
G
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. Wheels could become
loose if not tightened with a torque of
95 lb-ft (130 Nm).
Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel
bolts specified for your vehicle’s rims.
For information on wheel change, see the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 358).
!
Anti-theft wheel nuts
Your vehicle is equipped with anti-theft
wheel nuts that prevent the theft of your
vehicle’s wheels.
Warning!
Store wheel bolts and anti-theft wheel
nuts not currently in use in a safe place
to avoid damage to the threads.
G
Pull the parking brake lever up as many
notches as possible and move the gear selector lever to position P, before loosening
the wheel bolts. Otherwise the vehicle may
move and cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
!
Do not use air tools, such as an impact
wrench, when installing or removing
the anti-theft wheel nuts. An impact
wrench can damage the anti-theft
wheel nuts and the wheel nut key, or
cause them to malfunction.
1 Anti-theft wheel nut
2 Wheel nut key
283
Operation
Tires and wheels
Removing anti-theft wheel nuts
Fitting anti-theft wheel nuts
i
왘
Unscrew anti-theft wheel nut 1 using
wheel nut key 2.
왘
Unscrew a wheel bolt from one of the
wheels.
왘
Replace anti-theft wheel nut 1 with
one of the regular wheel bolts.
왘
왘
Fasten the wheel bolt and tighten it
with a torque wrench to a tightening
torque of 95 lb-ft (130 Nm).
Replace that wheel bolt with one of the
anti-theft wheel nuts 1 delivered with
your vehicle.
Keep the anti-theft wheel nut key in a
convenient place in your vehicle where
you and service personnel can always
find it easily when it is needed.
왘
Fasten anti-theft wheel nut 1 using
wheel nut key 2 and tighten with a
torque wrench to a tightening torque of
95 lb-ft (130 Nm).
Warning!
G
The wheels could come loose if the wheel
bolts are not tightened to a torque of 95 lb-ft
(130 Nm). Have the tightening torque
checked after changing a wheel.
284
Warning!
G
The wheels could come loose if the wheel
bolts are not tightened to a torque of 95 lb-ft
(130 Nm). Have the tightening torque
checked after changing a wheel.
i
If you should lose the anti-theft wheel
nut key or one of the anti-theft wheel
nuts, please contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for a replacement.
Operation
Winter driving
왔 Winter driving
Before the onset of winter, have your
vehicle winterized at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. This service
includes:
앫
Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze
concentration.
앫
Addition of cleaning concentrate to the
water of the windshield and headlamp
cleaning system. Add MB Concentrate
“S” to a premixed windshield washer
solvent/antifreeze which is formulated
for below freezing temperatures
(컄 page 391).
앫
앫
Battery test. Battery capacity drops
with decreasing ambient temperature.
A well charged battery helps to make
sure that the engine can be started,
even at low ambient temperatures.
Tire change. Mercedes-Benz recommends M+S rated radial-ply tires with a
minimum tread depth of approximately
1
/6 in (4 mm) on all four wheels for the
winter season.
Winter tires*
!
A wheel change should only be carried
out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. Otherwise there is a danger of
damaging the vehicle by jacking it up
incorrectly.
Always observe the speed rating of the
winter tires installed on your vehicle. If the
maximum speed for which your tires are
rated is below the speed rating of your
vehicle, you must place a notice to this
effect where it will be seen by the driver.
Such notices are available from your tire
dealer or from any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Always use winter tires at temperatures
below 45°F (7°C) and whenever wintry
road conditions prevail. Use of winter tires
is the only way to achieve the maximum
effectiveness of the ABS and ESP in winter
operation.
For safe handling, make sure that all
mounted winter tires are of the same make
and have the same tread design.
Warning!
G
Winter tires with a tread depth under 1/6 in
(4 mm) must be replaced. They are no
longer suitable for winter operation.
285
Operation
Winter driving
Snow chains
Snow chains should only be driven on
snow-covered roads at speeds not to
exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains
as soon as possible when driving on roads
without snow.
i
When driving with snow chains, you
may wish to deactivate the ESP
(컄 page 83) before setting the vehicle
in motion. This will improve the
vehicle’s traction.
286
Please observe the following guidelines
when using snow chains:
앫
앫
Use of snow chains is not permissible
with all wheel/tire combinations.
Snow chains should only be used on
the rear wheels. Follow the manufacturer’s mounting instructions.
앫
Only use snow chains that are
approved by Mercedes-Benz. Your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
be glad to advise you on this subject.
앫
Use of snow chains may be prohibited
depending on location. Always check
local and state laws before installing
snow chains.
!
Use of snow chains is not permissible
with tire sizes:
앫
255/35 ZR19 (96Y) XL
앫
295/30 ZR19 (100Y) XL
앫
295/35 ZR18 (99Y)
Operation
Maintenance
왔 Maintenance
In order to maintain the performance and
safety of your SLR, we strongly recommend that you have your vehicle serviced
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center,
every 12 months, even if the vehicle has
covered less than 10000 miles
(15000 km) in that time.
The maintenance service indicator will
notify you when your next maintenance
service is due within the next 12 months or
10000 miles (15000 km), whichever
comes sooner.
Failure to have the vehicle maintained in
accordance with the Maintenance Booklet
and maintenance service indicator at the
designated times/mileage will result in
vehicle damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Before your next maintenance service is
due, one of the following messages will appear in the right multifunction display while
you are driving or when you switch on the
ignition:
Clearing the maintenance service
indicator
Service in.. days
Service in.. miles
Depending on production date, one of the
following messages appears in the multifunction display when the maintenance
service is due:
Carry out Service
1 Reset button
or
The service display is automatically
cleared after 30 seconds. You can also
clear it yourself.
Service Due now.
왘
Press reset button 1.
287
Operation
Maintenance
Maintenance service term exceeded
Calling up the service due date
If you have exceeded the suggested service term, you will see the following message in the right multifunction display:
왘
Service exceeded by .. days
Service exceeded by .. miles
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
reset the maintenance service indicator
following a completed maintenance
service.
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
The standard display of the control
system appears (컄 page 117).
왘
Press button k or j on the
multifunction steering wheel until the
maintenance service indicator service
symbol 9 appears in the left multifunction display and the service deadline appears in the right multifunction
display.
i
If the vehicle is not be used for a longer
period of time, do not disconnect the
consumer battery. Instead, maintain
the condition of the battery by using
the battery charger approved by
Mercedes-Benz for use on the SLR and
supplied with the car (컄 page 365).
This charger automatically controls the
charge rate, and can be left connected
to the car for long periods without damage to the battery.
If the battery supplying the vehicle’s
electrical consumers is disconnected,
the days of disconnection will not be included in the count shown by the service indicator. To arrive at the true
service deadline, you will need to subtract these days from the days shown
in the service indicator.
Do not confuse the maintenance
service indicator with the engine oil
level indicator :.
288
Operation
Maintenance
Resetting the maintenance service
indicator
In the event that the maintenance service
on your vehicle is not carried out by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, you can
have the maintenance service indicator
reset. The automotive maintenance facility
carrying out the maintenance service will
find the information for resetting the
maintenance service indicator in the
maintenance-relevant information for your
vehicle. Such information is available from
either your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or directly from Mercedes-Benz.
i
If the maintenance service indicator
was inadvertently reset, have an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
correct it.
Only reset if the proper maintenance
service has been performed. Resetting
the system without performing the
proper service as called for by the
maintenance service indicator will
result in engine damage and/or other
vehicle damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
289
Operation
Vehicle care
Cleaning and care of the vehicle
Warning!
G
Many cleaning products can be hazardous.
Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
Always follow the instructions on the particular container. Always open your vehicle’s
doors or windows when cleaning the inside.
Never use fluids or solvents that are not
designed for cleaning your vehicle.
If you have any questions about proper
care of your SLR, please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
use Mercedes-Benz care products.
These have been specially developed
to suit Mercedes-Benz vehicles and are
state of the art. Mercedes-Benz care
products are available from any
Mercedes-Benz Center.
290
Depending on body color the characteristic carbon structure of the body surface
may become visible due to high ambient
temperatures and humidity. This phenomenon is related to the technology and concept of the vehicle’s body.
While in operation, even while parked, your
vehicle is subjected to varying external
influences which, if gone unchecked, can
attack the paintwork as well as the underbody and cause lasting damage.
Such damage is caused not only by
extreme and varying climatic conditions,
but also by:
앫
Coolant
앫
Brake fluid
앫
Bird droppings
앫
Insects
앫
Tree resins, etc.
Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminates the aggressiveness and potency of
the above adverse influences.
More frequent washings are necessary to
deal with unfavorable conditions:
앫
near the ocean
앫
in industrial areas (smoke, exhaust
emissions)
during winter operation
앫
Air pollution
앫
Road salt
앫
앫
Tar
앫
Gravel and stone chipping
You should check your vehicle from time to
time for stone chipping or other damage.
Any damage should be repaired as soon as
possible to prevent corrosion.
To avoid paint damage, you should
immediately remove:
앫
Grease and oil
앫
Fuel
Operation
Vehicle care
Vehicle washing
!
When washing the vehicle, fine and rigid particles in sponges or brushes
could scratch or otherwise damage the
paint. This applies to both, hand-wash
or automatic car wash. Mercedes-Benz
recommends you to have your vehicle
cleaned at an automatic car wash from
the start, preferably one without brushes, or to use plenty of water when
hand-washing your vehicle.
To wash the car, use:
앫
a car shampoo, which is recommended
by Mercedes-Benz
앫
a soft sponge or a washing brush
앫
plenty of water
왘
Spray the car down thoroughly using
plenty of water.
왘
Wash out the sponge and chamois frequently.
왘
Rinse off with clean water.
왘
Dry the car well with a chamois.
Power washer
!
Do not use power washer to clean your
vehicle or the engine.
Do not wash the car in direct sunlight
and when the body surface is hot.
In the winter, remove salt residue
quickly and thoroughly.
291
Operation
Vehicle care
Wiper blades
!
The hood must be opened
(컄 page 241) before folding the wiper
arm away from the windshield. You
could otherwise damage the hood
and/or the wiper arms.
!
Never open or close the hood when the
wiper arms are folded away from the
windshield. You could otherwise damage the hood and/or the wiper arm.
Warning!
G
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and
remove SmartKey from starter switch
before cleaning the wiper blades. Otherwise
the wiper motor could suddenly turn on and
cause injury.
292
왘
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
왘
Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield (컄 page 357).
Window cleaning
!
You must feel the wiper arm engage in
position. You can now clean the wiper
blade.
The hood must be opened
(컄 page 241) before folding the wiper
arm away from the windshield. You
could otherwise damage the hood
and/or the wiper arms.
왘
Clean the wiper blade insert with a
clean cloth and detergent solution.
!
왘
After cleaning the wiper blade, fold the
windshield wipers back again before
turning the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
Never open or close the hood when the
wiper arms are folded away from the
windshield. You could otherwise damage the hood and/or the wiper arm.
!
Fold the windshield wiper arms back
onto the windshield before turning the
SmartKey in the starter switch.
Hold on to the wiper when folding the
wiper arm back. If released, the force
of the impact from the tensioning
spring could crack the windshield.
Warning!
G
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and
remove SmartKey from starter switch
before cleaning the windshield. Otherwise
the wiper motor could suddenly turn on and
cause injury.
Operation
Vehicle care
왘
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
왘
Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield (컄 page 357).
You must feel the wiper arm engage in
position. You can now clean the windshield.
왘
Use a window cleaning solution on all
glass surfaces.
An automotive glass cleaner is recommended.
왘
After cleaning the windshield, fold the
windshield wipers back again before
turning the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
!
Cleaning the headlamps
Fold the windshield wiper arms back
onto the windshield before turning the
SmartKey in the starter switch.
왘
Hold on to the wiper when folding the
wiper arm back. If released, the force
of the impact from the tensioning
spring could crack the windshield.
Wipe the headlamp lens with a damp
sponge.
!
Use only windshield washer fluid suitable for plastic lamp lenses. Unsuitable
windshield washer fluid may cause
damage to the plastic lenses of the
headlamps.
Do not use
앫
a dry cloth
앫
abrasive products
앫
solvents
앫
cleaning agents containing solvents
You could otherwise scratch or damage
the lens surface.
293
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Where will I find ...?
Locking/unlocking in an emergency
Replacing SmartKey batteries
Replacing bulbs
Replacing the wiper blades
Flat tire
Batteries
Towing the vehicle
Fuses
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Lamps in instrument cluster
Problem
v
General information:
If any of the following lamps in the instrument cluster fails to come on during the
Possible cause
The yellow ABS/ESP warning The ESP is deactivated.
lamp comes on while driving.
Risk of accident!
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather conditions.
bulb self-check when switching on the ignition, have the respective bulb checked and
replaced if necessary.
Suggested solutions
왘
Switch the ESP back on (컄 page 83).
If the ESP cannot be switched back on, have the
system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases
the risk of an accident.
v
The yellow ABS/ESP warning The ESP, ABS, or traction control has
왘 When driving off, apply as little throttle as
lamp flashes while driving.
come into operation because of detected
possible.
traction loss in at least one tire.
왘 While driving, ease up on the accelerator.
왘
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather conditions.
왘
Do not deactivate ESP. Exceptions:
(컄 page 83).
Failure to follow these instructions increases
the risk of an accident.
296
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Problem
-
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
The yellow ABS indicator
The ABS has detected a malfunction and 왘 Continue driving with added caution. Wheels
lamp comes on while driving. has switched off. The BAS and the ESP are
may lock during hard braking, reducing
also switched off (see messages in dissteering capability.
play).
왘 Read and observe messages in the display
The SBC brake system is still functioning
(컄 page 305).
normally but without ABS available.
왘 Have the system checked at an authorized
If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
the automatic transmission may also be
Failure to follow these instructions increases
malfunctioning.
the risk of an accident.
The charging voltage has fallen below
10 volts and the ABS was switched off.
When the voltage is above this value again, the
ABS is operational again.
왘
If necessary, have the generator and battery
checked.
297
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Problem
3
;
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
You are driving with the parking brake on. 왘 Release the parking brake (컄 page 50).
(Canada only)
(USA only)
The red brake warning lamp
comes on while driving and
you hear a warning sound.
3
;
(Canada only)
(USA only)
There is a malfunction in the SBC brake
system.
왘
Read and observe messages in the display
(컄 page 305).
There is insufficient brake fluid in the
reservoir.
왘
Risk of accident! Carefully stop the vehicle
and notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. Do not add brake fluid! This will not
solve the problem.
The red brake warning lamp
comes on while driving.
Warning!
G
Driving with the brake warning lamp illuminated can result in an accident. Have your
brake system checked immediately if the
brake warning lamp stays on. Do not add
brake fluid before checking the brake system.
298
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You
can be seriously burned.
!
If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
minimum mark or below, have the
brake system checked for brake pad
thickness and leaks.
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Problem
ú
±
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
(USA only)
There is a malfunction in:
왘
(Canada only)
앫
Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
An on-board diagnostic connector is used by
the service station to link the vehicle to the
shop diagnostics system. It allows the accurate identification of system malfunctions
through the readout of diagnostic trouble
codes. It is located in the front left area of
the footwell next to the parking brake.
왘
After refuelling, start, turn off and restart the
engine three or four times in succession.
The fuel injection system
The yellow engine malfunc- 앫 The ignition system
tion indicator lamp comes on
앫 The emission control system
while driving.
앫 Systems which effect emissions
Such malfunctions may result in excessive
emissions values and may switch the engine to its limp-home (emergency operation) mode.
Your gas tank is empty.
The limp-home mode is canceled. You do not
need to have your vehicle checked.
The fuel cap is not closed tightly.
왘
Check the fuel cap.
299
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Problem
D
D
Possible cause
The red coolant warning lamp
comes on when the engine is
running.
G
Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids which may have
leaked into the engine compartment to
300
There is insufficient coolant in the reservoir. 왘 Immediately add coolant to prevent
engine from overheating
(컄 page 247).
If this warning lamp comes on frequently,
there is a leak in the cooling system.
왘
Have the cooling system checked by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If the coolant level is correct, the electric
radiator fan may be broken.
왘
If the coolant temperature is below
248°F (120°C), you can continue
driving to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Avoid high engine loads (e.g. driving
uphill) and stop-and-go driving.
왘
Stop as soon as possible and allow
the engine and coolant to cool down.
The red coolant warning lamp
The coolant temperature has exceeded
comes on while driving and you 248°F (120°C).
hear a warning sound.
Warning!
Suggested solution
catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns and can occur just by opening
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine
if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Problem
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
<
The red Airbrake warning
The Airbrake or the central locking system 왘 Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
lamp comes on while driving is malfunctioning.
immeditaly.
and you hear a warning
sound.
>
The red gearshift indicator
You are driving with the manual shift pro- 왘 Shift to the next higher gear. Otherwise the
lamp comes on while you are gram. The engine is in the overrevving
fuel supply will be interrupted to prevent the
driving.
range.
engine from overrevving.
A
The yellow reserve fuel warn- The fuel level has fallen into the reserve
ing lamp lights up while you range.
are driving.
왘
Refuel at the nearest gas station
(컄 page 238).
=
The engine oil temperature
symbol comes on in the
tachometer while you are
driving.
왘
Warm up the engine and do not drive at full
power until the operating temperature has
been reached.
The engine oil has not yet reached its
operating temperature.
The symbol will go out as soon as the engine
oil has reached its operating temperature.
301
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Problem
Possible cause
Suggested solution
<
The red seat belt telltale comes The telltale reminds you and your passenger 왘 Fasten your seat belt.
on briefly after starting the
to fasten your seat belts.
The telltale goes out.
engine.
1
The red SRS indicator lamp
comes on while driving.
Warning!
G
In the event that a malfunction of the SRS is
indicated as outlined above, the SRS may
not be operational. For your safety, we
strongly recommend that you visit an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the system checked, otherwise
the SRS may not be activated when needed
in an accident, which could result in serious
or fatal injury, or it might deploy
unexpectedly and unnecessarily which
could also result in an accident and/or
injury to you or to others.
302
There is a malfunction in the restraint systems. The airbags or emergency tensioning
device (ETD) could deploy unexpectedly or
fail to activate in an accident.
왘
Drive with added caution to the
nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Problem
H
Possible cause
Suggested solution
The yellow warning lamp for the The tire pressure monitoring system detects 왘 Bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
tire pressure monitoring system a loss of pressure in at least one tire.
abrupt steering and braking maneucomes on.
vers. Observe the traffic situation
around you.
왘
Take note of the messages in the multifunction display.
The warning lamp goes out once the tire
inflation pressure monitor has been reactivated after the tire inflation pressure
has been corrected.
Warning!
G
When the tire pressure monitoring system
warning light is lit, one or more of your tires
is significantly under-inflated. You should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure
as indicated on the vehicle’s tire information
placard. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Each tire,
including the spare, should be checked
monthly when cold and set to the recommended inflation pressure as specified in
the vehicle placard and owner’s manual.
i
The recommended tire inflation pressures for your vehicle can be found on
the tire placard on the driver’s door
B-pillar, not in the owner’s manual.
303
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Lamp in center console
Problem
Possible cause
Suggested solution
TM1
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
A BabySmart child seat is installed on the
The front passenger front airbag front passenger seat. Therefore the passenger front airbag is switched off.
off indicator lamp comes on.
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
The system is malfunctioning when there is
no BabySmartTM child seat installed on the
front passenger seat.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
The system is malfunctioning.
왘
Make sure there is nothing between
seat cushion and child seat.
왘
Check installation of the child seat.
The front passenger front airbag
off indicator lamp does not come
on with a BabySmartTM child
seat properly installed on the
front passenger seat.
If the indicator lamp remains out:
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
Do not use the BabySmartTM restraint to
transport children on the front passenger
seat until the system has been repaired.
1
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp.
304
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Vehicle status messages in the
multifunction display
Warning and malfunction messages
appear in the multifunction display located
in the instrument cluster.
Certain warning and malfunction messages are accompanied by an audible signal.
Address these messages accordingly and
follow the additional instructions given in
this Operator’s Manual.
Selecting the vehicle status message
memory menu in the control system
(컄 page 124) displays both cleared and
uncleared messages.
High-priority messages appear in the
multifunction display in red color.
Certain messages of high priority cannot
be cleared from the multifunction display
using the reset button (컄 page 29).
Other messages of high priority and
messages of less immediate priority can
be cleared from the multifunction display
using the reset button. They are then
stored in the vehicle status message memory (컄 page 124). Remember that clearing
a message will only make the message disappear. Clearing a message will not correct the condition that caused the
message to appear.
Warning!
G
All categories of messages contain
important information which should be
taken note of and, where a malfunction is
indicated, addressed as soon as possible at
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!
G
No messages will be displayed if either the
instrument cluster or the multifunction
display is inoperative.
Contact your nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
i
Switching on the ignition causes all instrument cluster lamps (except high
beam headlamp indicator lamp and
turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) as well as the multifunction display to come on. Make sure the lamps
and multifunction display are in working order before starting your journey.
Failure to repair condition noted may cause
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty, or result in property
damage or personal injury.
305
Practical hints
What to do if ...
On the pages that follow, you will find a
compilation of the most important warning
and malfunction messages that may
appear in the multifunction display. High
priority messages appear in red color.
For your convenience the messages are divided into two sections:
앫
Text messages (컄 page 307)
앫
Symbol messages (컄 page 312)
306
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Text messages
Left display
Right display
Possible cause
Possible solution
ABS
Malfunction
Visit
workshop
The ABS has detected a malfunction 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
and has switched off. The ESP and
Wheels may lock during hard braking, rethe BAS are also deactivated.
ducing steering capability.
The SBC brake system is still func- 왘 Have the system checked at an authorized
tioning normally but without the ABS
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
available.
Failure to follow these instructions increases
the risk of an accident.
Display malfunction The ABS or the ABS display is malVisit
functioning.
workshop
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
Wheels may lock during hard braking, reducing steering capability.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
Failure to follow these instructions increases
the risk of an accident.
307
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause
Possible solution
ESP
Malfunction
Visit
workshop
The ESP has detected a malfunction 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
and switched off. The SBC brake sys왘 Have the system checked at an authorized
tem is still functioning normally. The
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
ABS may still be operational.
Failure to follow these instructions increases
the risk of an accident.
Unavailable
See Operator’s
Manual
The ESP is deactivated because the 왘 Synchronize the ESP. With the vehicle stapower supply has been interrupted.
tionary, turn the steering wheel completely
The SBC brake system is still functo the left and then to the right.
tioning normally.
Ensure that you can turn the steering wheel
to the stop without the wheels touching an
object (e.g. the road curb).
If the ESP message does not go out:
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
Failure to follow these instructions increases
the risk of an accident.
308
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause
ESP
Display malfunction The ESP or the ESP display is malVisit
functioning.
workshop
Possible solution
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
Failure to follow these instructions increases
the risk of an accident.
SLR
ACL malfunction
Visit
workshop
앫
The locking system is
malfunctioning.
앫
The transmission cooling system
is malfunctioning.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
309
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Tire pressure monitor messages (vehicles produced as of approximately October 2004)
Left display
Right display
Possible cause
Tire pres. monitor
reactivated
The tire pressure monitoring system is using
the current pressure values as the basis for
monitoring.
Tire pressure
displayed only
after driving
a few minutes
The tire inflation pressure is being checked.
Tire pres.
monitor
temporarily
unavailable
The tire inflation pressure monitor is unable 왘 Remove any extra wheel sensors
to monitor the tire inflation pressure due to
from the vehicle
앫
Possible solution
the presence of several wheel sensors in As soon as the causes of the malfunction have been removed, the tire presthe vehicle.
sure monitoring system automatically
앫 excessive wheel sensor temperatures.
becomes active again.
앫 a nearby radio interference source.
앫
i
For the comparable tire pressure monitor messages in vehicles produced
until approximately October 2004, refer to symbol messages (컄 page 343).
310
unrecognized wheel sensors mounted.
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause
Possible solution
Reactivate tire
pressure monitor
after rectifying
pressure
There was a tire inflation pressure warning 왘 Reactivate the tire pressure monitormessage.
ing system after correcting the tire
inflation pressure values
The yellow warning lamp for the tire pres(컄 page 267).
sure monitoring system comes on and you
have not reactivated the system since the
last tire inflation pressure warning message.
Tire pres.
Drive to workshop
monitor inoperative
Warning!
The tire inflation pressure monitor is malfunctioning.
왘
Have the tire inflation pressure
monitor checked by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
A wheel without proper sensor was
installed.
왘
Have the wheel checked.
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
311
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Symbol messages
Left display
Right display
Possible cause
Possible solution
G
Display malfunction
Visit
workshop
The displays for several sys왘 Continue driving with added caution.
tems have malfunctioned.
When the display is malfunctioning, warnings and malSome systems themselves may
function messages might not be displayed.
also have malfunctioned.
왘 Have the electronic systems checked by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an
accident.
L
312
Tele Aid
Drive to
workshop
One or more main functions of 왘 Have the Tele Aid system checked by an authorized
the Tele Aid system are malMercedes-Benz Center immediately.
functioning.
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause
Possible solution
#
Convenience functions
Temporarily
Unavailable
The consumer battery has in- The electrical consumers will come back online as soon as
sufficient voltage and can no on-board voltage is sufficient.
longer supply the convenience
functions.
or
Electric
consumers
offline!
Battery/
Alternator
Stop vehicle
The battery or the alternator is 왘 Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. Adjust drivmalfunctioning.
ing to be consistent with reduced braking responsiveness.
The SBC brake system requires
electrical energy and therefore 왘 Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediatehas only limited operation.
ly.
Considerably greater brake
왘 Observe the additional messages in the instrument cluspedal force is required and the
ter.
stopping distance is increased.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an
accident.
313
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause
Possible solution
#
Visit
workshop
The battery is no longer charg- 왘 Stop your vehicle safely immediately and check the
ing. Possible causes:
poly-V-belt.
앫
alternator malfunctioning
If it is broken:
앫
broken poly-V-belt
왘
Do not forget that the brake
system requires electrical energy and may be operating with
restricted capability. Considerably greater brake pedal force
is required and the stopping
distance is increased.
There is a malfunction in the
electronic system.
314
Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the engine will
overheat due to an inoperative water pump which
may result in damage to the engine. Notify an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If it is in order:
왘
Drive immediately to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced braking responsiveness.
왘
Observe the additional messages in the instrument
cluster.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause
Possible solution
T
Brake malfunction
Stop vehicle
The SBC brake system is in
왘 Do not drive any further.
emergency operation mode.
왘 Stop the vehicle and notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Considerably greater brake
Center immediately.
pedal force is required and the
stopping distance is increased. 왘 Significantly greater force must be applied to the brake
pedal.
The maximum speed is limited
왘 Call for Roadside Assistance.
to 55 mph (90 km/h).
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an
accident.
315
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
;
3
Right display
(USA only)
Reduced
brake effect
(Canada only)
Visit workshop
Increased
stopping distance
Visit workshop
Possible cause
Possible solution
The SBC brake system is 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
in emergency operation
왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immedimode. Considerable
ately. Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced
brake pedal force is rebraking responsiveness.
quired and the stopping
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of
distance is increased.
an accident.
or
Increased
braking distance
Visit workshop
Warning!
G
Driving while these messages are displayed
can result in an accident. Have your brake
system checked immediately.
If there is a malfunction in the SBC brake
system, we recommend that the vehicle be
transported with all wheels off the ground
using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly
equipment.
316
A tow bar must be used if circumstances do
not permit the use of the recommended
towing methods and the vehicle requires
towing with all four wheels on the ground.
Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on
the ground is only permissible for distances
up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to
exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). For more information, see “Towing the vehicle”
(컄 page 367).
If the SBC brake system enters its emergency operation mode, the driver must apply
significantly greater brake pedal pressure
and depress the pedal much further than
normal to obtain braking effect.
If necessary, apply full pressure to the brake
pedal. Stopping distance is increased!
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
;
3
Right display
(USA only)
Brake fluid
below min. level
(Canada only)
Visit
workshop
!
If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
minimum mark or below, have the
brake system checked for brake pad
thickness and leaks.
Possible cause
Possible solution
There is insufficient brake fluid 왘 Risk of accident! Stop the vehicle as soon as it
in the reservoir.
is safe to do so and notify an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the
problem.
Warning!
G
Driving with the message “Brake fluid below
min. level Visit workshop” displayed can result in an accident. Have your brake system
checked immediately. Do not add brake
fluid before checking the brake system.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You
can be seriously burned.
317
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
;
3
Right display
(USA only)
Reduced
brake effect
(Canada only)
Start engine
Increased
stopping distance
Start engine
or
Increased
braking distance
Start engine!
Warning!
G
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide, and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and lead to death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated.
318
Possible cause
Possible solution
The battery has insufficient
왘 Start the engine.
voltage and cannot supply suffiAs soon as the engine is running, the message
cient power to the SBC brake
disappears.
system.
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause
;
3
Brakes overheated
Drive carefully
The brake system is overheated 왘 Relieve the load on the brake system.
due to an excessive load on the
왘 Drive more smoothly and think ahead to avoid
brakes.
unnecessary braking.
(USA only)
(Canada only)
Possible solution
왘
When driving down steep grades, shift into a
lower gear to use the engine’s braking power
(컄 page 168).
왘
Cautiously continue driving so that the air
stream will cool down the brakes.
Release
parking brake
You are driving with the parking 왘 Release the parking brake (컄 page 50).
brake set.
Service brake
Visit
workshop
There are malfunctions, but the 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center imSBC brake system is operating
mediately.
normally.
319
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause
Possible solution
2
Brake wear
Visit
workshop
The brake pads have reached
their wear limit.
왘
Have the brake pads replaced immediately.
or
Brake lining wear!
Visit
workshop!
!
Brake pad thickness must be visually
checked by a qualified technician at the
intervals specified in the Maintenance
Booklet.
320
Warning!
G
Have brake pad replacement and other work
on the SBC brake system carried out by
qualified technicians only. Contact your
Mercedes-Benz Center for further information. The SBC brake system must be deactivated prior to working on the system. High
pressure is intermittently built up in the system as part of its automatic self-test. In addition, the system is automatically activated
when the vehicle is unlocked by remote control, when the driver or passenger door is
opened, when the SmartKey in the starter
switch is turned to position 1, when the
brake pedal is depressed or when the parking brake is released.
Failure to deactivate the system prior to
maintenance will cause brake pistons to extend and brake fluid to leak, which may result in injuries (contusions and acid burns),
see “SBC brake system” (컄 page 84).
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause
Possible solution
<
Seat belt system
Drive to
workshop
The seat belt system is malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
O
Close
hood
You are driving with the hood
open.
왘
Close the hood (컄 page 241).
Ê
Close
trunk lid
This message will appear when- 왘 Close the trunk lid (컄 page 102).
ever the trunk lid is open.
J
Door open
You are attempting to drive
with one or more doors open.
왘
Close the doors.
<
Airbrake malfunc
The Airbrake locking mechanism is malfunctioning.
왘
Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
immediately.
or
Airbrake malf.!
321
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause
Possible solution
B
Coolant
Check level
The coolant level is too low.
왘
Add coolant (컄 page 247).
왘
If you have to add coolant frequently, have the cooling
system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
immediately.
Warning!
G
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
may burn if it comes into contact with hot
engine parts. You can be seriously burned.
!
Do not ignore the low engine coolant
level warning. Extended driving with
the message and symbol displayed
may cause serious engine damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Do not drive without sufficient amount
of coolant in the cooling system. The
engine will overheat causing major
engine damage.
322
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause
Possible solution
Ï
Coolant
Stop, put engine
off
The coolant is too hot.
왘
Stop the vehicle and turn off the engine.
왘
Only start the engine again after the message disappears. You could otherwise damage the engine.
or
Coolant
Stop, engine off!
Warning!
G
Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids which may
have leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns and can occur just by opening
the hood. Stay away from the engine if you
see or hear steam coming from it.
During severe operating conditions and
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248°F (120°C).
!
The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature above 248°F
(120°C). Doing so may cause serious
engine damage which is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
323
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause
Possible solution
Ï
Coolant
Stop, put engine
off
The poly-V-belt could be
broken.
왘
or
Stop immediately and check the poly-V-belt.
If it is broken:
왘
Coolant
Stop, engine off!
Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result
in damage to the engine. Notify an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
If it is intact:
Coolant
Visit
workshop
324
왘
Do not continue to drive with this message displayed.
Doing so could result in serious engine damage that is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
왘
Observe the coolant temperature gauge in the instrument cluster (컄 page 29).
왘
Drive immediately to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
The cooling fan for the coolant 왘 Observe the coolant temperature gauge in the instruis malfunctioning.
ment cluster (컄 page 29).
왘
Have the fan replaced immediately.
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause
Possible solution
Ï
Differential
overheated
The differential oil is too hot.
왘
Stop your vehicle safely immediately.
왘
Do not drive any further.
왘
Wait until the instrument cluster display has cleared.
Otherwise you could damage the rear differential.
!
The differential warning should not be
ignored. Extended driving with the symbol displayed could result in serious
rear differential damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
325
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause
.
Low beam
Left
The left low beam lamp is mal- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
functioning.
possible.
Low beam
Right
The right low beam lamp is mal- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
functioning.
possible.
High beam
Left
The left high beam lamp is mal- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
functioning.
possible.
High beam
Right
The right high beam lamp is
malfunctioning.
326
Possible solution
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause
.
Turn signal
Rear left
Auxiliary
lamp on1
The left rear turn signal lamp is 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
malfunctioning. A backup bulb
possible.
has been brought into use.
Turn signal
Rear right
Auxiliary
lamp on1
The right rear turn signal lamp 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
is malfunctioning. A backup
possible.
bulb has been brought into use.
Turn signal
Front left
The left front turn signal lamp is 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
malfunctioning.
possible.
Turn signal
Front right
The right front turn signal lamp 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
is malfunctioning.
possible.
Left turn signal
Mirror
The left turn signal in the side
mirror is malfunctioning. This
message will only appear if all
light emitting diodes have
stopped working.
1
Possible solution
왘
Have the LEDs replaced as soon as possible.
Depending on production date, the message may read “Back-up lamp on” instead of “Auxiliary lamp on”.
327
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause
.
Marker lamp
Front left
The front left side marker lamp 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
is malfunctioning.
Marker lamp
Front right
The front right side marker
lamp is malfunctioning.
Marker lamp
Rear left
The rear left side marker lamp 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
is malfunctioning.
Marker lamp
Rear right
The rear right side marker lamp 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
is malfunctioning.
Right turn signal
Mirror
The right turn signal in the side 왘 Have the LEDs replaced as soon as possible.
mirror is malfunctioning. This
message will only appear if all
light emitting diodes have
stopped working.
328
Possible solution
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause
.
Brake lamp
Left
Auxiliary
lamp on1
The left brake lamp is malfunc- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
tioning. This message will only
possible.
appear if a critical number of
LEDs have blown.
Brake lamp
Right
Auxiliary
lamp on1
The right brake lamp is mal왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
functioning. This message will
possible.
only appear if a critical number
of LEDs have blown.
3rd brake lamp
The high mounted brake lamp
is malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Brake lamp illumination is delayed or lamp is permanently
on.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
or
Possible solution
3rd brake light
Brake lamp
Drive to
workshop
or
Brake light
Drive to
workshop!
1
Depending on production date, the message may read “Back-up lamp on” instead of “Auxiliary lamp on”.
329
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause
Possible solution
.
License plate
lamp, L
The left license plate lamp is
malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
License plate
lamp, R
The right license plate lamp is
malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Front foglamp
Left
The left front fog lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Front foglamp
Right
The right front fog lamp is mal- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
functioning.
possible.
Rear foglamp
Left
The left rear fog lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Reverse lamp
Right
The right backup lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Reverse lamp
Left
The left backup lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
330
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause
Possible solution
.
Tail lamp
Left
Auxiliary
lamp on1
The left tail lamp is malfunc왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
tioning. This message will only
possible.
appear if a critical number of
LEDs have blown.
Tail lamp
Right
Auxiliary
lamp on1
The right tail lamp is malfunc- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
tioning. This message will only
possible.
appear if a critical number of
LEDs have blown.
Parking lamp
Front left
The left front parking lamp is
malfunctioning.
Parking lamp
Front right
The right front parking lamp is 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
malfunctioning.
possible.
Light sensor
Drive to
workshop
The light sensor is malfunction- 왘 In the control system, set lamp operation to manual
ing. The headlamps switch on
(컄 page 131).
automatically.
왘 Switch on headlamps using the exterior lamp switch.
왘
왘
1
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
Depending on production date, the message may read “Back-up lamp on” instead of “Auxiliary lamp on”.
331
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause
±
Display malfunction
Visit
workshop
Certain electronic systems are 왘 Have the electronic systems checked by an authorized
unable to relay information to
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
the control system. The following systems may have failed:
Fuel system
malfunction
Visit
workshop
332
앫
Coolant temperature gauge
앫
Tachometer
앫
Cruise control display
The fuel cooling system is
malfunctioning.
Possible solution
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause
:
Engine oil pressure There is no oil in the engine.
Visit
workshop
Possible solution
왘
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
There is a danger of engine damage.
왘
Switch off the engine.
왘
Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
immediately.
!
The engine oil level warning should not
be ignored. Extended driving with the
symbol displayed could result in serious engine damage that is not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
333
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause
A
Reserve fuel
The fuel level has fallen into the 왘 Refuel at the next gas station (컄 page 238).
reserve range.
I
Remove
key
You have forgotten to remove
the SmartKey.
Replace
key
No additional code available for 왘 Have the SmartKey checked. Notify an authorized
the SmartKey.
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Washer fluid
Check level
The washer fluid level has
dropped to about 1/3 of total
reservoir capacity.
W
334
Possible solution
왘
왘
Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
Add washer fluid (컄 page 249).
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Tire pressure monitor messages (vehicles produced as of approximately October 2004)
Left display
Right display
Possible cause
H
Tire pressure
Please rectify
The tire inflation pressure is too 왘 Check and correct tire inflation pressure as required
low in one or more tires.
(컄 page 263).
Tire pressure
Caution
Tire defect
One or more tires is deflating.
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle.
Continued driving with a flat tire will cause
excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Warning!
Possible solution
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic
situation around you.
왘
Temporarily repair tire using TIREFIT (컄 page 358) or
contact Roadside Assistance. If tire cannot be temporarily repaired using TIREFIT, contact Roadside
Assistance.
왘
Have the damaged wheel repaired or replaced at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
G
Have worn or damaged tires replaced in
pairs (front pair or rear pair). Otherwise the
driving stability of the vehicle will be adversely affected.
335
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause
Possible solution
H
Tire pressure
Check tires
The tire inflation pressure in
one or more tires is already
below the minimum value.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic
situation around you.
The tire inflation pressure in
one or more tires is low.
왘
Check the tires. If no damage visible, check and correct
tire inflation pressure as required.
왘
Temporarily repair tire using TIREFIT (컄 page 358) or
contact Roadside Assistance. If tire cannot be temporarily repaired using TIREFIT, contact Roadside
Assistance.
왘
Have the damaged wheel repaired or replaced at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle.
Continued driving with a flat tire will cause
excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
336
Warning!
G
Have worn or damaged tires replaced in
pairs (front pair or rear pair). Otherwise the
driving stability of the vehicle will be adversely affected.
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause
Possible solution
H
Tire pressure, FL
Caution
Tire defect
The left front tire is deflating.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic
situation around you.
왘
Temporarily repair tire using TIREFIT (컄 page 358) or
contact Roadside Assistance. If tire cannot be temporarily repaired using TIREFIT, contact Roadside
Assistance.
왘
Have the damaged wheel repaired or replaced at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
왘
Check the tires. If no damage visible, check and correct
tire inflation pressure as required.
왘
If necessary, have the wheel repaired or replaced at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tire pressure, FL
Check
tires
Warning!
The left front tire inflation
pressure is low.
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle.
Continued driving with a flat tire will cause
excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Warning!
G
Have worn or damaged tires replaced in
pairs (front pair or rear pair). Otherwise the
driving stability of the vehicle will be adversely affected.
337
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause
H
Tire pressure, FR
Caution
Tire defect
The right front tire is deflating. 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic
situation around you.
Tire pressure, FR
Check
tires
Warning!
The right front tire inflation
pressure is low.
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle.
338
Possible solution
왘
Temporarily repair tire using TIREFIT (컄 page 358) or
contact Roadside Assistance. If tire cannot be temporarily repaired using TIREFIT, contact Roadside
Assistance.
왘
Have the damaged wheel repaired or replaced at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
왘
Check the tires. If no damage visible, check and correct
tire inflation pressure as required.
왘
If necessary, have the wheel repaired or replaced at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Continued driving with a flat tire will cause
excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Warning!
G
Have worn or damaged tires replaced in
pairs (front pair or rear pair). Otherwise the
driving stability of the vehicle will be adversely affected.
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause
Possible solution
H
Tire pressure, RL
Caution
Tire defect
The left rear tire is deflating.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic
situation around you.
왘
Temporarily repair tire using TIREFIT (컄 page 358) or
contact Roadside Assistance. If tire cannot be temporarily repaired using TIREFIT, contact Roadside
Assistance.
왘
Have the damaged wheel repaired or replaced at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
왘
Check the tires. If no damage visible, check and correct
tire inflation pressure as required.
왘
If necessary, have the wheel repaired or replaced at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tire pressure, RL
Check
tires
Warning!
The left rear tire inflation
pressure is low.
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle.
Continued driving with a flat tire will cause
excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Warning!
G
Have worn or damaged tires replaced in
pairs (front pair or rear pair). Otherwise the
driving stability of the vehicle will be adversely affected.
339
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause
Possible solution
H
Tire pressure, RR
Caution
Tire defect
The right rear tire is deflating.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic
situation around you.
왘
Temporarily repair tire using TIREFIT (컄 page 358) or
contact Roadside Assistance. If tire cannot be temporarily repaired using TIREFIT, contact Roadside
Assistance.
왘
Have the damaged wheel repaired or replaced at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
왘
Check the tires. If no damage visible, check and correct
tire inflation pressure as required.
왘
If necessary, have the wheel repaired or replaced at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tire pressure, RR
Check
tires
Warning!
The right rear tire inflation
pressure is low.
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle.
340
Continued driving with a flat tire will cause
excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Warning!
G
Have worn or damaged tires replaced in
pairs (front pair or rear pair). Otherwise the
driving stability of the vehicle will be adversely affected.
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Tire pressure monitor messages (vehicles produced up to approximately October 2004)
Left display
Right display
Possible cause
Possible solution
H
Tire pressure
Caution
tire defect!
The tire inflation pressure in
one or more tires is dropping.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic
situation around you.
왘
Temporarily repair tire using TIREFIT (컄 page 358) or
contact Roadside Assistance. If tire cannot be temporarily repaired using TIREFIT, contact Roadside Assistance.
왘
Have the damaged wheel repaired or replaced at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle.
Continued driving with a flat tire will cause
excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Warning!
G
Have worn or damaged tires replaced in
pairs (front pair or rear pair). Otherwise the
driving stability of the vehicle will be adversely affected.
341
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause
H
Tire pressure
Check
tires!
The tire inflation pressure in
왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
one or more tires is already besteering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic
low the minimum value.
situation around you.
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle.
Continued driving with a flat tire will cause
excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
342
Warning!
Possible solution
왘
Check the tires. If no damage visible, check and correct
tire inflation pressure as required.
왘
Temporarily repair tire using TIREFIT (컄 page 358) or
contact Roadside Assistance. If tire cannot be temporarily repaired using TIREFIT, contact Roadside Assistance.
왘
Have the damaged wheel repaired or replaced at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
G
Have worn or damaged tires replaced in
pairs (front pair or rear pair). Otherwise the
driving stability of the vehicle will be adversely affected.
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause
H
Reactivate
앫 A tire inflation pressure
tire press. monit.
warning message ap-
Possible solution
왘
Activate the tire inflation pressure monitor
(컄 page 266) or (컄 page 267).
peared.
앫
Tire pres.
monitor
currently
inactive
The tire inflation pressure in
one or more tires was increased by over 0.3 bar.
The tire inflation pressure mon- 왘 Remove any additional wheel sensors from the vehicle,
itor is temporarily unable to
e.g. when transporting a new set of tires.
monitor the tire inflation pres- As soon as the causes of the malfunction have been resure due to:
moved, the tire inflation pressure monitor automatically becomes active again.
앫 the presence of several
wheel sensors in the vehicle
앫
excessive wheel sensor
temperatures
앫
a nearby radio interference
source
앫
unrecognized wheel sensors mounted
343
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause
Possible solution
H
Tire pres.
monitor
Visit
workshop!
The tire inflation pressure mon- 왘 Have the tire inflation pressure monitor checked by an
itor is malfunctioning or one of
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
the wheel sensors is malfunctioning.
A wheel without proper sensor 왘 Have the wheels checked.
was installed.
344
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause
Possible solution
H
Tire pressure, RL
Caution
tire defect!
The left rear tire is rapidly deflating.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic
situation around you.
왘
Temporarily repair tire using TIREFIT (컄 page 358) or
contact Roadside Assistance. If tire cannot be temporarily repaired using TIREFIT, contact Roadside Assistance.
왘
Have the damaged wheel repaired or replaced at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tire pressure, RL
Check
tires!
The left rear tire inflation pres- 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
sure is low.
왘 Check the tires. If no damage visible, check and correct
tire inflation pressure as required.
왘
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle.
If necessary, have the wheel repaired or replaced at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Continued driving with a flat tire will cause
excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Warning!
G
Have worn or damaged tires replaced in
pairs (front pair or rear pair). Otherwise the
driving stability of the vehicle will be adversely affected.
345
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause
H
Tire pressure, RR
Caution
tire defect!
The right rear tire is rapidly de- 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
flating.
steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic
situation around you.
Tire pressure, RR
Check
tires!
Possible solution
왘
Temporarily repair tire using TIREFIT (컄 page 358) or
contact Roadside Assistance. If tire cannot be temporarily repaired using TIREFIT, contact Roadside Assistance.
왘
Have the damaged wheel repaired or replaced at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The right rear tire inflation pres- 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
sure is low.
왘 Check the tires. If no damage visible, check and correct
tire inflation pressure as required.
왘
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle.
346
If necessary, have the wheel repaired or replaced at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Continued driving with a flat tire will cause
excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Warning!
G
Have worn or damaged tires replaced in
pairs (front pair or rear pair). Otherwise the
driving stability of the vehicle will be adversely affected.
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause
H
Tire pressure, FL
Caution
tire defect!
The left front tire is rapidly de- 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
flating.
steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic
situation around you.
Tire pressure, FL
Check
tires!
Possible solution
왘
Temporarily repair tire using TIREFIT (컄 page 358) or
contact Roadside Assistance. If tire cannot be temporarily repaired using TIREFIT, contact Roadside Assistance.
왘
Have the damaged wheel repaired or replaced at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The left front tire inflation pres- 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
sure is low.
왘 Check the tires. If no damage visible, check and correct
tire inflation pressure as required.
왘
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle.
If necessary, have the wheel repaired or replaced at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Continued driving with a flat tire will cause
excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Warning!
G
Have worn or damaged tires replaced in
pairs (front pair or rear pair). Otherwise the
driving stability of the vehicle will be adversely affected.
347
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause
H
Tire pressure, FR
Caution
tire defect!
The right front tire is rapidly de- 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
flating.
steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic
situation around you.
Tire pressure, FR
Check
tires!
Warning!
The right front tire inflation
pressure is low.
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle.
348
Possible solution
왘
Temporarily repair tire using TIREFIT (컄 page 358) or
contact Roadside Assistance. If tire cannot be temporarily repaired using TIREFIT, contact Roadside Assistance.
왘
Have the damaged wheel repaired or replaced at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
왘
Check the tires. If no damage visible, check and correct
tire inflation pressure as required.
왘
If necessary, have the wheel repaired or replaced at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Continued driving with a flat tire will cause
excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Warning!
G
Have worn or damaged tires replaced in
pairs (front pair or rear pair). Otherwise the
driving stability of the vehicle will be adversely affected.
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
왔 Where will I find ...?
First aid kit
The first aid kit is located on the right-hand
side in the trunk.
TIREFIT kit, electric air pump, towing
eye bolt and vehicle literature portfolio
The TIREFIT kit, the electric air pump, the
vehicle literature portfolio and the towing
eye bolt are located on the right-hand side
underneath the floor in the trunk.
i
When your SLR is delivered, you will
find the vehicle literature portfolio in
the rear storage compartment
(컄 page 199). For permanent storage
in the vehicle, keep the vehicle literature portfolio in the storage compartment in the trunk.
!
Your vehicle is equipped with a front
towing eye bolt only.
You cannot tow other vehicles with
your vehicle.
1 First aid kit
2 Retaining strap
왘
Open the retaining strap 2.
왘
Remove the first aid kit 1.
i
1 Vehicle literature portfolio
2 TIREFIT kit, electrical air pump
3 Towing eye bolt
Check expiration dates and contents
for completeness at least once a year
and replace missing/expired items.
349
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
Compact guide (Canada only)
The compact guide is located in the rear
storage compartment.
1 Storage compartment
350
Practical hints
Locking/unlocking in an emergency
왔 Locking/unlocking in an emergency
Unlocking the vehicle
Unlocking the trunk
If you are unable to unlock the trunk with
the SmartKey, open the trunk with the
mechanical key.
i
Unlocking the trunk with the mechanical key will trigger the anti-theft alarm
system when the door is opened.
To cancel the alarm, insert the
SmartKey in the starter switch.
The handle is located above the rear
license plate recess.
1 Mechanical key locking tab
2 Mechanical key
왘
Press locking tab 1 in the direction of
arrow and, at the same time, remove
mechanical key 2 completely out of
the housing.
Trunk lid lock
3 Unlocking
왘
Insert the mechanical key in the trunk
lid lock.
왘
Perform the following two steps simultaneously:
왘
Turn the mechanical key
counterclockwise to the stop, to
position 3.
왘
Pull the trunk lid handle and lift the
trunk lid.
351
Practical hints
Locking/unlocking in an emergency
Unlocking the driver’s door
If you can no longer lock or unlock the
doors using the SmartKey, unlock the driver’s door using the emergency release
catch.
The emergency release catch is located on
the left side in the trunk.
왘
Unlock the trunk (컄 page 351).
왘
Pull emergency release catch 1.
The door is unlocked.
i
If it still is not possible to unlock the
door, pull more firmly on the emergency release catch.
i
Unlocking the driver’s door with the
emergency release catch will trigger
the anti-theft alarm system.
To cancel the alarm, insert the
SmartKey in the starter switch.
352
1 Emergency release catch
왘
Open the door in the normal way.
왘
Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Practical hints
Replacing SmartKey batteries
왔 Replacing SmartKey batteries
If the batteries in the SmartKey are discharged, the vehicle can no longer be
locked or unlocked. It is recommended to
have the batteries replaced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!
G
Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive
substances. Therefore keep the batteries
out of reach of children.
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
immediately.
353
Practical hints
Replacing SmartKey batteries
SmartKey
왘
Remove the mechanical key out of the
SmartKey (컄 page 351).
i
When inserting the batteries, make
sure they are clean and free of lint.
i
When replacing batteries, always replace both batteries. The required replacement batteries are available at
any Mercedes-Benz Center.
3 Battery
4 Contact spring
1 Mechanical key
2 Battery compartment
왘
Using a lint-free cloth, insert new
batteries 3 under the contact
spring 4 with the plus (+) side facing
up.
Insert mechanical key 1 in side
opening and push gray slide.
왘
Return battery compartment into housing until it locks into place.
The battery compartment is unlatched.
왘
Pull battery compartment 2 out of the
housing in direction of arrow.
Slide mechanical key 1 back into the
SmartKey.
왘
Check the operation of the SmartKey.
Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
CR 2025 or equivalent.
왘
왘
왘
354
Remove the discharged batteries.
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
왔 Replacing bulbs
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper
exterior lighting and signaling. It is therefore essential that all bulbs and lamp assemblies are in good working order at all
times.
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely
important. Have headlamps checked and
readjusted at regular intervals and when a
bulb has been replaced. See an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for headlamp adjustment.
i
!
If the headlamps are fogged up on the
inside as a result of high humidity, driving the vehicle a distance should clear
up the fogging.
You must not change the bulbs or LEDs
yourself, as you could damage the vehicle lighting systems.
Have blown bulbs or LEDs replaced by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i
Substitute bulbs will be brought into
use when lamps malfunction. Observe
the messages in the multifunction display (컄 page 326).
i
If one of the following bulbs blows, another bulb will adopt its function:
앫
Rear turn signals
앫
Brake lamps
앫
Side lamps
앫
Tail lamps
355
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Front lamps
Lamp
356
Rear lamps
Type
Lamp
Type
1 Additional turn signals LEDs
8 Brake/parking lamp
LEDs
2 Turn signals
PY, 21 W
9 Turn signal lamp
LEDs
3 Side marker lamp
WY 5 W
a Side marker lamp
P 21 W
4 Parking lamps
W5W
LEDs
5 Low and high beam
lamp
D2S, 35 W
b High mounted brake
lamp
c License plate lamp
C5W
6 High beam flasher
H7, 55 W
d Rear fog lamp
P 21 W
7 Front fog lamps
H3, 55 W
e Back up lamp
P 21 W
f Reflector
-
Practical hints
Replacing the wiper blades
왔 Replacing the wiper blades
!
Removing wiper blades
Warning!
Hold on to the wiper when folding the
wiper arm back. If released, the force
of the impact from the tensioning
spring could crack the windshield.
G
For safety reasons, remove SmartKey from
starter switch before replacing a wiper
blade. Otherwise the motor could suddenly
turn on and cause injury.
!
The hood must be opened
(컄 page 241) before folding the wiper
arms away from the windshield. You
could otherwise damage the hood
and/or the wiper arm.
Do not allow the wiper arms to contact
the windshield glass without a wiper
blade inserted.
왘
Slide the wiper blade out in direction of
arrow.
Installing wiper blades
왘
Position the wiper blade at 90° to the
wiper arm.
왘
Remove the SmartKey from starter
switch.
왘
Slide the wiper blade onto the wiper
arm.
왘
Fold the wiper arm forward.
왘
You must feel the wiper arm engage in
position.
Fold the wiper blade parallel to the
wiper arm.
왘
Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on
the windshield. Make sure you hold on
to the wiper when folding the wiper arm
back.
왘
Set the wiper blade at 90° to the wiper
arm.
Make sure the wiper blades is properly
installed. Improperly installed wiper
blades may cause windshield damage.
For your convenience, we recommend
that you have this work carried out by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
357
Practical hints
Flat tire
The vehicle is equipped with the TIREFIT
kit.
왘
Warning!
i
!
A wheel change should only be carried
out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. Otherwise there is a danger of
damaging the vehicle by jacking it up
incorrectly.
Open the driver’s door.
Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.
왘
Have any passenger exit the vehicle at
a safe distance from the roadway.
Sealing tires with TIREFIT kit
Park the vehicle as far as possible from
moving traffic on a hard surface.
왘
Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
왘
Turn the steering wheel so that the
front wheels are in a straight ahead position.
왘
Set the parking brake.
왘
Move the gear selector lever to P.
왘
Turn off the engine (컄 page 59).
왘
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
358
Warning!
TIREFIT is a limited repair device. TIREFIT
cannot be used for cuts or punctures larger
than approximately 0.16 in (4 mm) and tire
damage caused by driving with extremely
low tire inflation pressure, or on a flat tire, or
a damaged wheel.
Do not drive the vehicle under such circumstances.
Preparing the vehicle
왘
G
G
Keep TIREFIT away from sparks, open flame
or heat source.
Contact your nearest Mercedes-Benz
Center for assistance or call Roadside
Assistance.
!
Do not smoke.
Small tire punctures, particularly those in
the tread, can be sealed with TIREFIT.
TIREFIT can be used in ambient temperatures down to -4°F (-20°C).
After using TIREFIT, the tire inflation
pressure sensor may have to be replaced.
왘
Foreign objects (e.g. screws or nails)
should not be removed from the tire.
왘
Take TIREFIT, the sticker, and the electric air pump out of the trunk.
Practical hints
Flat tire
왘
Attach the sticker where it will be easily
seen by the driver on the instrument
cluster.
Warning!
G
Take care not to allow the contents of
TIREFIT to come in contact with hair, eyes or
clothing. TIREFIT is harmful if inhaled, swallowed or absorbed through the skin - causes
skin, eye and respiratory irritation.
Any contact with eyes or skin should be
flushed immediately with plenty of water.
If clothing comes in contact with TIREFIT,
change clothing as soon as possible.
In case of allergic reaction or rash, consult a
physician immediately.
Warning!
G
Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children.
If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with
plenty of water and drink plenty of water.
Do not induce vomiting!
Consult a physician immediately.
Keep away from open flame or heat source.
i
If sealant has leaked out, let it dry. You
can then peel it off.
1 TIREFIT container
2 Flap
3 Notch
4 Electrical plug
5 Air hose
6 Flange
왘
Open flap 2 on the electric air pump.
왘
Pull plug 4 and air hose 5 out of the
pump housing.
왘
Screw the air pump’s air hose 5 onto
flange 6 of the TIREFIT container.
왘
Stick TIREFIT container 1 upside
down into notch 3 of the electric air
pump.
컄컄
359
Practical hints
Flat tire
컄컄
7 Tire valve
8 Electric air pump switch
9 Air hose with pressure gauge and vent
screw
a Filler hose
Warning!
G
Observe safety instructions on air pump
label.
360
왘
Unscrew the valve cap from tire
valve 7.
왘
Screw filler hose a onto tire valve 7.
왘
Insert electrical plug 4 into vehicle
cigarette lighter socket.
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 1 (컄 page 40).
왘
Press I on electric air pump switch 8.
If this tire inflation pressure is not attained, turn off the electric air pump,
detach the filler hose from the tire
valve, and drive vehicle back and forth
very slowly approximately 30 ft (10 m).
The electric air pump should now
switch on and inflate the tire.
This serves to better distribute the
TIREFIT sealant material inside the tire.
!
Do not operate the electric air pump
longer than six minutes without interruption. Otherwise it may overheat.
You may operate the air pump again after it has cooled off.
After five minutes, the pressure gauge
must display at least 26 psi (1.8 bar). The
air hose can become hot during inflation.
Please exercise appropriate caution.
왘
왘
Unscrew the air pump’s air hose 5
from flange 6 of the TIREFIT
container.
왘
Screw air hose 5 onto tire valve 7.
왘
Inflate the tire again.
Practical hints
Flat tire
Warning!
G
If a tire inflation pressure of 26 psi (1.8 bar)
is not attained, tire is too severely damaged
for TIREFIT to provide a reliable tire repair.
왘
Store the electrical plug and the air
hose behind the flap and place the air
pump back in the trunk.
왘
Close the trunk lid.
왘
Drive away immediately.
In this case, TIREFIT cannot properly seal
the tire.
The TIREFIT sealant will distribute itself
evenly inside the tire.
왘
After attaining a tire inflation pressure
of 26 psi (1.8 bar), press 0 on electric
air pump switch 8.
The electric air pump should now be
switched off.
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the ignition to
position 0 (컄 page 40).
왘
Detach the electric air pump.
The air hose may still be hot. Please exercise appropriate caution.
Warning!
G
Do not exceed vehicle speed of
50 mph (80 km/h). A TIREFIT repair is not
designed to operate at higher speeds.
The sticker must be attached on the instrument cluster where it will be easily seen by
the driver.
Vehicle handling characteristics may
change. Adapt your driving accordingly.
왘
G
If tire inflation pressure has fallen below
20 psi (1.3 bar), do not continue to drive the
vehicle.
Do not drive the vehicle.
Contact the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center
or call Roadside Assistance.
Warning!
Park your vehicle safely away from the roadway and contact the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or Roadside
Assistance.
If tire inflation pressure is at least
20 psi (1.3 bar), inflate tire to correct pressure (see placards on driver’s door B-pillar
or on fuel filler flap), and drive vehicle to
nearest tire repair facility to have tire repaired or replaced.
Recommended duration of use:
300 miles (500 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h)
with the recommended tire inflation
pressure.
After driving vehicle for an initial
ten minutes, check tire inflation pressure using the pressure gauge on the
air pump.
361
컄컄
Practical hints
Flat tire
컄컄
Warning!
G
Have worn or damaged tires replaced in
pairs (front pair or rear pair). Otherwise the
driving stability of the vehicle will be adversely affected.
362
Warning!
G
Follow recommend tire inflation pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel economy,
and are more likely to fail from being overheated.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible to obtain a
new TIREFIT kit.
왘
Bring used TIREFIT materials to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
proper disposal.
Warning!
G
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
Do not exceed vehicle speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h). A TIREFIT repair is not designed
to operate at higher speeds.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit or vehicle capacity
weight as indicated on the placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout.
Vehicle handling characteristics may
change. Adapt your driving accordingly.
The sticker must be attached on the instrument cluster where it will be easily seen by
the driver.
왘
Replace your TIREFIT container every
four years. Replacement containers are
available at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Practical hints
Batteries
왔 Batteries
Your vehicle is equipped with two batteries:
Warning!
G
앫
The starter battery (located in the
trunk)
Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injury or death.
앫
The battery for electrical consumers
(located in the trunk)
Never lean over batteries while connecting,
you might get injured.
Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries
(컄 page 248).
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water and seek
medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking, etc.
!
You must not jump start the vehicle,
otherwise the vehicle electrical systems could be damaged.
Only use the battery charge unit tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz for
use on the SLR to charge the battery or
maintain the battery charge. Using other battery chargers may cause damage
to the vehicle and/or personal injury.
Information on charging the batteries
(컄 page 365).
Have the batteries checked regularly
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. Refer to Maintenance Booklet
for maintenance intervals or contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
further information.
If it is necessary to replace the batteries, notify an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
363
Practical hints
Batteries
Warning!
G
Warning!
G
Do not place metal objects on the battery as
this could result in a short circuit.
The brake system requires electrical power
to operate.
Use leak-proof batteries only to avoid the
risk of acid burns in the event of an
accident.
A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply
or electrical system may impair brake system operation and switch it into its emergency operation mode. The same applies if
battery is disconnected. To brake, the driver
must then apply significantly greater brake
pedal pressure and depress the pedal much
further to obtain the expected braking effect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the
brake pedal. Brakes are only applied to the
front wheels. Stopping distance is increased! Adjust your driving style accordingly. For more information, see “SBC brake
system” (컄 page 84).
364
Warning!
G
With a disconnected battery
앫
you will no longer be able to turn the
SmartKey in the starter switch
앫
the gear selector lever will remain
locked in position P
Practical hints
Batteries
Charging the batteries
Warning!
G
Never charge a battery while still installed in
the vehicle unless the battery charge unit
approved by Mercedes-Benz (supplied with
your vehicle) is being used. Gases may escape during charging and cause explosions
that may result in paint damage, corrosion
or personal injury.
A battery charge unit specially adapted for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is available, permitting the charging of the battery in its
installed position. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for information and
availability. Charge battery in accordance
with the separate operating instructions for
the battery charger.
You can obtain detailed information on
charging the battery from your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Charging with the battery charger
Using the charging point
Only use the battery charge unit approved
by Mercedes-Benz and supplied with your
vehicle. This charger is designed to automatically control the charge rate, and
charge the battery or maintain the existing
charge in the battery while the vehicle is
parked and not being driven for long periods of time (on average approximately
three weeks or more). Not driving the vehicle for such extended periods may cause
the charge in the vehicle battery to drop.
The charging point for the battery charger
is located next to the CD-changer on the
left-hand side in the trunk.
1 Charging point
왘
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
왘
Open the cover of the charging
point 1.
왘
Connect the battery charger with the
charging point 1.
컄컄
365
Practical hints
Batteries
컄컄 왘
왘
Observe and follow the separate operating instructions for the battery
charger.
Charge up the battery.
Using the charging terminals
The charging terminals for the battery
charger are located in the trunk underneath the interior floor.
The battery charger switches off automatically when the battery is sufficiently charged.
1 Negative charging terminal
2 Positive charging terminal
366
왘
Connect positive terminal 2 and negative terminal 1 with the battery
charger. Start with the positive
terminal 2.
왘
Charge up the battery. Observe and follow the separate operating instructions
for the battery charger.
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
왔 Towing the vehicle
Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehicle be transported with all wheels off the
ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel
lift/dolly equipment.
!
Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equipment with SmartKey in starter switch
turned to position 0.
Do not tow with sling-type equipment.
Towing with sling-type equipment over
bumpy roads will damage radiator and
supports.
To prevent damage during transport,
do not tie down vehicle by its chassis or
suspension parts.
Switch off the tow-away alarm and the
automatic central locking.
When circumstances do not permit the
recommended towing methods, the vehicle may be towed with all wheels on the
ground or front wheels raised only so far as
necessary to have the vehicle moved to a
safe location where the recommended
towing methods can be employed.
!
If the vehicle is towed with the front
axle raised, the engine must be shut off
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0
or 1). Otherwise the ESP will immediately be engaged and will apply the rear
wheel brakes.
!
To be certain to avoid a possibility of
damage to the transmission, however,
we recommend the drive shaft be disconnected at the rear axle drive flange
for any towing beyond a short tow to a
nearby garage.
When towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground, the gear selector lever
must be in position N and the
SmartKey must be in starter switch
position 2.
When towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground or the front axle raised,
the vehicle may be towed only for distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a
speed not to exceed 30 mph
(50 km/h).
367
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Warning!
G
If circumstances require towing the vehicle
with all wheels on the ground, always tow
with a tow bar if:
앫
the engine will not run
앫
there is a malfunction in the SBC brake
system
앫
there is a malfunction in the power supply or in the vehicle’s electrical system
as that will be necessary to adequately control the towed vehicle.
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on
the ground, make certain that the SmartKey
is in starter switch position 2.
If the SmartKey is left in starter switch
position 0 for an extended period of time, it
can no longer be turned in the switch. In this
case, the steering is locked. To unlock, remove SmartKey from starter switch and reinsert.
368
i
To signal turns while being towed with
the hazard warning flasher in use, turn
SmartKey in starter switch to
position 2 and activate the combination switch for the left or right turn signal in the usual manner – only the
selected turn signal will operate.
Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard warning flasher will operate again.
Warning!
G
The brake system requires electrical power
to operate.
A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply
or electrical system may impair brake system operation and switch it into its emergency operation mode. To brake, the driver
must then apply significantly greater brake
pedal pressure and depress the pedal much
further to obtain the expected braking effect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the
brake pedal. Brakes are only applied to the
front wheels. Stopping distance is increased! Adapt your driving style accordingly. For more information, see “SBC brake
system” (컄 page 84).
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
!
i
Towing of the vehicle should only be
done using the properly installed towing eye bolt. Never attach tow cable,
tow rope or tow rod to the vehicle chassis, frame or suspension parts.
The gear selector lever will remain
locked in position P and the SmartKey
will not turn in the starter switch if the
battery is disconnected or discharged.
See notes on the battery (컄 page 363).
i
Installing/reinstalling towing eye bolt
When towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground, please note the following:
With the automatic central locking activated and the SmartKey in starter
switch position 2 the vehicle doors
lock if the left front wheel as well as the
right rear wheel are turning at vehicle
speeds of approximately 9 mph
(15 km/h) or more.
To prevent the vehicle door locks from
locking, deactivate the automatic
central locking (컄 page 135).
!
Only secure the tow bar to the towing
eye bolt. The vehicle could otherwise
be damaged.
왘
Take the towing eye bolt 1 from its
storage compartment (컄 page 349).
1 Towing eye bolt
왘
Remove cover from the access hole.
왘
Screw towing eye bolt 1 in to its stop.
왘
Remove the towing eye bolt when you
no longer need it. To do this, carry out
the above steps in reverse order.
!
Your vehicle is equipped with a front
towing eye bolt only (컄 page 369).
You cannot tow other vehicles with
your vehicle.
369
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Points to bear in mind
Transporting the vehicle
앫
The vehicle must not be tow-started.
앫
If the vehicle is to be towed, only tow it
with all wheels on the ground.
The towing eye bolt can be used to pull the
vehicle onto a trailer or transporter for
transporting purposes.
앫
If the vehicle has suffered transmission
damage, only tow it with the propeller
shaft disconnected.
앫
Before towing the vehicle, make sure
the battery is connected and charged.
Otherwise you will not be able to switch
on the ignition and move the selector
lever to N. There will then be no power
assistance when steering and braking.
370
왘
Move the selector lever to N.
!
Due to the low clearance height of the
SLR, care must be taken when loading
and unloading from a transporter to
avoid damaging the vehicle body work.
To secure the vehicle, only tie it down
by the wheels or tires. Otherwise it
could be damaged.
Practical hints
Fuses
왔 Fuses
!
You must not change the fuses yourself, as you could damage the vehicle
electrical systems.
Have fuses changed at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
371
Technical data
Spare parts service
Warranty coverage
Identification labels
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Engine
Rims and tires
Electrical system
Main dimensions
Weights
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Technical data
Spare parts service
The “Technical data” section provides the
necessary technical data for your vehicle.
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers
maintain a stock of genuine
Mercedes-Benz parts required for maintenance and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts distribution centers
provide quick and reliable parts service.
More than 300 000 different spare parts
for Mercedes-Benz models are available.
Mercedes-Benz genuine parts are subjected to stringent quality inspections. Each
part has been specifically developed, manufactured or selected for and adapted to
Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Therefore, genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
should be installed.
374
!
The use of non-genuine Mercedes-Benz
parts and accessories not authorized
by Mercedes-Benz could damage the
vehicle, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or
could compromise the vehicle’s durability or safety.
Technical data
Warranty coverage
왔 Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of
the warranties printed in the Service and
Warranty Information booklet. Your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will exchange or repair any defective parts originally installed in the vehicle in accordance
with the terms of the following warranties:
앫
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
앫
Emission System Warranty
앫
Emission Performance Warranty
앫
California, Maine, Massachusetts and
Vermont1 Emission Control System
Warranty
1
At time of printing, the decision regarding compliance with Vermont certification regulations was
still pending. The vehicle may not be permitted to
be registered in Vermont. Check with an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details.
Replacement parts and accessories are
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Spare Parts
and Accessories warranties, copies of
which are available at any Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Loss of Service and Warranty
Information Booklet
Should you lose your Service and Warranty
Information booklet, have an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replacement. It will be mailed to you.
375
Technical data
Identification labels
Engine number
The engine number is engraved on the underside of the engine and can only be read
after removing the casing on the bottom of
the engine.
There is also a plate on the left-hand side
of the engine cover.
i
1 Vehicle certification label with Vehicle
Identification Number
2 Product option code plate with paint
number
3 Vehicle Identification Number
The vehicle certification plate with the Vehicle Identification Number and the vehicle
identification plate (certification plate)
with the paint number are located on the
A-pillar on the driver’s side.
The Vehicle Identification Number is located on the driver’s side in the bottom corner
of the windshield.
376
4 Vacuum line routing diagram label
5 Emission control information label,
includes both federal and California
certification exhaust emission
standards
When ordering parts, please specify
vehicle identification and engine numbers.
Technical data
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
왔 Layout of poly-V-belt drive
The SLR has two poly-V-belts (belt one
shown in purple/belt two shown in black).
1 Idler pulley
2 Automatic belt tensioner
3 Power steering pump
4 Air conditioning compressor
5 Idler pulley
6 Crankshaft
7 Coolant pump
8 Generator (alternator)
9 Idler pulley
a Automatic belt tensioner
b Supercharger
377
Technical data
Engine
Model
SLR (199.376)1
Engine
155
Mode of operation
4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders
8
Bore
3.82 in (97.00 mm)
Stroke
3.60 in (92.00 mm)
Total piston displacement
331.8 cu in (5439 cm3)
Compression ratio
8.8:1
Output acc. to SAE J 1349
617 hp/6500 rpm2
(460 kW/6500 rpm)
Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349
575 lb-ft/3250-5000 rpm
(780 Nm/3250-5000 rpm)
Maximum engine speed
7000 rpm
Firing order
1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Poly-V-belt
2425 mm/1244 mm
1
2
The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.
Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
378
Technical data
Rims and tires
왔 Rims and tires
Only use tires and rims which have been
specifically developed for your vehicle and
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Other tires and rims can have detrimental
effects, such as
앫
Poor handling characteristics
앫
Increased noise
앫
Increased fuel consumption
!
i
Moreover, tires and rims not approved
by Mercedes-Benz may, under load,
exhibit dimensional variations and different tire deformation characteristics
that could cause them to come into
contact with the vehicle body or axle
parts. This may result in damage to the
tires or the vehicle.
Further information on tires and rims is
available at any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. A placard with
the recommended tire inflation pressures is located on the driver’s door
B-pillar. Some vehicles may have supplemental tire pressure information for
driving at high speeds (컄 page 262) or
for vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition. If such
information is provided, it can be found
on the placard located on the inside of
the fuel filler flap. The tire pressure
should be checked regularly and
should only be adjusted on cold tires.
Follow tire manufacturer’s maintenance recommendation included with
vehicle.
379
Technical data
Rims and tires
Mixed size tires
Turbine-style
10-spoke-style*
5-spoke-style*
Rims (light alloy)
9J x 19
9J x 18
9J x 18
Wheel offset
1.83 in (46.5 mm)
1.77 in (45 mm)
1.77 in (45 mm)
255/35 ZR19 (96Y) XL
245/40 ZR18 (93Y)
245/40 ZR18 (93Y)
Rims (light alloy)
111/2 J x 19
111/2 J x 18
111/2 J x 18
Wheel offset
1.77 in (45 mm)
Front axle:
Summer tires (radial-ply tires)
1
Rear axle:
Summer tires (radial-ply tires)
1
Must not be used with snow chains.
!
Only use Michelin tires of the sizes and
types noted above. They are the only
tires approved for use on the SLR. Use
of tires not specially approved for the
SLR could result in unanticipated performance characteristics. For more information, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
380
295/30 ZR19 (100Y) XL
1.73 in (44 mm)
1
295/35 ZR18 (99Y)
1.73 in (44 mm)
1
295/35 ZR18 (99Y)1
Technical data
Rims and tires
Winter tires*
Front axle:
Rims (light alloy)
9J x 18
Wheel offset
1.77 in (45 mm)
Tires (radial-ply tires)
245/40 R18 97V XL M+S
Rear axle:
Rims (light alloy)
9J x 18
Wheel offset
1.77 in (45 mm)
Tires (radial-ply tires)
245/40 R18 97V XL M+S
!
Only use Michelin tires of the sizes and
types noted above. They are the only
tires approved for use on the SLR. Use
of tires not specially approved for the
SLR could result in unanticipated performance characteristics. For more information, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
381
Technical data
Electrical system
Generator (alternator)
14 V/150 A
Starter motor
12 V/1.7 kW
Battery
Starter battery
12 V/35 Ah
Battery for electrical consumers
12 V/70 Ah
Spark plugs
NGK ILFR6A
Electrode gap
0.031 in (0.8 mm)
Tightening torque
18 – 22 lb-ft (25 – 30 Nm)
382
Technical data
Main dimensions
왔 Main dimensions
Overall vehicle length
183.3 in (4656 mm)
Overall vehicle width
75.1 in (1908 mm)
Overall vehicle width (doors open - widest point) 111.7 in (2838 mm)
Overall vehicle height
49.6 in (1261 mm)
Overall vehicle height (doors open)
80.5 in (2045 mm)
Wheelbase
106.3 in (2700 mm)
Track, front
64.5 in (1638 mm)
Track, rear
61.8 in (1569 mm)
383
Technical data
Weights
Trunk load max. 220 lbs (100 kg)
384
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
왔 Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Capacities
Vehicle components and their respective
lubricants must match. Therefore use only
products tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Please refer to the Factory Approved
Service Products pamphlet, or inquire at
your Mercedes-Benz Center.
Capacity
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Engine with oil filter
9.5 US qt (9.0 l)
Approved engine oils
Automatic transmission
9.1 US qt (8.6 l)
MB Automatic Transmission Fluid
Rear axle
1.9 US qt (1.8 l)
Hypoid gear oil SAE 75 W 85
Power steering
approximately 1.15 US qt (1.1 l)
MB Power Steering Fluid (Pentosin CHF 11S)
Front wheel hubs
approximately 3.0 oz (85 g) each
High temperature roller bearing grease
Brake system
1.6 US qt (1.5 l)
MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4+)
Cooling system
approximately 10.6 US qt (10.0 l)
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
Low temperature cooling system
approximately 5.3 US qt (5.0 l)
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
Fuel tank
including a reserve of
25.6 US gal (97.0 l)
3.2 US gal (12.0 l)
Premium unleaded gasoline:
Minimum Posted Octane 91
(Avg. of 96 RON/86 MON)
Air conditioning system
R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant
oil (never R-12)
Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system 7.4 US qt (7 l)
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate1
1
Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water for temperatures above freezing or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing. Follow suggested mixing ratios (컄 page 390).
385
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Engine oils
Engine oils are specifically tested for their
suitability in our engines and durability for
our service intervals. Therefore, only use
approved engine oils and oil filters
required for vehicles with Maintenance
System. For a listing of approved engine
oils and oil filters, refer to the Factory
Approved Service Products pamphlet, or
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Using engine oils and oil filters of
specification other than those expressly
required for the Maintenance System, or
changing of oil and oil filter at change
intervals longer than those called for by
the Maintenance System will result in engine damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
386
Please follow Maintenance System recommendations for scheduled oil changes.
Failure to do so will result in engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Engine oil additives
Do not blend oil additives with engine oil.
They may damage the engine.
Damage or malfunctions resulting from
blending oil additives are not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Air conditioner refrigerant
R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG
lubricating oil are used in the air conditioner system.
Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based lubricating oil. Otherwise damage to the
system will occur.
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Brake fluid
During vehicle operation, the boiling point
of the brake fluid is continuously reduced
through the absorption of moisture from
the atmosphere. Under extremely strenuous operating conditions, this moisture
content can lead to the formation of bubbles in the system, thus reducing the system’s efficiency.
Premium unleaded gasoline
!
Only use premium unleaded fuel:
To maintain the engine’s durability and
performance, premium unleaded gasoline must be used. If premium unleaded
is not available and low octane fuel is
used, follow these precautions:
앫
앫
Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced every two years, preferably in the
spring.
Only brake fluid approved by
Mercedes-Benz is recommended. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will provide you with additional information.
Fuel requirements
have the fuel tank only partially
filled with unleaded regular and fill
up with premium unleaded as soon
as possible
앫
avoid full throttle driving and abrupt
acceleration
앫
do not exceed an engine speed of
3000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded
with a light load such as two persons and no luggage
앫
do not exceed 2/3 of maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in
mountainous terrain
The octane number (posted at the
pump) must be 91 min. It is an average
of both the Research (R) octane number and the Motor (M) octane number:
(R+M)/2). This is also known as the
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates
such as ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be
used provided the ratio of any one of these
oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed
10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%.
The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not
exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.
387
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is
not allowed. Gasohol, which contains
10% ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline,
can be used.
These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements, such as resistance to spark
knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.
Gasoline additives
A major concern among engine
manufacturers is carbon build-up caused
by gasoline. Mercedes-Benz recommends
only the use of quality gasoline containing
additives that prevent the build up of
carbon deposits.
After an extended period of using fuels
without such additives, carbon deposits
can build up especially on the intake valves
and in the combustion area, leading to
engine performance problems such as:
388
앫
Warm-up hesitation
앫
Unstable idle
앫
Knocking/pinging
앫
Misfire
앫
Power loss
In areas where carbon deposits may be
encountered due to lack of availability of
gasolines which contain these additives,
Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of
additives approved by us for use on
Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Refer to Factory
Approved Service Products pamphlet for a
listing of approved product(s). Follow
directions on product label.
Do not blend any specific fuel additives
with fuel. This only results in unnecessary
cost and may be harmful to engine
operation.
Damage or malfunction resulting from
poor fuel quality or from blending
additional fuel additives other than those
tested and approved by us for use on
Mercedes-Benz vehicles listed in the
Factory Approved Service Products
pamphlet are not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Coolants
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
and anticorrosion/antifreeze, which provides:
앫
corrosion protection
앫
freeze protection
앫
boiling protection (by increasing the
boiling point)
The cooling system was filled at the factory
with a coolant providing freeze protection
to approximately -22°F (-30°C) and corrosion protection.
If the antifreeze mixture is effective to
-22°F (-30°C), the boiling point of the coolant in the pressurized cooling system is
reached at approximately 266°F (130°C).
The coolant solution must be used year
round to provide the necessary corrosion
protection and increase in the boil-over
protection. Refer to Maintenance Booklet
for replacement interval.
Coolant system design and coolant used
determine the replacement interval. The
replacement interval published in the
Maintenance Booklet is only applicable if
MB 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze solution or other Mercedes-Benz approved
products of equal specification (see
Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet) are used to renew the coolant concentration or bring it back up to the proper
level.
If the coolant level is low, water and
MB 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze should
be used to bring it up to the proper level
(have cooling system checked for signs of
leakage). Please make sure the mixture is
in accordance with label instructions.
The water in the cooling system must meet
minimum requirements, which are usually
satisfied by normal drinking water. If you
are not sure about the water quality, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
To provide important corrosion protection,
the solution must be at least 45% anticorrosion/antifreeze (equivalent to freeze
protection to approximately
- 22°F [-30°C]). If you use a solution that is
more than 55% anticorrosion/antifreeze
(freeze protection to approximately
- 49°F [-45°C]), the engine temperature
will increase due to the lower heat transfer
capability of the solution. Therefore, do not
use more than this amount of anticorrosion/antifreeze.
389
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze
Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum parts. The use of aluminum components in motor vehicle engines
necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze
coolant used in such engines be specifically formulated to protect the aluminum
parts. (Failure to use such anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant will result in a significantly shortened service life.)
Therefore, the following product is strongly
recommended for use in your vehicle:
Mercedes-Benz 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze agent.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity
Approximately freeze protection
– 35°F (– 37°C)
– 49°F (– 45°C)
Main cooling system
5.2 US qt (5.0 l)
5.8 US qt (5.5 l)
Low temperature cooling system
2.6 US qt (2.5 l)
2.9 US qt (2.75 l)
390
Before the start of the winter season (or
once a year in hot southern regions), you
should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
concentration checked. The coolant is also
regularly checked each time you bring your
vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for service.
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Windshield and headlamp washer
system
Both the windshield and headlamp washer
systems are supplied from the windshield
washer fluid reservoir.
The windshield and headlamp washer fluid
reservoir has a capacity of approximately
7.4 US qt (7 l).
왘
Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate and water (or concentrate and commercially available
premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient
temperatures).
Warning!
G
Windshield and headlamp washer fluid
mixing ratio
For temperatures above “freezing point”,
use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate
“S” and water:
앫
1 part “S” to 100 parts water
(1.34 floz [40 ml] “S” to 1 gallon [4.0 l] water).
For temperatures below “freezing point”
use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate
“S” and commercially available premixed
windshield washer solvent/antifreeze:
앫
1 part “S” to 100 parts solvent
(1.34 floz [40 ml “S” to 1 gallon [4.0 l] solvent).
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze
on hot engine parts because it may ignite
and burn. You could be seriously burned.
391
Technical terms
Technical terms
ABS
(Anti-lock Braking System)
Prevents the wheels from locking up
during braking so that the vehicle can
continue to be steered.
Accessory weight
(컄 page 279)
ACL
(Airbrake/Central Locking)
Controls the locking mechanism of the
Airbrake and the central locking system.
Air pressure
(컄 page 279)
Aspect ratio
(컄 page 279)
BabySmartTM1 airbag deactivation
system
This system detects if a special system
compatible child restraint seat is installed on the front passenger seat. The
system will automatically deactivate
the passenger front airbag when such a
seat is properly installed (PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF warning lamp on the lower
center console illuminates and remains
illuminated).
TM
BabySmart compatible child seats
Special restraint system for children.
The sensor system for the passenger
seat prevents deployment of the passenger front airbag if a BabySmartTM
compatible child seat is installed. See
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for availability.
Bar
(컄 page 279)
1
BAS
(Brake Assist System)
System for potentially reducing braking
distances in emergency braking situations. The system is activated when it
senses an emergency based on how
fast the brake is applied.
Bead
(컄 page 279)
Bi-Xenon headlamps
Headlamps which use an electric arc as
the light source and produce a more intense light than filament headlamps.
Bi-Xenon headlamps produce low
beam and high beam.
CAC
(Customer Assistance Center)
Mercedes-Benz customer service center, which can help you with any questions about your vehicle and provide
assistance in the event of a breakdown.
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens
Automotive Corp.
393
Technical terms
CAN system
(Controller Area Network)
Data bus network serving to control vehicle functions such as door locking or
windshield wiping depending on vehicle settings and/or ambient conditions.
Cockpit
All instruments, switches, buttons and
indicator/warning lamps in the passenger compartment needed for vehicle
operation and monitoring.
Cold tire inflation pressure
(컄 page 279)
Control system
The control system is used to call up
vehicle information and to change
component settings. Information and
messages appear in the multifunction
display. The driver uses the buttons on
the multifunction steering wheel to
navigate through the system and to adjust settings.
394
Cruise control
Driving convenience system for automatically maintaining the vehicle speed
set by the driver.
ESP
(Electronic Stability Program)
Improves vehicle handling and directional stability.
Curb weight
(컄 page 279)
ETD
(Emergency Tensioning Device)
Device which deploys in certain frontal
and rear collisions exceeding the system's threshold to tighten the seat
belts.
->SRS
DOT
(Department of Transportation)
(컄 page 280)
Engine number
The number set by the manufacturer
and placed on the cylinder block to
uniquely identify each engine produced.
Engine oil viscosity
Measure of the internal oil friction (viscosity) at different temperatures. The
higher the temperature the oil can tolerate without thinning too much, or the
lower the temperature it can tolerate
without thickening too much, the better the viscosity characteristics of the
oil.
GAWR
(Gross Axle Weight Rating)
(컄 page 280)
Gear range
Number of gears which are available to
the automatic transmission for shifting.
The automatic gear shifting process
can be adapted to specific operating
conditions using the gear selector lever.
Technical terms
GPS
(Global Positioning System)
Satellite-based system for relaying
geographic location information to and
from vehicles equipped with special receivers. Employs CD digital maps for
navigation.
GVW
(Gross Vehicle Weight)
(컄 page 280)
GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
(컄 page 280)
Head-thorax airbag
Installed in the doors, these airbags
protect occupants during side impact
collisions exceeding a preset threshold. Unlike normal side airbags,
head-thorax airbags are also designed
to provide protection for the head area.
Instrument cluster
The displays and indicator/warning
lamps in the driver’s field of vision, including the tachometer, speedometer,
engine temperature and fuel gauge.
Kickdown
Depressing the accelerator past the
point of resistance shifts the transmission down to the lowest possible gear.
This very quickly accelerates the vehicle and should not be used for normal
acceleration needs.
Kilopascal (kPa)
(컄 page 280)
Maximum load rating
(컄 page 280)
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
(컄 page 280)
Maximum tire inflation pressure
(컄 page 280)
MON
(Motor Octane Number)
The Motor Octane Number for gasoline
as determined by a standardized
method. It is an indication of a gasoline's ability to resist undesired detonation (knocking). The average of both
the MON (Motor Octane Number) and
RON (Research Octane Number) is
posted at the pump, also known as
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Multifunction display
Two display fields in the instrument
cluster used to present information
provided by the control system.
Multifunction steering wheel
Steering wheel with buttons for operating the control system.
Normal occupant weight
(컄 page 280)
395
Technical terms
Overspeed range
Engine speeds within the red marking
on the tachometer dial. Avoid this engine speed range, as it may result in serious engine damage that is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Poly-V-belt drive
Drives engine-components (alternator,
AC compressor, etc.) from the engine.
Power train
Collective term designating all components used to generate and transmit
motive power to the drive axles, including
앫
engine
앫
clutch/torque converter
앫
transmission
앫
transfer case
앫
drive shaft
앫
differential
앫
axle shafts/axles
396
Production options weight
(컄 page 280)
Program mode selector switch
Used to switch the automatic transmission between sport operation (S), comfort operation (C) and manual
operation (MAN).
PSI
(Pounds per square inch)
(컄 page 281)
Recommended tire inflation pressure
(컄 page 281)
REST
(Residual Engine Heat Utilization)
Feature that uses the engine heat
stored in the coolant to heat the vehicle interior for a short time after the engine has been turned off.
Rim
(컄 page 281)
RON
(Research Octane Number)
The Research Octane Number for gasoline as determined by a standardized
method. It is an indication of a gasoline's ability to resist undesired detonation (knocking). The average of both
the MON (Motor Octane Number) and
RON (Research Octane Number) is
posted at the pump, also known as
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
SBC brake system
(Sensotronic Brake Control)
Electronically controlled hydraulic
braking system for increased braking
safety and comfort.
Shift lock
When the vehicle is parked, this lock
prevents the gear selector lever from
being inadvertently moved out of position P without SmartKey turned and
brake pedal depressed.
Technical terms
Sidewall
(컄 page 281)
SRS
(Supplemental Restraint System)
Seat belts, emergency tensioning device and airbags. Though independent
systems, they are closely interfaced to
provide effective occupant protection.
Tele Aid
(Telematic Alarm Identification on De-mand)
The Tele Aid system consists of three
types of response: automatic and manual emergency, roadside assistance
and information. Tele Aid is initially activated by completing a subscriber
agreement and placing an acquaintance call.
The Tele Aid system is operational provided that the vehicle’s battery is
charged, properly connected, not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is
available.
Tightening torque
Force times lever arm (e.g. a lug
wrench) with which threaded fasteners
such as wheel bolts are tightened.
TIN
(Tire Identification Number)
(컄 page 281)
Tire load rating
(컄 page 281)
Tire ply composition and material used
(컄 page 281)
Tire speed rating
(컄 page 281)
TIREFIT kit
Accessory for emergency and temporary tire repair. The TIREFIT kit consists
of a container with sealant material, a
filler hose and an air compressor.
Tread
(컄 page 281)
Treadwear indicators
(컄 page 281)
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
(컄 page 282)
Vehicle capacity weight
(컄 page 282)
Vehicle maximum load on the tire
(컄 page 282)
VIN
(Vehicle Identification Number)
The number set by the manufacturer
and placed on the body to uniquely
identify each vehicle produced.
Traction
(컄 page 281)
397
Index
Index
A
ABS 79, 393
Indicator lamp 29, 297
Messages in the multifunction
display 307
ABS/ESP
Warning lamp 29, 296
Accelerator position, automatic
transmission 171
Accessory weight 279
Accident
In case of 56
ACL 393
Messages in the multifunction
display 309
Activating
Air circulation mode 186
Air conditioning (cooling) 190
Anti-theft alarm system 91
Central locking (control system)
ESP 84
Exterior headlamps 52
Exterior lamps 106
135
Headlamps 52
High beams 109
Immobilizer 59, 90
Manual gearshift program 174
Rear window defroster 179
Residual heat 188
Tow-away alarm 92
Windshield wipers 54
Adding
Coolant 247
Engine oil 246
Additional turn signals (exterior
mirror) 356
Adjusting
Air distribution 185
Air volume 184
Mirrors 44
Seat angle 43
Seat fore and aft 43
Seat height 43
Seats 42
Steering column height 44
Steering column length 44
Steering wheel 43
Air conditioner refrigerant 386
Air conditioning (cooling)
Turning off 190
Turning on 190
Air pressure 279
Air pressure see Tire inflation pressure
Air recirculation mode 186
Air volume adjustment 184
Airbags 63
Children 64
Front 68
Head-thorax 68, 69
Knee 68
Passenger 68
Airbrake 31, 87
Automatic mode 89
Emergency braking 89
Manual mode 88
Message in the multifunction
display 321
Test Mode 88
Warning lamp 29, 301
399
Index
Alarm
Audible 78, 90
Canceling 91, 93
Visual 90
Anticorrosion/antifreeze 385, 390
Antiglare
Automatic 177
Anti-theft alarm system 90
Arming 91
Canceling alarm 91
Disarming 91
Anti-theft device
Dust cover 222
Anti-theft systems
Anti-theft alarm system 90
Tow-away alarm 92
Anti-theft wheel nuts 283
Fitting 284
Removing 284
Aquaplaning see Hydroplaning
Ashtray 200
Aspect ratio 279
400
AUDIO menu 122
Operating CD player 123
Selecting radio station 123
Audio system 31, 141
Audio and telephone, operation 141
Button and soft key operation 144
Cassette operation 150
CD operation 154
Location 141
Operating and display elements 142
Operating safety 141
Operation 144
Radio operation 147
Switching off 144
Switching on 144
Telephone operation 158
Auto-dimming for interior rear view
mirror 177
Automatic
Interior lighting control 111
Automatic car wash 291
Automatic central locking
Activating/deactivating (control
system) 135
Automatic climate control 31, 180
Adjusting air distribution 185
Adjusting air volume 183, 184
Air recirculation 186
Center air vents 31
Deactivating 189
Defrosting the windshield 186
MAXCOOL 185
Residual heat utilization 188
Side air vents 31
Temperature sensor 33
Automatic headlamp mode 106
Automatic transmission 165
Accelerator position 171
Emergency operation (Limp Home
Mode) 176
Fluid level 246
Gear ranges 168
Gear selector lever 165
Gear selector lever position 165, 169
Gear shifting malfunctions 176
Kickdown 171
Manual shifting 166
Index
One-touch gearshifting 166
Shift program mode selector
switch 171
Steering wheel gearshift control
Towing 370
Transmission fluid 246
Automatic transmission fluid 246
172
B
BabySmartTM
Self-test 75
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation
system 75, 393
BabySmartTM compatible child seats
Back up lamp 356
Bar 279
BAS 79, 81, 393
BAS/ESP
Indicator lamp 296
Batteries, SmartKey
Check lamp 99
Replacing 353
Batteries, vehicle 248
Charging 365
Consumer battery 248, 363
Maintenance 363
Messages in the multifunction
display 313
Starter battery 248
Battery charger 365
Bead 279
393
Bi-Xenon headlamps 393
Body surface 290
Brake fluid 385, 387
Checking 239
Brake lamp
High mounted 356
Brake pads
Messages in the multifunction
display 320
Brake warning lamp 29, 298
Brake/parking lamp 356
Brakes 228
Break-in period 226
Bulbs
Changing 355
Front 356
Messages in the multifunction
display 326
Rear 356
Button
Audio system 144
401
Index
C
CAC 393
CAN system 394
Capacities
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. 385
Cargo area see Trunk
Cassette operation
Playing cassettes 150
Catalytic converter 235
CD changer 154
Loading/unloading a CD
magazine 155
Location 155
CD operation 154
CD player
Operating 123
Cellular phone
Delayed switch-off time 203
Inserting the cradle 203
Making calls in hands-free mode 205
Making calls in private mode 204
Re-inserting 204
Removing the cradle 202
Center air vents 31
402
Center console
Lower part 32
Upper part 31
Center storage compartment 199
Centigrade
Setting temperature units 128
Central locking
Automatic 103
Central locking switch 31, 103
Switching on/off (control
system) 135
Unlocking from inside 103
Changing
Bulbs 355
CDs 154
Charging the batteries (vehicle) 365
Battery charger 365
Checking
Brake fluid 239
Coolant level 239, 247
Engine oil level 239
Tire inflation pressure 240
Vehicle lighting 240
Washer reservoir level 240
Child safety
Airbags 64
Automatic child seat recognition 75
Infant and child restraint systems 62
Cigarette lighter 200
Cleaning
Headlamps 177, 293
Vehicle 291
Windows 292
Windshield 54
Wiper blades 292
Cleaning tires 253
Clearing
Service display 287
Clock 130
Closing
Hood 244
Trunk lid 102
Windows 191, 192
Windows with SmartKey 193
Cockpit 26, 394
Cold tire inflation pressure 279
Combination switch 27, 52, 109
High beam flasher 52
Windshield wipers 53
Index
Comfort
Shift program mode 171
Compact guide 350
Control and operation of radio
transmitters 235
Control system 117, 394
AUDIO menu 122
Display digital speedometer 122
Functions 119, 121
Instrument cluster submenu 128
Lighting submenu 131
Menus 120, 121
Multifunction display 117
Multifunction steering wheel 118
Selecting radio system 123
Settings menu 125
Standard display menu 117, 122
Submenus 119, 121
TEL menu 138
Time submenu 129
Trip computer menu 136
Vehicle submenu 134
Coolant 247, 389
Adding 247
Anticorrosion/antifreeze
quantity 390
Checking level 247
Messages in the multifunction
display 323
Temperature 237
Temperature gauge 114
Topping up 247
Warning lamp 29, 300
Coolant level
Checking 239, 247
Messages in the multifunction
display 322
Cooling see Air conditioning
Courtesy lighting 112
Cruise control 195, 394
Canceling 196
Driving downhill 196
Driving uphill 196
Fine adjustment 197
Lever 27, 195
Setting current speed 196
Setting speeds 197
Curb weight 279
Customer Assistance Center 393
D
Daytime running lamp mode 107
Setting 131
Deactivating
Air conditioning (cooling) 190
Air recirculation mode 187
Alarm 91
Anti-theft alarm system 91
Automatic climate control 189
Central locking (control system)
Cruise control 196
Engine with the SmartKey 59
ESP 83
Exterior lamps 106
Exterior lamps delayed shut-off
Headlamps 58
Immobilizer 90
Interior light delayed switch-off
Interior lighting delayed shut-off
Manual gearshift program 176
Rear window defroster 179
Residual heat 188
Tow-away alarm 92
Deep water see Standing water
Defroster
Rear window 179
135
133
134
134
403
Index
Defrosting the windshield 186
Delayed shut-off
Exterior lamps 133
Interior lighting 134
Delayed switch-off
Interior lighting 134
Delayed switch-off time
Cellular phone 203
Department of Transportation see DOT
Differential
Message in the multifunction
display 325
Difficulties
While driving see Problems while driving
With starting 50
Digital speedometer 122
Direction of rotation (tires) 254
Display elements
Audio system 142
Displays
Digital speedometer 122
Maintenance service indicator 287
Showing vehicle status
messages 124
Vehicle status messages 305
404
Distance to empty (range)
Calling up 137
Door
Handle 34
Message in the multifunction
display 321
Opening 100
Opening from the inside 100
Opening from the outside 100
Opening in an emergency 352
Unlocking from the outside 98
DOT 280
Downhill driving
Cruise control 196
Downshifting 166
Drinking and driving 227
Driving 46, 51
Driving abroad 234
Hydroplaning 232
In winter 233
Problems 55
Safety systems 79
Through standing water 234
Driving abroad 234
Driving hints
SBC brake system 86
Driving instructions 227
Driving off 230
Driving safety systems 79
ABS 79
BAS 81
ESP 81
SBC brake system 84
Driving systems 195
Cruise control 195
Driving tips 171
Dust cover 220
Slipping on/off 221
Index
E
Electric air pump 349
Electrical consumer battery 248
Electrical outlet see 12-V socket 201
Electronic Stability Program see ESP
Emergency
Opening the driver’s door 352
Opening the trunk 351
Unlocking the vehicle 351
Emergency call
911 162
Emergency call system
Initiating emergency call 208
Requirements 206
Emergency operation (Limp Home
Mode) 176
Emergency operations
Releasing trunk lid from inside 102
Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD) 72,
394
Emission control 236
Emission control information label 376
Engine
Compartment 241
Power output 378
Starting 49
Technical data 378
Turning off 59
Engine malfunction indicator lamp
Engine number 376, 394
Engine oil 244, 386
Adding 246
Additives 386
Checking 245
Checking level 239
Consumption 244
Filler neck 245
Message in the multifunction
display 333
Viscosity 394
Engine oil temperature 29
Oil temperature symbol 301
Engine start button 31
Entry/exit lights 111
29
ESP 79, 81, 394
Control switch 32
Messages in the multifunction
display 308
Resetting 308
Switching off 83
Switching on 84
Warning lamp 81
ETD see Emergency Tensioning Device
Express-open windows 192
Exterior lamp switch 27, 52, 105
Exterior lamps
Delayed shut-off 133
Exterior lighting
Additional turn signals 356
Exterior rear view mirrors
Adjusting 32, 44
405
Index
F
Fahrenheit
Setting temperature units 128
Fastening the seat belts 46
Fine adjustment
Cruise control 197
First aid kit 349
Fitting
Anti-theft wheel nuts 284
Flat tire 358
TIREFIT kit 358
Floormat
Driver’s side 219
Installing 219
Removing 219
Fog lamp, rear 356
Switching on 109
Fog lamps, front 356
Switching on 108
Front airbags 68
Front bulbs 356
Front lamps
Switching on 105
406
Fuel
Additives 388
Gasoline additives 388
Premium unleaded gasoline 385,
387
Requirements 387
Reserve warning 29
Fuel consumption statistics
After start 136
Since last reset 137
Fuel filler flap 238
Locking 238
Unlocking 238
Fuel requirements 387
Fuel reserve
Message in the multifunction
display 334
Warning lamp 301
Fuel system
Message in the multifunction
display 332
Fuel tank
Filler flap 238
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. 385
Functions (control system) 119, 121
Fuses 371
G
Garage door opener 33, 213
Gasoline 238
GAWR 280
Gear range
Automatic transmission 168
Limiting 168
Shifting into optimal 167
Gear range limit
Canceling 167
Gear selector lever 32, 165
Lock 49, 396
Position 169
Position (automatic
transmission) 165
Gearshift
Indicator lamp 29
Gearshift program
Manual 171, 174
Global
Locking 98
Unlocking 98
GPS 395
Index
Gross Axle Weight Rating see GAWR
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating see GVWR
Gross Vehicle Weight see GVW
GVW 280
GVWR 280
H
Hands-free microphone 33
Telephone 33
Hazard warning flasher 31, 110
Headlamp cleaning system 249
Headlamp shut-off delay see Delayed
shut-off, exterior lamps
Headlamps
Automatic control 106
Cleaning 293
Cleaning system 177, 249
Refilling washer fluid 249
Switching off 58
Switching on 52
Head-thorax airbag 75, 395
Height
Seat 43
High beam flasher 52, 109, 356
High beam headlamp indicator 29
High beam headlamps
Switching on 109
High mounted brake lamp 356
High-pressure cleaners 291
Hood 241
Closing 244
Messages in the multifunction
display 321
Opening 241
Horn 27
Hydroplaning 232
407
Index
I
Identification labels
Emission control information
label 376
Vacuum line routing diagram
label 376
Ignition 40
Immobilizer 90
Activating 90
Deactivating 90
Infant and child restraint systems 72
Installing 77
Installing
Infant and child restraint systems 77
Towing eye bolt 369
Wiper blades 357
Instrument cluster 28, 113, 395
Coolant temperature gauge 114
Illumination 113
Multifunction display 117
Outside temperature indicator 115
Select language 129
Instrument lighting 113
408
Interior lighting 33, 111
Automatic control 111
Delayed shut-off 134
Delayed switch-off 134
Manual operation 112
Interior rear view mirror
Adjusting 44
Interior storage spaces 198
J
Jump starting
363
K
Key, SmartKey
Battery check lamp 98
Factory setting 98
Loss of 100
Opening 38
Positions in starter switch 40
Remote control 96
Replacing the battery 353
Turning off the engine 59
Kickdown 171, 395
Kilometers/miles in speedometer 128
Kilopascal 280
Knee airbags 68
Index
L
Lamps
Exterior 355
Lamps, indicator and warning
ABS 29, 297
ABS/ESP 29, 296
Airbrake 29, 301
BAS/ESP 296
Battery (SmartKey) 98
Brake warning lamp 29, 298
CHECK ENGINE 29
Coolant 300
Coolant level 29
Engine oil 29
ESP 81
Fuel reserve 29, 301
Gearshift 29
High beam 29
Maintenance service indicator 287
Manual gearshift 301
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF 304
SBC 84
Seat belt 29, 302
SRS 29, 63, 302
Tire pressure monitor 29
Turn signal 29
Language
Multifunction display 129
License plate illumination 356
Light
Sensor 331
Lighting
Automatic headlamp mode 106
Combination switch 109
Daytime running lamp mode 107
Exterior lamp switch 105
Front fog lamps 108
High beams 109
Instruments 113
Interior 111
Locator lighting 108
Low beam 105
Manual headlamp mode 106
Night security illumination 108
Parking lamps 105
Rear fog lamp 109
Settings (control system) 131
Standing lamps 105
Limiting the gear range 168
Limp Home Mode 176
Loading terminology 279
Loading the vehicle 254
Location
Audio system 141
Compact guide (Canada only) 350
Telephone 199
Locator lighting 108, 132
Locking 57
Automatic while driving 103
Centrally from inside 103
Fuel filler flap 238
Global, SmartKey 98
Loss of
Keys 100
Service and Warranty Information
Booklet 375
Low and high beam lamp 356
409
Index
M
Main dimensions 383
Main odometer 29
Maintenance 287, 363
Maintenance service
Overdue 288
Types 288
When due 287
Maintenance service indicator
Calling up 289
Clearing 289
Making a telephone call 30
Making calls
Hands-free mode 205
Private mode 204
MAN
Gearshift program 171
Manual
Shift program mode 171
Manual gearshift
Warning lamp 301
410
287
Manual gearshift program 174
Activating 174
Deactivating 176
Downshifting 175
Selecting 174
Upshifting 175
Manual headlamp mode 106
Manual operation
Interior lighting control 112
Manually
Opening the driver’s door 352
Opening the trunk 351
Map pocket in passenger footwell 198
Maximum cooling MAXCOOL 185
Maximum inflation pressure 280
Maximum load rating 280
Maximum loaded vehicle weight 280
Mechanical key 351
Menus 119
AUDIO 122
In control system 120, 121
Settings menu 125
Standard display 122
Submenus 119
TEL 138
Trip computer 136
Vehicle status message memory
Messages
ABS 307
ACL malfunction 309
Airbrake 321
Battery (vehicle) 313
Brake pads 320
Bulbs 326
Coolant 323
Coolant level 322
Differential 325
Doors 321
Engine oil 333
ESP 308
Fuel system 332
Hood 321
Parking brake 319
Reserve fuel 334
SBC brake system 315
Seat belt 321
SmartKey 334
TeleAid 312
Tire 341
Trunk lid 321
Washer fluid 334
124
Index
Miles/kilometers in speedometer 128
Mirrors 44, 177
Auto-dimming for interior rear view
mirror 177
Exterior rear view mirror 44
Interior rear view mirror 44
MON 238, 395
Mph or km/h in speedometer 128
Multifunction display 117, 395
Left 29
Right 29
Selecting language 129
Standard display 117
Multifunction display messages
Tires 335
Multifunction steering wheel 30, 118,
395
Buttons 118
N
Night security illumination 108
Setting 133
Normal occupant weight 280
O
Occupant distribution 280
Occupant safety
Children and airbags 64
Octane number 396
Oil see Engine oil
One-touch gearshifting 166
Canceling gear range limit 167
Downshifting 166
Upshifting 167
Opening
Door from the inside 100
Door from the outside 100
Driver’s door in an emergency 352
Hood 241
Trunk 99
Trunk from the inside 101
Trunk in an emergency 351
Vehicle in an emergency 351
Windows 191, 192
Windows with SmartKey 193
With the key 38
Operating
Audio system 141
CD player 123
Radio 123
Radio transmitters 235
Telephone 138, 141, 158
Operating safety
Audio system 141
Operating system
Vehicle status message memory 124
Operator’s manual 349
Overdue maintenance service 288
Overhead control panel 33
Overspeed range 396
411
Index
P
Paint number 376
Panic alarm 78
Panic button on SmartKey 78
Parcel net in trunk 199
Parking 57, 230
Parking brake 32
Engaging 57
Message in the multifunction
display 319
Releasing 50
Parking lamps 356
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
Warning lamp 304
Passenger compartment 234
Passenger side
Front airbag 68
Head-thorax airbag 69
Knee airbag 68
Pedals 227
Performance enhancement system
Airbrake 87
Phone book 139
Loading 139
Quick search 140
412
Phone number
Dialing 139
Redialing 140
Playing
CDs 155
Poly-V-belt drive 396
Layout 377
Potential problems associated with underinflated and overinflated tires 268
Power assistance 228
Power train 396
Power washer 291
Power windows 191
Synchronizing 194
Problems
While driving 55
With the vehicle 21
Production options weight 280
Program mode selector switch 396
PSI 281
Q
Quick search
Phone book
140
R
Radio
Selecting stations 123
Station search 123
Station selection setting 135
Radio operation 147
Radio see Radio operation
Radio transmitters, control and
operation 235
Range (distance to empty)
Calling up 137
Reactivating
Automatic climate control 189
Reading lamp 33
Rear
Storage compartment 199
Rear bulbs 356
Rear fog lamp
Switching on 109
Rear lamps see Tail lamps
Rear view mirrors see Mirrors
Rear window defroster 179
Index
Rear-view mirror 33
Recommended inflation pressure 281
Redial memory 140
Refueling 238
Refuelling
Unleaded premium grade
gasoline 238
Regular checks 239
Remote control
SmartKey 96
Removing
Anti-theft wheel nuts 284
Replacing
Battery (SmartKey) 353
Wiper blades 357
Resetting
All functions (control system) 126
ESP 308
Fuel consumption 137
Maintenance service indicator 289
Trip odometer 115
Residual heat utilization 188
Restraint system see Infant and child restraint systems
Restraint systems 62
Airbags 62, 63
Child seat recognition 62
Child seats 62
Emergency Tensioning Device
(ETD) 62, 72
Seat belts 62, 69
Rim 281
RON 238, 396
Roof rack 223
S
Safety systems
Driving 79
SBC brake system 79, 84, 396
Activation 85
Deactivation 86
Driving hints 86
Emergency operating mode 84
Messages in the multifunction
display 315
Self-check 85, 320
Warning lamp 84
Seat
Angle 43
Fore and aft 43
Height 43
Seat belt force limiter 72
Seat belts 46, 62
Message in the multifunction
display 321
Telltale 302
Seating capacity 256
Selecting
Manual gearshift program 174
413
Index
Self-test
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation
system 75
Sensor
Light 331
Service
Calling up the due date 288
Service life (tires) 252
Service see Maintenance
Setting
Cruise control 196
Current speed 196
Daytime running lamp mode 131
Higher speed in cruise control 197
Hours (clock) 130
Individual vehicle settings 125
Instrument lighting 113
Interior lighting delayed shut-off 134
Interior lighting delayed
switch-off 134
Lamps and lighting (control
system) 131
Locator lighting 132
Lower speed in cruise control 197
414
Miles/kilometers in
speedometer 128
Minutes (clock) 130
Multifunction display language 129
Night security illumination 133
Speed in cruise control 197
Speedometer display mode 128
Station selection mode 135
Temperature (interior) 183
Temperature indicator 128
Time display mode 130
Tire inflation pressure units 136
Units
Temperature 128
Tire inflation pressure 136
Units in speedometer 128
Settings
Factory (SmartKey) 98
Menus and submenus 119
Resetting all (control system) 126
Selective, SmartKey 98
Settings menu
Functions in 125
Individual vehicle settings 125
Submenus 126
Shift program mode
Comfort 171
Manual 171
Sport 171
Shift program mode selector switch
Automatic transmission 171
Shifting
Gear selector lever 165
Gear selector lever positions 169
Into optimal gear range (automatic
transmission) 167
Side air vents 31
Side marker lamp
Rear 356
Side windows
Cleaning 292
Sidewall 281
Simultaneous wiping and washing
Windshield wipers 54
Single wipe 54
Slipping on/off
Dust cover 221
Index
SmartKey 96
Checking the batteries 99
Global locking 98
Global unlocking 98
Messages in the multifunction
display 334
Opening and closing the windows
with 193
Restoring to factory setting 99
Selective setting 98
Unlocking the trunk lid 99
Snow chains 286
Soft keys
Audio system 144
Spare parts service 374
Speed
Setting current 196
Speed settings
Cruise control 197
Speedometer
Setting units 128
Sport
Shift program mode 171
SRS 397
Indicator lamp 29, 302
Standing water
Driving instructions 234
Start button 49
Starter battery 248, 363
Starter switch 27, 40
Starting difficulties 50
Starting the engine 49
Steering column
Height adjustment 44
Length adjustment 44
Steering wheel 43
Adjusting 43
Buttons 30
Steering wheel gearshift control
Automatic transmission 172
Warning lamp 301
Storage compartment
Armrest 198
Center 199
Rear 199
Storage compartments 198
Storing tires 253
Submenus
For settings 119
In control system 121
Instrument cluster 128
Lighting 131
Resetting functions 126
Selecting 126
Settings menus 126
Time 129
Vehicle 134
Sun visors 178
Switching off
Audio system 144
Automatic central locking (control
system) 135
Delayed (exterior lamps) 133
Engine 59
Hazard warning flasher 110
Headlamps 58
415
Index
Switching on
Audio system 144
Automatic central locking (control
system) 135
ESP 84
Front fog lamps 108
Hazard warning flasher 110
Headlamps 52
High beams 109
Rear fog lamp 109
Windshield wipers 54
Symbol
Engine oil temperature 301
Synchronizing
Power windows 194
416
T
Tachometer
Displaying gear range 168
Overspeed range 115
Technical data 372
Electrical system 382
Engine 378
Engine power output 378
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. 385
Main dimensions 383
Poly-V-belt 377
Rims and tires 379
Weights 384
Windshield and headlamp washer
system 391
Tele Aid 205, 397
Emergency call button 33
Emergency calls 207
Information 210
Initiating an emergency call
manually 208
Messages in the multifunction
display 312
Roadside Assistance 209
SOS button 208
Tele Aid system 206
Telephone 201
Answering a call 139
Dialing 139
Ending a call 139
Hands-free microphone 33
Loading phone book 139
Operating 138
Operation 158
Redialing 140
Signal strength 138
Storage location 199
Temperature
Outside temperature indicator 115
Sensor 33
Setting interior temperature 183
Setting units in display 128
Tires 262
Tightening torque 397
Time
Setting hours 130
Setting minutes 130
Time display mode
Setting 130
TIN 281
Index
Tire
Vehicle maximum load on 282
Tire and Loading Information 255
Tire and loading terminology 279
Tire care and maintenance 252
Tire Identification Number see TIN
Tire inflation pressure 360
Checking 240, 261, 263
Checking manually 263
Setting units 136
Tire inflation pressure see the placard on
the fuel filler flap
Tire inspection 252
Tire load rating 281
Tire ply composition and material
used 281
Tire speed rating 232, 272, 281
Tire terminology 279
Tire traction 232
TIREFIT kit 349, 358, 397
Using 358
Tires 251
Direction of rotation 254
Driving instructions 231
Message in the multifunction
display 341
Messages in display 335
Messages in the display 310, 311
Retreads 251
Rims and tires 379
Rotating 282
Service life 252
Temperature 262, 278
Tire pressure monitor warning
lamp* 29, 303
Tread depth 253, 285
Wear pattern 282
Winter* 285
Topping up
Coolant 247
Engine oil 246
Tow-away alarm 92
Arming 92
Canceling alarm 93
Disarming 92
Disarming for transport 92
Switch 32
Towing 367
Transmission damage 370
Towing eye bolt 349
Installing/reinstalling 369
Traction 171, 281
Transmission
Damage 370
Transporting 370
Traveling abroad 234
Tread 281
Tread depth 253
Tread depth (tires) 285
Treadwear indicators 281
Trip computer 136
Trip odometer
Resetting 115
Trunk
Closing the lid 102
Opening 99
Opening from inside vehicle 101
Opening in an emergency 351
Parcel net 199
Trunk lid emergency release 102
417
Index
Trunk lamp 112
Trunk lid
Closing 102
Emergency release 102
Message in the display 321
Trunk lid rack 223
Trunk lock 101
Turn signals 27, 53
Front 356
Indicator lamps 29
Rear 356
Turning off
Engine 59
418
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards 282
Units
Setting speedometer units 128
Setting temperature units 128
Setting tire inflation pressure
units 136
Unlocking 38
Centrally from inside 103
Driver’s doors in an emergency 352
Fuel filler flap 238
Global 98
Selective settings 98
Trunk in an emergency 351
Uphill driving
Cruise control 196
Upshifting 167
Useful features
12-V socket 201
Ashtray and cigarette lighter 200
Dust cover 220
Floormats 219
Garage door opener 213
Map pocket in passenger
footwell 198
Parcel net in trunk 199
Storage compartments 198
Tele Aid 205
Telephone 201
Index
V
Vacuum line routing diagram label 376
Vehicle
Cleaning 291
Individual settings 125
Locking 31
Towing 367
Transporting 370
Unlocking 31
Unlocking in an emergency 351
Vehicle capacity weight 282
Vehicle care 291
Window cleaning 292
Wiper blades 292
Vehicle Identification Number 376
Vehicle lighting
Checking 240
Vehicle literature portfolio 349
Vehicle loading terminology 279
Vehicle maximum load on the tire 282
Vehicle status message memory
Calling up 124
Clearing 125
Vehicle status messages
Displaying 124
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display 305
Ventilation and residual heat 188
VIN (vehicle identification number) 397
W
Warning sounds
Driver’s seat belt 69
Parking brake 51
Warranty coverage 375
Washer fluid
Message in the multifunction
display 334
Washer reservoir level
Checking 240
Washing the vehicle 290
Wear pattern (tires) 282
Wheels
Tires and wheels 251
Windows
Automatic opening 192
Closing 191, 192, 193
Closing fully 192
Closing with SmartKey 193
Express-open 192
Opening 191, 192, 193
Opening fully 192
Opening with SmartKey 193
Stopping 193
Synchronizing power windows
194
419
Index
Windows see Side windows
Windshield
Refilling washer fluid 249
Washer fluid 249
Windshield and headlamp washer
system 391
Windshield washer fluid
Refilling 249
Wiping with 54
Windshield wipers 27, 53
Fast wiper speed 54
Replacing the wiper blades 357
Single wipe 54
Switching on 54
Wiping with windshield washer
fluid 54
Winter driving
Snow chains 286
Tires* 285
Winter driving instructions 233
Winter tires* 285
420
Wiper blade
Replacing 357
Wiper blades
Cleaning 292
Wiping
Interval 54
With windshield washer fluid
54
421
Service and Literature
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has trained technicians and original Mercedes-Benz parts to service your vehicle properly.
For expert advice and quality service, see an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com or www.mercedes-benz.ca.
G
Warning!
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of
incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.
If you have any questions about carrying out any type of service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this Operator’s Manual.
Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing.
Press time September 8, 2004
GSP/TIP
Printed in Germany
Order No. 6515 4805 13 Part No. 199 584 17 81 USA Edition B 2005
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising